Delta VFD C200 User Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 363

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.

com



-&(
7KLVZHEYHUVLRQZLOOEHLQFOXGHGLQWKHXSFRPLQJ
RIILFLDOUHOHDVHGGRFXPHQW&(

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com

Preface
Thank you for choosing DELTA’s high-performance VFD-C200 Series. The VFD-C200 Series is
manufactured with high-quality components and materials and incorporate the latest
microprocessor technology available.

This manual is to be used for the installation, parameter setting, troubleshooting, and daily
maintenance of the AC motor drive. To guarantee safe operation of the equipment, read the
following safety guidelines before connecting power to the AC motor drive. Keep this operating
manual at hand and distribute to all users for reference.

To ensure the safety of operators and equipment, only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor
drive are to do installation, start-up and maintenance. Always read this manual thoroughly before
using VFD-C200 series AC Motor Drive, especially the DANGER and CAUTION notes. Failure to
comply may result in personal injury and equipment damage. If you have any questions, please
contact your dealer.

PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.


; AC input power must be disconnected before any wiring to the AC motor drive is made.
; Even if the power has been turned off, a charge may still remain in the DC-link
DANGER capacitors with hazardous voltages before the POWER LED is OFF. Please do not
touch the internal circuit and components.
; There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards. These
components are especially sensitive to static electricity. Please do not touch these
components or the circuit boards before taking anti-static measures. Never reassemble
internal components or wiring.
; Ground the AC motor drive using the ground terminal. The grounding method must
comply with the laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be installed.
; DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a place subjected to high temperature, direct
sunlight and inflammables.

; Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 directly to the
AC mains circuit power supply.
CAU TION
; Only qualified persons are allowed to install, wire and maintain the AC motor drives.
; Even if the 3-phase AC motor is stop, a charge may still remain in the main circuit
terminals of the AC motor drive with hazardous voltages.
; If the AC motor drive is stored in no charge condition for more than 3 months, the
ambient temperature should not be higher than 30 °C. Storage longer than one year is
not recommended, it could result in the degradation of the electrolytic capacitors.
NOTE

The content of this manual may be revised without prior notice. Please consult our distributors or download the most
updated version at http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com

Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................1-1

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................2-1

CHAPTER 3 HOW TO SELECT THE RIGHT AC MOTOR DIRVE..................................................3-1

CHAPTER 4 WIRING ............................................................................................................................4-1

CHAPTER 5 MAIN CIRCUIT TERMINALS .....................................................................................5-1

CHPATER 6 CONTROL TERMINALS.................................................................................................6-1

CHAPTER 7 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES............................................................................................7-1

CHAPTER 8 SPECIFICATION .............................................................................................................8-1

CHAPTER 9 DIGITAL KEYPAD...........................................................................................................9-1

CHAPTER 10 SUMMARPY OF PARAMETERS ...............................................................................10-1

CHAPTER 11 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETER SETTINGS..........................................................11-1

CHPAPTER 12 WARNING CODES.....................................................................................................12-1

CHAPTER 13 CANOPEN OVERVIEW ..............................................................................................13-1

CHAPTER 14 PLC FUNCTION...........................................................................................................14-1

CHAPTER 15 SUGGESTIONS AND ERROR CORRECTIONS FOR STANDARD AC MOTOR


DRIVES .................................................................................................................................................15-1

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 1 Introduction|C200 Series

Chapter 1 Introduction
Receiving and Inspection
After receiving the AC motor drive, please check for the following:

1. Please inspect the unit after unpacking to assure it was not damaged during shipment. Make sure
that the part number printed on the package corresponds with the part number indicated on the
nameplate.
2. Make sure that the voltage for the wiring lie within the range as indicated on the nameplate. Please
install the AC motor drive according to this manual.
3. Before applying the power, please make sure that all the devices, including power, motor, control
board and digital keypad, are connected correctly.
4. When wiring the AC motor drive, please make sure that the wiring of input terminals “R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3” and output terminals”U/T1, V/T2, W/T3” are correct to prevent drive damage.
5. When power is applied, select the language and set parameter groups via the digital keypad
(KPE-LE02). When executes trial run, please begin with a low speed and then gradually increases
the speed untill the desired speed is reached.

Nameplate Information
A c Drive Mo d e l MODEL: VFD007CB43A-20
In p u t Vo lta g e /Cu rre n t INPUT :
Normal Duty: 3PH 380-480V 50/60Hz 4.3A
Heavy Duty: 3PH 380-480V 50/60Hz 4.1A
Ou tp u t Vo lta g e /Cu rre n t OUTPUT :
Normal Duty: 3PH 380-480V 3A 2.4KVA 1HP
Heavy Duty: 3PH 380-480V 2.9A 2.3KVA 1HP
F re q u e n cy Ra n g e FREQUENCY RANGE :
Normal Duty: 0-600Hz
Heavy Duty: 0-600Hz
F irm wa re Ve rsio n Version:VX.XX

Ce rtifica tio n s

E n c lo su re typ e (IP X X )

S e ria l Nu m b e r 007C B EA I T1080001


DALTA ELECTRO NI CS. I NC.
MADE I N x x x x x x x x

1-1
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 1 Introduction|C200 Series

Model Name
VFD 007 CB 43 A - 21 M

Protection Mode: Blank: standard model


M: Enhanced case model
20: IP20/UL Open Type
21: IP20/NEMA1
Installation method: Wall mounting
Input voltage

C200 Series
Applicable motor capcity
004:0.5HP(0.375kW)~ 075:10HP(7.5kW)
Refer to the specifications for details

Series name (Variable Frequency Drive)

Serial Number

007 CB EA I T 1 08 0001

Prcoduction number
Prcoduction week
Prcoduction year (2011)
Prcoduction factory
T:Taoyuan
W: Wujian
S: Shanghai
I : IP20/UL Open Type
J: IP20/NEMA1
EA : 460V 3 - PHASE
BA : 230V 1-PHASE
DA: 230V 3-PHASE
Product series:
CB: C200 standard
CM: C200 enhanced case protection model
1HP(0.75kW)
Model number

1-2
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 1 Introduction|C200 Series

RFI Jumper
RFI Jumper: The AC motor drive may emit the electrical noise. The RFI jumper is used to suppress the
interference (Radio Frequency Interference) on the power line.

Frame A0~A Screw Torque: 8~10kg-cm(6.9-8.7 lb -in.)

Loosen the screws and remove the MOV-PLATE. Fasten the screws back to the original position after
MOV-PLATE is removed.
Frame A0

Frame A

Main power isolated from earth:


If the AC motor drive is supplied from an isolated power (IT power), the RFI jumper must be cut off. Then
the RFI capacities (filter capacitors) will be disconnected from ground to prevent circuit damage
(according to IEC 61800-3) and reduce earth leakage current.

CAUTION!

1. When power is applied to the AC motor drive, do not cut off the RFI jumper.
2. Make sure main power is switched off before cutting the RFI jumper.

1-3
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 1 Introduction|C200 Series

3. The gap discharge may occur when the transient voltage is higher than 1,000V. Besides,
electro-magnetic compatibility of the AC motor drives will be lower after cutting the RFI jumper.
4. Do NOT cut the RFI jumper when main power is connected to earth.
5. The RFI jumper cannot be cut when Hi-pot tests are performed. The mains power and motor must be
separated if high voltage test is performed and the leakage currents are too high.
6. To prevent drive damage, the RFI jumper connected to ground shall be cut off if the AC motor drive is
installed on an ungrounded power system or a high resistance-grounded (over 30 ohms) power
system or a corner grounded TN system.

1-4
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 1 Introduction|C200 Series

Dimensions
Frame A0
VFD004CB21A-20; VFD007CB21A-20; VFD004CB23A-20; VFD007CB23A-20; VFD007CB43A-20;
VFD015CB43A-20;
VFD015CB23A-20 (Fan Module included)

Unit: mm [inch]
W H D W1 H1 D1 S1 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
110.0 180.0 160.0 99.6 169.0 151.0 5.5 - - -
[4.33] [7.09] [6.30] [3,92] [6.65] [5.94] [0.22]

1-5
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 1 Introduction|C200 Series

Frame A0
VFD015CB21A-20; VFD022CB21A-20; VFD022CB23A-20; VFD037CB23A-20; VFD022CB43A-20;
VFD037CB43A-20;

Unit: mm [inch]
W H D W1 H1 D1 S1 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
110.0 180.0 151.0 99.6 169.0 142.0 5.5
- - -
[4.33] [7.09] [5.94] [3,92] [6.65] [5.59] [0.22]

1-6
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 1 Introduction|C200 Series

Frame A0
VFD007CB43A-21; VFD015CB43A-21; VFD004CB23A-21; VFD007CB23A-21; VFD004CB21A-21;
VFD007CB21A-21;
VFD015CB23A-21 (Fan Module included)

Unit: mm [inch]
W H D W1 H1 H2 D1 S1 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
110.0 200.0 160.0 99.6 180.0 169.0 151.0 5.5
- - -
[4.33] [7.87] [6.30] [3,92] [7.09] [6.65] [5.94] [0.22]

1-7
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 1 Introduction|C200 Series

Frame A0

VFD022CB43A-21; VFD037CB43A-21; VFD022CB23A-21; VFD037CB23A-21; VFD015CB21A-21;


VFD022CB21A-21;

Unit: mm [inch]
W H D W1 H1 H2 D1 S1 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
110.0 200.0 151.0 99.6 180.0 169.0 142.0 5.5
- - -
[4.33] [7.87] [5.94] [3,92] [7.09] [6.65] [5.59] [0.22]

1-8
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 1 Introduction|C200 Series

Frame A0
VFD004CB21A-21M; VFD004CB23A-21M; VFD007CB21A-21M; VFD007CB23A-21M;
VFD007CB43A-21M; VFD015CB43A-21M;
VFD015CB23A-21M (Fan Module included)

Unit: mm [inch]
W H D W1 H1 D1 S1 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
110.0 200.0 160.0 99.6 180.0 151.0 5.5 - - -
[4.33] [7.87] [6.30] [3,92] [7.09] [5.94] [0.22]

1-9
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 1 Introduction|C200 Series

Frame A0
VFD015CB21A-21M; VFD022CB21A-21M; VFD022CB23A-21M; VFD037CB23A-21M;
VFD022CB43A-21M; VFD037CB43A-21M;

Unit: mm [inch]
W H D W1 H1 D1 S1 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
110.0 200.0 151.0 99.6 180.0 142.0 5.5
- - -
[4.33] [7.87] [5.94] [3,92] [7.09] [5.59] [0.22]

1-10
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 1 Introduction|C200 Series

Frame A
VFD040CB43A-20; VFD055CB43A-20; VFD075CB43A-20;
VFD040CB43A-21; VFD055CB43A-21; VFD075CB43A-21

Unit: mm [inch]
W H D W1 H1 D1 S1 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
130.0 250.0 179.0 116.0 236.0 170.0 6.2 22.2 34.0 28.0
[5.12] [9.84] [7.05] [4.57] [9.29] [6.69] [0.24] [0.87] [1.34] [1.10]

1-11
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 1 Introduction|C200 Series

Frame A
VFD040CB43A-21M; VFD055CB43A-21M; VFD075CB43A-21M;

Unit: mm [inch]
W H D W1 H1 D1 S1 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
130.0 250.0 179.0 116.0 236.0 170.0 6.2 22.2 34.0 28.0
[5.12] [9.84] [7.05] [4.57] [9.29] [6.69] [0.24] [0.87] [1.34] [1.10]

1-12
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 1 Introduction|C200 Series

Digital Keypad
KPE-LE02

71.9 [2.83] 25.9 [1.02] 8.6 [0.34] 52.4 [2.06]


M3*0.5(2X)

42.4 [1.67]

34.3 [1.35]
16.3 [0.64] 1.5 [0.06] 61.0 [2.40]

8.1 [0.32]

1-13
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 2 Installation|C200 Series

Chapter 2 Installation

Minimum Mounting Clearance and Installation


NOTE

; Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, shredded wood saw dust, metal particles, etc. from
adhereing to the heat sink
; Install the AC motor drive in a metal cabinet. When installing one drive below another one,
use a metal separation between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating and to
prevent the risk of fire accident.
; Install the AC motor drive in Pollution Degree 2 environments only: normallyl only
nonconductive pollution occurs and temporary conductivity caused by condensation is
expected.
The appearances shown in the following figures are for reference only.
Airflow direction: (Blue arrow) inflow (Red arrow) outflow
Single drive installation Side-by-side installation

Multiple drives, side-by-side installation

2-1
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 2 Installation|C200 Series

Multiple drives side-by-side installation and in rows


When installing one AC motor drive below another one (top-bottom installation), use a metal separation
between the drives to prevent mutual heating. The temperature measured at the fan’s inflow side must be
lower than the temperature measured at the operation side. If the fan’s inflow temperature is higher, use
a thicker or larger size of metal seperature. Operation temperature is the temperature measured at 50mm
away from the fan’s inflow side. (As shown in the figure below)

Minimum mounting clearance


Frame A (mm) B (mm) C (mm) D (mm)
A0-A 60 30 10 0
Frame A0 VFD004CB21A-20/-21/-21M; VFD007CB21A-20/-21/-21M; VFD004CB23A-20/-21/-21M;
VFD007CB23A-20/-21/-21M; VFD015CB23A-20/-21/-21M; VFD007CB43A-20/-21/-21M;
VFD015CB43A-20/-21/-21M; VFD015CB21A-20/-21/-21M; VFD022CB21A-20/-21/-21M;
VFD022CB23A-20/-21/-21M; VFD037CB23A-20/-21/-21M; VFD022CB43A-20/-21/-21M;
VFD037CB43A-20/-21/-21M;
Frame A VFD040CB43A-20/-21/-21M; VFD055CB43A-20/-21/-21M; VFD075CB43A-20/-21/-21M;
NOTE
1. The minimum mounting clearances stated in the table above applies to AC motor drives frame A to D. A drive
fails to follow the minimum mounting clearances may cause the fan to malfunction and heat dissipation problem.

2-2
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 2 Installation|C200 Series

NOT E
※ The mounting clearances stated in the figure is for installing the drive in an
open area. To install the drive in a confined space (such as cabinet or
electric box), please follow the following three rules: (1) Keep the minimum
mounting clearances. (2) Install a ventilation equipment or an air
conditioner to keep surrounding temperature lower than operation
temperature. (3) Refer to parameter setting and set up Pr. 00-16, Pr.00-17,
and Pr. 06-55.
※ The following table shows the heat dissipation and the required air
volume when installing a single drive in a confined space. When
installing multiple drives, the required air volume shall be multiplied
by the number the drives.
※ Refer to the chart (Air flow rate for cooling) for ventilation equipment
design and selection.
※ Refer to the chart (Power dissipation) for air conditioner design and
selection.

Air flow rate for cooling Power dissipation of AC motor drive


Power Dissipation
Flow Rate Flow Rate
Model No. Loss External
(cfm) (m3/hr) Internal Total
(Heat sink)
VFD004CB21A-20/-21/-21M - - 16 20 36
VFD007CB21A-20/-21/-21M - - 32 39 72
VFD015CB21A-20/-21/-21M 15 26 60 52 112
VFD022CB21A-20/-21/-21M 15 26 85 69 154
VFD004CB23A-20/-21/-21M - - 21 17 37
VFD007CB23A-20/-21/-21M - - 35 26 61
VFD015CB23A-20/-21/-21M 15 26 56 32 89
VFD022CB23A-20/-21/-21M 15 26 82 34 116
VFD037CB23A-20/-21/-21M 15 26 118 43 161
VFD007CB43A-20/-21/-21M - - 35 24 59
VFD015CB43A-20/-21/-21M - - 47 27 74
VFD022CB43A-20/-21/-21M 15 26 75 30 105
VFD037CB43A-20/-21/-21M 15 26 110 33 143
VFD040CB43A-20/-21/-21M 15 26 126 34 160
VFD055CB43A-20/-21/-21M 15 26 145 37 181
VFD075CB43A-20/-21/-21M 24 41 212 83 295
※ The required airflow shown in chart is for installing ※ The heat dissipation shown in the chart is
single drive in a confined space. for installing single drive in a confined
※ When installing the multiple drives, the required air space.
volume should be the required air volume for single ※ When installing the multiple drives,
drive X the number of the drives. volume of heat dissipation should be the
heat dissipated for single drive X the
number of the drives.
※ Heat dissipation for each model is
calculated by rated voltage, current and
default carrier.

2-3
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 2 Installation|C200 Series

Derating Curve Diagram of Normal Duty (Pr.00-16=0)


ƒ Set Pr.06-55 = 1 ƒ Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2
ƒ Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2 (40℃: UL open-type)
(50℃: UL open-type) (30℃: UL type1 or open type_size by size)
(40℃:UL type1 or open type_size by size)
460V 460V
VFD007~075CB43A VFD007~075CB43A
110 110

100 100
Ratio(%)

Ratio(%)
90 90

80 80

70 70
Fc Fc
60 60 (kHz)
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 (kHz) 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
ƒ Set Pr.06-55 = 1 ƒ Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2
ƒ Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2 (40℃: UL open-type)
(50℃: UL open-type) (30℃: UL type1 or open type_size by size)
(40℃:UL type1 or open type_size by size)
230V 230V
VFD004~037CB23A VFD004~037CB23A
VFD004~022CB21A VFD004~022CB21A
110 110
100 100
Ratio(%)

90 90
Ratio(%)

80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
Fc Fc
40 (kHz) 40 (kHz)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

2-4
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 2 Installation|C200 Series

Derating Curve Diagram of Heavy Duty (Pr.00-16=1)


ƒ Set Pr.06-55 = 1 ƒ Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2
ƒ Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2 (40℃: UL open-type)
(50℃: UL open-type) (30℃: UL type1 or open type_size by size)
(40℃: UL type1 or open type_size by size)
460V 460V
VFD007~075CB43A VFD007~075CB43A
110 110
100 100
Ratio(%)

Ratio(%)
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
Fc Fc
40 (kHz) 40
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
(kHz)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

ƒ Set Pr.06-55 = 1 ƒ Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2


ƒ Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2 (40℃: UL open-type)
(50℃: UL open-type) (30℃: UL type1 or open type_size by size)
(40℃: UL type1 or open type_size by size)
230V 230V
VFD004~037CB23A VFD004~037CB23A
VFD004~022CB21A VFD004~022CB21A
110 110
100 100
Ratio(%)

90 90
Ratio(%)

80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
Fc Fc
40 (kHz) 40 (kHz)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

2-5
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 3 How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|C200 Series

Chapter 3 How to Select the Right AC


Motor Drive
The choice of the right AC motor drive for the application is very important and has great influence on its
lifetime. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too large, it cannot offer complete protection to the motor and
motor maybe damaged. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too small, it cannot offer the required
performance and the AC motor drive maybe damaged due to overloading.

But by simply selecting the AC motor drive of the same capacity as the motor, user application
requirements cannot be met completely. Therefore, a designer should consider all the conditions,
including load type, load speed, load characteristic, operation method, rated output, rated speed, power
and the change of load capacity. The following table lists the factors you need to consider, depending on
your requirements.

Related Specification
Item Speed and
Overload Starting
torque Time ratings
capacity torque
characteristics
Friction load and weight load
Liquid (viscous) load
Load type ● ●
Inertia load
Load with power transmission
Constant torque
Load speed and Constant output
● ●
torque characteristics Decreasing torque
Decreasing output
Constant load
Shock load
Load characteristics Repetitive load ● ● ● ●
High starting torque
Low starting torque
Continuous operation, Short-time operation
● ●
Long-time operation at medium/low speeds
Maximum output current (instantaneous)
● ●
Constant output current (continuous)
Maximum frequency, Base frequency ●
Power supply transformer capacity or percentage
impedance
Voltage fluctuations and unbalance ● ●
Number of phases, single phase protection
Frequency
Mechanical friction, losses in wiring ● ●
Duty cycle modification ●

3-1
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 3 How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|C200 Series

3-1 Capacity Formulas

1. When one AC motor drive operates one motor


The starting capacity should be less than 1.5x rated capacity of AC motor drive
The starting capacity=
k×N ⎛ GD 2 N ⎞
⎜⎜ TL + × ⎟ ≤ 1.5 × the_capaci ty_of_AC_m otor_drive (kVA)
973 × η × cos ϕ ⎝ 375 t A ⎟⎠

2. When one AC motor drive operates more than one motor


2.1 The starting capacity should be less than the rated capacity of AC motor drive
„ Acceleration time ≦60 seconds
The starting capacity=
k×N ⎡ ⎤

[n + ns(ks − 1)] = PC1⎢⎢⎢⎢1 + n (ks − 1)⎥⎥⎥⎥ ≤ 1.5 × the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
s

η × cos ϕ
T

⎣ n T ⎦

„ Acceleration time ≧60 seconds


The starting capacity=
k×N ⎡ ⎤

[n + ns (ks − 1 )] = PC1 ⎢⎢⎢⎢1 + n (ks − 1)⎥⎥⎥⎥ ≤ the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)


s

η × cos ϕ
T

⎣T n ⎦

2.2 The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)
„ Acceleration time ≦60 seconds
⎡ ⎤
n + IM ⎢⎢⎣1+ nn ⎛⎜⎝⎜ kS −1⎞⎟⎠⎟ ⎥⎥⎦ ≤ 1.5 × the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( A)
T
S

„ Acceleration time ≧60 seconds


⎡ ⎤
n + IM ⎢⎢1+nn ⎛⎜⎝⎜ kS −1⎞⎟⎠⎟ ⎥⎥ ≤ the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( A)
T
S

⎣ T ⎦

2.3 When it is running continuously


„ The requirement of load capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor
drive(kVA)
The requirement of load capacity=
k × PM
≤ the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( kVA)
η × cos ϕ
„ The motor capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive
k × 3 × VM × IM ×10−3 ≤ the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
„ The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)
k × IM ≤ the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( A)

3-2
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 3 How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|C200 Series

Symbol explanation
PM : Motor shaft output for load (kW)
η : Motor efficiency (normally, approx. 0.85)
cos ϕ : Motor power factor (normally, approx. 0.75)
VM : Motor rated voltage(V)
IM : Motor rated current(A), for commercial power
k : Correction factor calculated from current distortion factor (1.05-1.1, depending on PWM
method)
P C1 : Continuous motor capacity (kVA)
kS : Starting current/rated current of motor
nT : Number of motors in parallel
nS : Number of simultaneously started motors
GD 2 : Total inertia (GD2) calculated back to motor shaft (kg m2)
TL : Load torque
tA : Motor acceleration time

N : Motor speed

3-3
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 3 How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|C200 Series

3-2 General Precaution


Selection Note
1. When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power transformer (600kVA or
above) or when a phase lead capacitor is switched, excess peak currents may occur in the power
input circuit and the converter section may be damaged. To avoid this, use an AC input reactor
(optional) before AC Motor Drive mains input to reduce the current and improve the input power
efficiency.
2. When a special motor is used or more than one motor is driven in parallel with a single AC Motor
Drive, select the AC Motor Drive current ≥1.25x(Sum of the motor rated currents).
3. The starting and accel./decel. characteristics of a motor are limited by the rated current and the
overload protection of the AC Motor Drive. Compared to running the motor D.O.L. (Direct On-Line),
a lower starting torque output with AC Motor Drive can be expected. If higher starting torque is
required (such as for elevators, mixers, tooling machines, etc.) use an AC Motor Drive of higher
capacity or increase the capacities for both the motor and the AC Motor Drive.
4. When an error occurs on the drive, a protective circuit will be activated and the AC Motor Drive
output is turned off. Then the motor will coast to stop. For an emergency stop, an external
mechanical brake is needed to quickly stop the motor.

Parameter Settings Note


1. The AC Motor Drive can be driven at an output frequency up to 400Hz (less for some models) with
the digital keypad. Setting errors may create a dangerous situation. For safety, the use of the
upper limit frequency function is strongly recommended.
2. High DC brake operating voltages and long operation time (at low frequencies) may cause
overheating of the motor. In that case, forced external motor cooling is recommended.
3. Motor accel./decel. time is determined by motor rated torque, load torque, and load inertia.
4. If the stall prevention function is activated, the accel./decel. time is automatically extended to a
length that the AC Motor Drive can handle. If the motor needs to decelerate within a certain time
with high load inertia that can’t be handled by the AC Motor Drive in the required time, either use
an external brake resistor and/or brake unit, depending on the model, (to shorten deceleration
time only) or increase the capacity for both the motor and the AC Motor Drive.

3-4
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 3 How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|C200 Series

3-3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor


Standard motor
When using the AC Motor Drive to operate a standard 3-phase induction motor, take the following
precautions:
1. The energy loss is greater than for an inverter duty motor.
2. Avoid running motor at low speed for a long time. Under this condition, the motor temperature may
rise above the motor rating due to limited airflow produced by the motor’s fan. Consider external
forced motor cooling.
3. When the standard motor operates at low speed for long time, the output load must be decreased.
4. The load tolerance of a standard motor is as follows:

Load duty-cycle
25%
40% 60%
100
82
torque(%)

70
60
50 continuous

0 3 6 20 60
Frequency (Hz)

5. If 100% continuous torque is required at low speed, it may be necessary to use a special inverter
duty motor.
6. Motor dynamic balance and rotor endurance should be considered once the operating speed
exceeds the rated speed (60Hz) of a standard motor.
7. Motor torque characteristics vary when an AC Motor Drive instead of commercial power supply
drives the motor. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be connected.
8. Because of the high carrier frequency PWM control of the VFD series, pay attention to the
following motor vibration problems:
„ Resonant mechanical vibration: anti-vibration (damping) rubbers should be used to mount
equipment that runs at varying speed.
„ Motor imbalance: special care is required for operation at 50 or 60 Hz and higher frequency.
„ To avoid resonances, use the Skip frequencies.
9. The motor fan will be very noisy when the motor speed exceeds 50 or 60Hz.

Special motors:
1. Pole-changing (Dahlander) motor:
The rated current is differs from that of a standard motor. Please check before operation and
select the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When changing the pole number the motor
needs to be stopped first. If over current occurs during operation or regenerative voltage is too
high, please let the motor free run to stop (coast).
2. Submersible motor:
The rated current is higher than that of a standard motor. Please check before operation and
choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. With long motor cable between AC motor
drive and motor, available motor torque is reduced.
3. Explosion-proof (Ex) motor:
Needs to be installed in a safe place and the wiring should comply with the (Ex) requirements.
Delta AC Motor Drives are not suitable for (Ex) areas with special precautions.
4. Gear reduction motor:
The lubricating method of reduction gearbox and speed range for continuous operation will be

3-5
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 3 How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|C200 Series

different and depending on brand. The lubricating function for operating long time at low speed
and for high-speed operation needs to be considered carefully.
5. Synchronous motor:
The rated current and starting current are higher than for standard motors. Please check before
operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When the AC motor drive
operates more than one motor, please pay attention to starting and changing the motor.

Power Transmission Mechanism


Pay attention to reduced lubrication when operating gear reduction motors, gearboxes, belts and
chains, etc. over longer periods at low speeds. At high speeds of 50/60Hz and above, lifetime
reducing noises and vibrations may occur.

Motor torque
The torque characteristics of a motor operated by an AC motor drive and commercial mains power
are different.
Below you’ll find the torque-speed characteristics of a standard motor (4-pole, 15kW):

AC motor drive Motor


180 180
155 60 seconds 155 60 seconds
140
torque (%)

torque (%)
100 100
80
55 55
38 38

03 20 60 120 0 3 20 60 120
Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 60Hz Base freq.: 60Hz
V/F for 220V/60Hz V/F for 220V/60Hz

180
140 60 seconds 150 60 seconds
130
torque (%)

torque (%)

100
85 100
68 80
45 45
35 35

03 20 50 120 0 20 50 120
3
Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 50Hz Base freq.: 50Hz
V/F for 220V/50Hz V/F for 220V/50Hz

3-6
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 4 Wiring|C200 Series

Chapter 4 Wiring
After removing the front cover, examine if the power and control terminals are clearly noted. Please read
following precautions before wiring.

; Make sure that power is only applied to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 terminals. Failure to comply may result
in damage to the equipments. The voltage and current should lie within the range as indicated on
the nameplate (Chapter 1-1).

; All the units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent lightning strike or
electric shock.

; Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is made
by the loose screws due to vibration

; It is crucial to turn off the AC motor drive power before any wiring installation are
made. A charge may still remain in the DC bus capacitors with hazardous voltages
even if the power has been turned off therefore it is suggested for users to measure
DANGER
the remaining voltage before wiring. For your personnel saftery, please do not
perform any wiring before the voltage drops to a safe level < 25 Vdc. Wiring
installation with remaninig voltage condition may caus sparks and short circuit.
; Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives is allowed to perform
installation, wiring and commissioning. Make sure the power is turned off before
wiring to prevent electric shock.

; When wiring, please choose the wires with specification that complys with local
regulation for your personnel safety.
; Check following items after finishing the wiring:
1. Are all connections correct?
2. Any loosen wires?
3. Any short-circuits between the terminals or to ground?

4-1
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 4 Wiring|C200 Series

Wiring Diagram
* It provides 1-phase/3-phase power Please refer to chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals

Fuse/NFB(No Fuse Breaker) +2 +1/DC+ DC- B1 B2


R(L1) R(L1)
U(T1) Motor
S(L2) S(L2)
T(L3) T(L3) V(T2) IM
3~
W(T3)
It is recommended to install a SA
protective circuit at RB-RC MC
to protect it from system
RB 1
damage.
When fault occurs, the
RC 1
OFF ON
contact will switch ON to shut
the power and protect the power system. MC
Factory setting: NPN (SINK) Mode +24V Multi-function output terminals
Please refer to Figure 1 for wiring COM RA1
of NPN mode and 250Vac/5A (N.O.)
FWD/STOP 250Vac/3A (N.C.)
PNP mode. FWD RB1
REV/STOP REV 250Vac/2A (N.O.)
Multi-step 1 RC1 Estimate at COS (0.4)
MI1
Multi-step 2 MI2 RA2 250Vac/1.2A (N.C.)
Estimate at COS (0.4)
Multi-step 3
Factory MI3
Multi-step 4 RB2 30Vdc/5A (N.O.)
setting MI4 30Vdc/3A (N.C.)
N/A MI5 RC2
N/A MI6
N/A MI7
N/A DFM1 Multi-function output
MI8 frequency terminals
NOTE
Digital Signal Common 30V30mA 33kHz
DCM
* MI7, MI8 can input 33kHzpulses
DFM2
* Do NOT apply the mains voltage directly
to above terminals.
DCM Multi-function
Photocoupler Output
+1 0 V /20 m A
+1 0V
AFM1 Analog Multi-function
3 0~1 0V /0 ~20 m A Output Terminal
5K 2 AV I
SW1 1 0~10VDC
0 /4~2 0 mA /0~1 0V ACM
0-20mA A CI Analog Signal common
4-20mA
-10 ~+1 0 V AFM2 Analog Multi-function
A UI
Analog Signal Common Output Terminal
A CM 0~20mA/4-20mA
0-10V
ACI AVI
1 2 8 1 Modbus RS- 485
SG+ PIN 3:GND
PIN 4:SG-
SG- PIN 5:SG+

Main circuit (power) terminals 120Ω CANopen


485 PIN 1: CAN H
Control terminals OPEN PIN 2: CAN L
J5 PIN 3, 7:GND
Shielded leads & Cable PIN 6: Reser ved
PIN 8: EV

4-2
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 4 Wiring|C200 Series

Figure 1
SINK(NPN)/SOURCE(PNP)Mode

1 Sink Mode 2 Sourc e Mode


with internal pow er (+24VDC) with internal power (+24VDC )

MI1 MI1

MI2 MI2
~

~
MI8 MI8

+2 4V DCM

COM COM

DCM internal c irc ui t +2 4V internal c irc ui t

3 Sink Mode 4 Sourc e Mode


with external pow er with external pow er

MI1 MI1

MI2 MI2
~

~
MI8 MI8

+2 4V +2 4V
COM COM

DCM DCM
external power +24V internal c irc ui t internal c irc ui t
external power +24V

4-3
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals|C200 Series

Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals


Main Circuit Diagram

For frame A0 Brake resistor


* Provide 1-phase/3-phase input power (optional)

Fuse/NFB(No Fuse Breaker)


DC+ DC- B1 B2
R(L1)
U(T1) Motor
R(L1) IM
S(L2)
S(L2) V(T2) 3~
T(L3) W(T3)
T(L3)

Terminals Descriptions
AC line input terminals 3-phase;
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
AC line input terminals 1-phase (R/L1, S/L2);
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 AC drive output terminals for connecting 3-phase induction motor
DC+, DC- Connections for brake unit (VFDB series)
B1, B2 Connections for brake resistor (optional)
Earth connection, please comply with local regulations.

For frame A DC choke


* Provide 3-phase input power (optional) Brake resistor
Jum per (optional)

Fuse/NFB(No Fuse Breaker)


+2 +1/DC+ DC- B1 B2
R(L1) U(T1) Motor
R(L1) IM
S(L2)
S(L2) V(T2) 3~
T(L3) W(T3)
T(L3)

Terminals Descriptions
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC line input terminals 3-phase
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 AC drive output terminals for connecting 3-phase induction motor
Connections for DC reactor to improve the power factor. It needs to remove the
+1, +2
jumper for installation.
+1/DC+, -/DC- Connections for brake unit (VFDB series)
B1, B2 Connections for brake resistor (built-in)
Earth connection, please comply with local regulations.

5-1
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals|C200 Series

Main power terminals

; Do not connect 3-phase model to one-phase power. R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3
has no phase-sequence requirement, it can be used upon random
selection.
; It is recommend to add a magnetic contactor (MC) to the power input
wiring to cut off power quickly and reduce malfunction when activating
the protection function of the AC motor drive. Both ends of the MC
should have an R-C surge absorber.
; Fasten the screws in the main circuit terminal to prevent sparks condition
made by the loose screws due to vibration.
; Please use voltage and current within the specification.
; When using a general GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter), select a
current sensor with sensitivity of 200mA or above and not less than
0.1-second operation time to avoid nuisance tripping.
; Please use the shield wire or tube for the power wiring and ground the
two ends of the shield wire or tube.
; Do NOT run/stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON/OFF.
Run/stop AC motor drives by RUN/STOP command via control terminals
or keypad. If you still need to run/stop AC motor drives by turning power
ON/OFF, it is recommended to do so only ONCE per hour.
Output terminals for main circuit

; When it needs to install the filter at the output side of terminals U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3 on the AC motor drive. Please use inductance filter. Do not
use phase-compensation capacitors or L-C (Inductance-Capacitance) or
R-C (Resistance-Capacitance), unless approved by Delta.
; DO NOT connect phase-compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at
the output terminals of AC motor drives.
; Use well-insulated motor, suitable for inverter operation.
Terminals for connecting DC reactor, external brake resistor, external
brake resistor and DC circuit
; This is the terminals used to connect the DC reactor to improve the
power factor. For the factory setting, it connects the short-circuit object.
Please remove this short-circuit object before connecting to the DC
reactor.
DC reactor (optional)

+1/DC+ +2
; When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power
transformer (600kVA or above) or when a phase lead capacitor is
switched, excess peak currents may occur in the power input circuit due
to the load changes and the converter section may be damaged. To

5-2
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals|C200 Series

avoid this, it is recommend to use a serial connected AC input


reactor(6%) at the AC Motor Drive mains input side to reduce the current
and improve the input power efficiency.

; Connect a brake resistor or brake unit in applications with frequent


deceleration ramps, short deceleration time, too low brake torque or
requiring increased brake torque.
Brake resistor
(optional)

B1 B2
; The external brake resistor should connect to the terminals (B1, B2) of
AC motor drives.
; For those models without built-in brake resistor, please connect external
brake unit and brake resistor (both of them are optional) to increase
brake torque.
; DC+ and DC- are connected by common DC bus, please refer to
Chapter 5-1(Main Circuit Terminal) for the wiring terminal specification
and the wire gauge information.
; Please refer to the VFDB manual for more information on wire gauge
when installing the brake unit.

5-3
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals|C200 Series

5-1 Main Circuit Terminals


Frame A0 Main circuit terminals:
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , DC+, DC-, B1, B2

Max. Wire Torque


Models Min. Wire Gauge
Gauge (±10%)
2
VFD004CB21A-20/-21/-21M 14 AWG (2.1mm )
2
VFD007CB21A-20/-21/-21M 12 AWG (3.3mm )
2
VFD015CB21A-20/-21/-21M 10 AWG (5.3mm )
2
VFD022CB21A-20/-21/-21M 8 AWG (8.4mm )
2
VFD004CB23A-20/-21/-21M 14 AWG (2.1mm )
2 M4
VFD007CB23A-20/-21/-21M 14 AWG (2.1mm )
8 AWG 2 20kg-cm
VFD015CB23A-20/-21/-21M 2 12 AWG (3.3mm )
(8.4mm ) 2 (17.4 lb-in.)
VFD022CB23A-20/-21/-21M 10 AWG (5.3mm )
2 (1.96Nm)
VFD037CB23A-20/-21/-21M 8 AWG (8.4mm )
2
VFD007CB43A-20/-21/-21M 14 AWG (2.1mm )
2
VFD015CB43A-20/-21/-21M 14 AWG (2.1mm )
2
VFD022CB43A-20/-21/-21M 14 AWG (2.1mm )
2
VFD037CB43A-20/-21/-21M 10 AWG (5.3mm )
UL installations must use 600V, 75℃ or 90℃ wire. Use copper wire only.
NOTE
Figure 1 shows the terminal specification.
Figure 2 shows the specification of insulated heat shrink tubing that comply with UL

(600V, YDPU2).

Figure 1 Figure 2

5-4
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals|C200 Series

Frame A Main circuit terminals :


R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , DC+(+2,+1), DC-, B1, B2
Max. Wire Torque
Models Min. Wire Gauge
Gauge (±10%)
2
VFD040CB43A-20/-21/-21M 10 AWG (5.3mm ) M4
8 AWG 2 20kg-cm
VFD055CB43A-20/-21/-21M 2 10 AWG (5.3mm )
(8.4mm ) (17.4 lb-in.)
2
VFD075CB43A-20/-21/-21M 8 AWG (8.4mm ) (1.96Nm)
UL installations must use 600V, 75℃ or 90℃ wire. Use copper wire only.
NOTE
Figure 1 shows the terminal specification.
Figure 2 shows the specification of insulated heat shrink tubing that comply with
UL (600V, YDPU2).

Figure 1 Figure 2

5-5
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 6 Control Terminals|C200 Series

Chapter 6 Control Terminals


Please remove the top cover before wiring the multi-function input and output terminals,
The drive appearances shown in the figures are for reference only, a real drive may look different.

Remove the cover for wiring.


Frame A0&A
Loosen the screws and press the tabs on both sides to remove the cover.
Screw torque:
Frame A0 : 6~8Kg-cm [5.21~6.94lb-in.]
Frame A : 10~12Kg-cm [8.68~10.4lb-in.]

Frame A0 Remove the Conduit-Box


1. Remove the cover, and then loosen the screws 2. Use spare screws to fasten the Conduit box.
of wiring guard. Keep those screws for future Screw torque: 8-10Kg-cm(6.9-8.7lb-in.)
use.

NOTE: C200-21 /-21M doesn’t have a plastic


circuit board.

6-1
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 6 Control Terminals|C200 Series

3. Put back the cover then fasten tightly the screw. Screw torque (M3): 6-8Kg-cm(5.2-6.9lb-in.)

Control Terminal the sketch map


Frame A0
setting of terminal resistor
0-10V 0/4-20mA
120Ω
ACI 485 RA1 RB1 RC1 RA2 RC2
ON

AVI OPEN
2

AFM1 AUI ACI AVI DFM1 +24V COM FWD MI1 MI3 MI5 MI7 SG-

AFM2 +10V ACM DFM2 DCM DCM REV MI2 MI4 MI6 MI8 SG+

Frame A
0-20mA ON
4-20mA A
RA1 RB1 RC1 RA2 RC2
0-10V 2
ACI AVI

AFM1 AUI ACI AVI DFM1 +24V COM FWD MI1 MI3 MI5 MI7 SG-
B
120Ω
485
AFM2 +10V ACM DFM2 DCM DCM REV MI2 MI4 MI6 MI8 SG+ OPEN

setting of
terminal resistor

Specifications of Control Terminal

Wire Gauge: 26~16AWG(0.1281-1.318mm2),


Torque: (A) 5kg-cm [4.31Ib-in.] (0.49Nm) (As shown in figure above)
(B) 8kg-cm [6.94Ib-in.] (0.78Nm) (As shown in figure above)

6-2
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 6 Control Terminals|C200 Series

Wiring precautions:
„ Reserves 5mm and properly install the wire into the terminal; fasten the installation by a
slotted screwdriver. If the wire is stripped, sort the wire before install into the terminal.
„ Flathead screwdriver: blade width 3.5mm, tip thickness 0.6mm
„ In the figure above, the factory setting for S1-SCM is short circuit. The factory setting for
+24V-COM is short circuit and SINK mode (NPN); please refer to Chapter 4 Wiring for more
detail.
Terminals Terminal Function Factory Setting (NPN mode)
Digital control signal common +24V±5% 100mA
+24V
(Source)
Digital control signal common Common for multi-function input terminals
COM
(Sink)
FWD-DCM:
FWD Forward-Stop command ONÎ forward running
OFFÎ deceleration to stop
REV-DCM:
REV Reverse-Stop command ONÎ reverse running
OFFÎ deceleration to stop
Refer to parameters 02-01~02-08 to program the
MI1
multi-function inputs MI1~MI8.
~ Multi-function input 1~6
ON: the activation current is 6.5mA≧11Vdc
MI6
OFF: leakage current tolerance is 10μA≦11Vdc
MI7 It can be a multi input option for Pr02-01 ~ 02-08. It
~ Multi-function input 7~8 can also be used as a PG function. For more
MI8 information on PG function, see page 6-5.
Multi-function relay output 1 Resistive Load:
RA1
(N.O.) a 5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 250VAC
Multi-function relay output 1 5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 30VDC
RB1
(N.C.) b
Inductive Load (COS 0.4):
RC1 Multi-function relay common 1 2.0A(N.O.)/1.2A(N.C.) 250VAC
Multi-function relay output 2 2.0A(N.O.)/1.2A(N.C.) 30VDC
RA2
(N.O.) a
It is used to output each monitor signal, such as drive
RC2 Multi-function relay common 2 is in operation, frequency attained or overload
indication.
Digital frequency meter 1 The AC motor drive releases various monitor signals,
such as drive in operation, frequency attained and
(when Pr.02-21=0, DFM1 is the setting of overload indication, via transistor (open collector).
DFM1
Pr.02-16)
Regard the pulse voltage as the output monitor signal
(When Pr.02-21≧1, DM1 is the pulse output.)
Duty-cycle: 50%
Digital frequency meter 2 Min. load impedance: 1kΩ/100pf
(When Pr.02-55 = 0, DFM2 is the setting value
Max. current: 30mA
DFM2 Max. voltage: 30Vdc
of Pr.02-17.)
DFM1 M ulti-function output
(When Pr.02-55≧1, DFM2 is the pulse output) frequency term inals
30V/30m A 33kHz
DFM2
DCM Digital frequency signal common
DCM

Modbus RS-485 PIN4、PIN5 equals to the PIN4, PIN5 of the RJ45


SG+
8 1 internet cable connector.
PIN 3: GND
SG- PIN 4: SG-
PIN 5: SG+

6-3
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 6 Control Terminals|C200 Series

Terminals Terminal Function Factory Setting (NPN mode)


+10V Potentiometer power supply Analog frequency setting: +10Vdc 20mA
Analog voltage input Impedance: 20kΩ
+10V AVI circuit Range: 0~10V/0~20mA/ 4~20mA(Pr.03-38)
=0~Max. Output Frequency (Pr.01-00)
AVI AVI AVI switch, factory setting is 0~10V
0-20mA ON
4-20mA
ACM 1 2
0-10V
internal circuit ACI
Analog current input Impedance: 500Ω
ACI ACI circuit Range: 4~20mA/0~10V/0~20mA(Pr.03-39)
=0~Max. Output Frequency (Pr.01-00)
ACI ACI Switch, factory setting is 4~20mA
0-20mA ON
4-20mA
0-10V 1 2
ACM internal circuit ACI
Auxiliary analog voltage input
+10 AUI circuit
Impedance: 20kΩ
AUI AUI Range: -10~+10VDC=0 ~ Max. Output
Frequency(Pr.01-00)
ACM
internal circuit
Impedance: 100kΩ (voltage output)
Output current: 2mA max
AFM1 Resolution: 0~10V corresponds to Max. operation
frequency
Range: 0~10V
Impedance: 100Ω (current output)
Output current: 20mA max
AFM2 Resolution: 0~20mA corresponds to Max. operation
frequency
Range: 0~20mA, 4~20mA
ACM Analog Signal Common Common for analog terminals
2
NOTE: Wire size of analog control signals: 18 AWG (0.75 mm ) with shielded wire

Analog input terminals (AVI, ACI, AUI, ACM)


; Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and keep it as
short as possible (<20m) with proper grounding. If the noise is inductive, connecting the shield to
terminal ACM can bring improvement.

; If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive, please connect a
capacitor and ferrite core as indicated in the following diagram.

6-4
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 6 Control Terminals|C200 Series

AVI/ACI/AUI
C
AC M

ferrite core
Wind each wires 3 times or more around the core
Digital inputs (FWD, REV, MI1~MI8, COM)
; When using contacts or switches to control the digital inputs, please use high quality
components to avoid contact bounce.

Transistor outputs (MO1, MO2, MCM)


; Make sure to connect the digital outputs to the right polarity.
; When connecting a relay to the digital outputs, connect a surge absorber across the coil and
check the polarity.

PG Function Explanation
1. When C200 is running at speed mode, it uses external terminal MI7~MI8 as PG connection
function terminal.
2. C200 uses encoder, open collector of only 24Vdc. The maximum cable length of encoder is 30m.
For example: Delta’s encoder (ES3-06CN6941).
3. For External terminal MI7~MI8, their the minimum working voltage is 21Vdc, maximum
input/output frequency is 33kHz. Refer to the formula below:
Maximum output rotation speed (rpm) /60*PG ≤33.000Hz
Maximum output rotation speed (rpm)=(120*frequency/motor pole number)
For example: Set up PG function to be 600pulse, pole number to be 4 and the maximum rotation
frequency is 60Hz.
The maximum rotation speed(rpm)=( 120*60)/4=1800rpm
1800/60*600=18000Hz
4. Set up Pr10-01~ 10-04 before using PG function. Its wiring diagram is shown as below:
Sink Mode Inter nal Power Supply(+24Vdc)

Vcc +24V

COM
A/B
MI7/MI8
A/ B

GND DCM

0V mode encoder C200 external term inal

6-5
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 6 Control Terminals|C200 Series

Sink Mode Internal power supply(+24Vdc)

Vcc +24V

COM
A/B
MI7/MI8
A/ B

GND DCM

0V mode encoder C200 external term inal


+24V GND
external
power supply

5. Since MI1~MI8 shares the same COM, therefore when using a PG card, MI~MI6 can only be
applied at SINK MODE.

6-6
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C200 Series

Chapter 7 Optional Accessories


The optional accessories listed in this chapter are available upon request. Installing additional
accessories to your drive would substantially improves the drive’s performance. Please select an
applicable accessory according to your need or contact the local distributor for suggestion.

• All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives


• Non-fuse Circuit Breaker
• Fuse (Specification Chart)
• AC Reactor
• Zero Phase Reactor
• DC Reactor
• EMI Filter
• Digital Keypad
• Panel Mounting
• Fan Kit
• USB/RS-485 Communication Interface IFD6530
• MKCB-HUB01 Multi-function Communication Expansion Card

7-1
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C200 Series

All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives

230V 1-phase
Applicable 1 2
* 125%Braking Torque 10%ED * Max. Brake Torque
Motor
Total
Braking *3Braking Resistor Resistor value Max. Total
Braking Min. Resistor Peak Power
HP kW Torque series for each Brake spec. for each Braking
Current Value (Ω) (kW)
(kg-m) Unit AC motor Drive Current (A)
(A)
0.5 0.4 0.27 BR080W200*1 80W200Ω 1.9 63.3 6 2.3
1 0.75 0.51 BR080W200*1 80W200Ω 1.9 63.3 6 2.3
2 1.5 1.0 BR200W091*1 200W91Ω 4.2 47.5 8 3.0
3 2.2 1.5 BR300W070*1 300W70Ω 5.4 38.0 10 3.8

230V 3-phase
Applicable 1 2
* 125%Braking Torque 10%ED * Max. Brake Torque
Motor
3 Total
Braking * Braking Resistor Resistor value Max. Total
Braking Min. Resistor Peak Power
HP kW Torque series for each Brake spec. for each Braking
Current Value (Ω) (kW)
(kg-m) Unit AC motor Drive Current (A)
(A)
0.5 0.4 0.27 BR080W200*1 80W200Ω 1.9 63.3 6 2.3
1 0.75 0.51 BR080W200*1 80W200Ω 1.9 63.3 6 2.3
2 1.5 1.0 BR200W091*1 200W91Ω 4.2 47.5 8 3.0
3 2.2 1.5 BR300W070*1 300W70Ω 5.4 38.0 10 3.8
5 3.7 2.5 BR400W040*1 400W40Ω 9.5 19.0 20 7.6

460V
Applicable
*1 125%Braking Torque 10%ED *2 Max. Brake Torque
Motor
Total
Braking *3Braking Resistor Resistor value Max. Total
Braking Min. Resistor Peak Power
HP kW Torque series for each Brake spec. for each Braking
Current Value (Ω) (kW)
(kg-m) Unit AC motor Drive Current (A)
(A)
1 0.75 0.5 BR080W750*1 80W750Ω 1 190.0 4 3.0
2 1.5 1.0 BR200W360*1 200W360Ω 2.1 126.7 6 4.6
3 2.2 1.5 BR300W250*1 300W250Ω 3 108.6 7 5.3
5 3.7 2.5 BR400W150*1 400W150Ω 5.1 84.4 9 6.8
5.5 4.0 2.7 BR1K0W075*1 1000W75Ω 10.2 54.3 14 10.6
7.5 5.5 3.7 BR1K0W075*1 1000W75Ω 10.2 54.3 14 10.6
10 7.5 5.1 BR1K0W075*1 1000W75Ω 10.2 47.5 16 12.2
1
* Calculation for 125% brake toque: (kw)*125%*0.8; where 0.8 is motor efficiency.
Because there is a resistor limit of power consumption, the longest operation time for 10%ED is 10sec (on: 10sec/ off:
90sec).
*2 Please refer to the Brake Performance Curve for “Operation Duration & ED” vs. “Braking Current”.
*3 For heat dissipation, a resistor of 400W or lower should be fixed to the frame and maintain the surface temperature below
50℃; a resistor of 1000W and above should maintain the surface temperature below 350℃.

NOTE

1. Definition for Brake Usage ED%


Explanation: The definition of the brake usage ED (%) is for assurance of enough time for the brake unit and brake resistor
to dissipate away heat generated by braking. When the brake resistor heats up, the resistance would increase with
temperature, and brake torque would decrease accordingly. Recommended cycle time is one minute.

7-2
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C200 Series

For safety concern, install an overload relay (O.L) between the brake unit and the brake resistor in conjunction with the
magnetic contactor (MC) prior to the drive for abnormal protection. The purpose of installing the thermal overload relay is to
protect the brake resistor from damage due to frequent brake, or due to brake unit keeping operating resulted from unusual
high input voltage. Under such circumstance, just turn off the power to prevent damaging the brake resistor.
2. If damage to the drive or other equipment is due to the fact that the brake resistors and brake modules in use are not
provided by Delta, the warranty will be void.
3. Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors. If the minimum resistance value is
to be utilized, consult local dealers for the calculation of Watt figures.
4. This chart is for normal usage; if the AC motor drive is applied for frequent braking, it is suggested to enlarge 2~3 times of
the Watts.
5. Thermal Relay:
Thermal relay selection is basing on its overload capability. A standard braking capacity for C2000 is 10%ED (Tripping
time=10s). The figure below is an example of 406V, 110kw AC motor drive. It requires the thermal relay to take 260%
overload capacity in 10s (Host starting) and the braking current is 126A. In this case, user should select a rated 50A
thermal relay. The property of each thermal relay may vary among different manufacturer, please carefully read
specification.

60
40
30
20

10
Second
Tripping tim e

8
6
4
3
2

1
0. 8
0. 6
0.4
0.3
0.8 1 1. 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15
M ultiple of current setting xln (A)

7-3
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C200 Series

Non-fuse Circuit Breaker


Comply with UL standard: Per UL 508, paragraph 45.8.4, part a,
The rated current of the breaker shall be 2~4 times of the maximum rated input current of AC motor
drive.
1-phase 230V
Model Recommended non-fuse breaker (A)
VFD004CB21A-20/-21/-21M 15
VFD007CB21A-20/-21/-21M 20
VFD015CB21A-20/-21/-21M 30
VFD022CB21A-20/-21/-21M 50

3-phase 230V
Model Recommended non-fuse breaker (A)
VFD004CB23A-20/-21/-21M 10
VFD007CB23A-20/-21/-21M 15
VFD015CB23A-20/-21/-21M 20
VFD022CB23A-20/-21/-21M 30
VFD037CB23A-20/-21/-21M 40

3-phase 460V
Model Recommended non-fuse breaker (A)
VFD007CB43A-20/-21/-21M 10
VFD015CB43A-20/-21/-21M 10
VFD022CB43A-20/-21/-21M 15
VFD037CB43A-20/-21/-21M 20
VFD040CB43A-20/-21/-21M 20
VFD055CB43A-20/-21/-21M 30
VFD075CB43A-20/-21/-21M 40

7-4
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C200 Series

Fuse Specification Chart


ƒ Use only the fuses comply with UL certificated.
ƒ Use only the fuses comply with local regulations.

Model Manufacturer Class / Catalog No Rating


VFD004CB21A-20/-21/-21M Class _T / JJN-15 300 Vac, 15A
VFD007CB21A-20/-21/-21M Class _T / JJN-20 300 Vac, 20A
VFD015CB21A-20/-21/-21M Class _T / JJN-30 300 Vac, 30A
VFD022CB21A-20/-21/-21M Class _T / JJN-50 300 Vac, 50A
VFD004CB23A-20/-21/-21M Class _T / JJN-10 300 Vac, 10A
VFD007CB23A-20/-21/-21M Class _T / JJN-15 300 Vac, 15A
VFD015CB23A-20/-21/-21M Class _T / JJN-20 300 Vac, 20A
VFD022CB23A-20/-21/-21M Class _T / JJN-30 300 Vac, 30A
Cooper Bussmann Inc.
VFD037CB23A-20/-21/-21M Class _T / JJN-40 300 Vac, 40A
VFD007CB43A-20/-21/-21M Class _T / JJS-10 600 Vac, 10A
VFD015CB43A-20/-21/-21M Class _T / JJS-10 600 Vac, 10A
VFD022CB43A-20/-21/-21M Class _T / JJS-15 600 Vac, 15A
VFD037CB43A-20/-21/-21M Class _T / JJS-20 600 Vac, 20A
VFD040CB43A-20/-21/-21M Class _T / JJS-20 600 Vac, 20A
VFD055CB43A-20/-21/-21M Class _T / JJS-30 600 Vac, 30A
VFD075CB43A-20/-21/-21M Class _T / JJS-40 600 Vac, 40A

7-5
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C200 Series

AC Reactor

When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power transformer


(600kVA or above) or when a phase lead capacitor is switched, excess peak currents may
occur in the power input circuit due to the load changes and the converter section may be
damaged. To avoid this, it is recommend to use a serial connected AC input reactor(6%) at
the AC Motor Drive mains input side to reduce the current and improve the input power
efficiency.
230V, 50/60Hz, 1-phase
Rated Amps of AC Max. continuous Inductance(mh)
kW HP
Reactor Amps 3~5% impedance
0.37 0.5 5 7.5 3
0.75 1 8 12 1.5
1.5 2 12 18 1.25
2.2 3 18 27 0.8

230V, 50/60Hz, 3-phase


Inductance(mh)
Rated Amps of AC Max. continuous
kW HP 3~5% impedance
Reactor Amps
3% impedance 5% impedance
0.37 0.5 4 6 6.5 9
0.75 1 8 12 3 5
1.5 2 8 12 1.5 3
2.2 3 12 18 1.25 2.5
3.7 5 18 27 0.8 1.5

460V, 50/60Hz, 3-phase


Inductance(mh)
Rated Amps of AC Max. continuous
kW HP 3~5% impedance
Reactor Amps
3% impedance 5% impedance
0.75 1 4 6 9 12
1.5 2 4 6 6.5 9
2.2 3 8 12 5 7.5
3.7 5 12 18 2.5 4.2
4 5 12 18 2.5 4.2
5.5 7.5 18 27 1.5 2.5
7.5 10 18 27 1.5 2.5

Applications for AC Reactor


Connected in input circuit

Application 1
When more than one AC motor drive is connected to the same mains power, and one of
them is ON during operation.

Problem: When applying power to one of the AC motor drive, the charge current of the
capacitors may cause voltage dip. The AC motor drive may be damaged when
over current occurs during operation.

7-6
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C200 Series

Correct wiring:
M1 reactor
AC motor drive motor

M2
AC motor drive motor

Mn
AC motor drive motor

Application 2
Silicon rectifier and AC motor drive are connected to the same power.

Problem: Switching spikes will be generated when the silicon rectifier switches ON/OFF.
These spikes may damage the mains circuit.
Correct wiring:
silicon rectifier

power reactor
DC

AC motor drive

reactor
motor

Application 3
When the power supply capacity exceeds 10 times of the inverter capacity.

Problem: When the mains power capacity is too large, line impedance will be small and the
charge current will be too high. This may damage AC motor drive due to higher
rectifier temperature.
Correct wiring
large-capacity small-capacity
power reactor AC motor drive

motor

DC Reactor
460V DC Choke
Input Voltage kW HP DC Amps Inductance (mh)
4 5.5 23 2.7
460Vac 50/60Hz
5.5 7.5 25 2.47
3-Phase
7.5 10 30 2.1

7-7
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C200 Series

Zero Phase Reactors

RF220X00A UNIT: mm (inch)

Recommended Diagram A
Cable 2
Wire Size (mm ) Wiring Wind each wire around the core for 4 times. The reactor
type Qty.
Nominal Method must be placed at the AC motor drive output side as
(Note) AWG mm
2
2 close as possible.
(mm )
Single- Diagram
≤10 ≤5.3 ≤5.5 1
core A
Diagram
≤2 ≤33.6 ≤38 4
B
Diagram
≤12 ≤3.3 ≤3.5 1
Three- A
core Diagram
≤1 ≤42.4 ≤50 4
B
NOTE Diagram B
Put the wires/cables through the middle of the 4 cores
600V insulated cable wire
that lines in parallel.
1. The table above gives approximate wire size for
the zero phase reactors but the selection is
ultimately governed by the type and the
diameter of the cable, i.e. the cable diameter
must small enough to go through the center of
the zero phase reactor.
2. When wiring, do not goes through the earth
core. It only needs to pass through the motor
cable or the power cable.
3. When a long motor cable for output is used, a
zero phase reactor may be necessary to reduce
the radiated emission.

7-8
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C200 Series

EMI Filter

Applicable
Model Reference Website
EMI Filter
VFD004CB21A-20/-21/-21M; http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/products/industrial_emc_filters/single_ph

VFD007CB21A-20/-21/-21M; ase_industrial_motor_inverter_servo_drive_filters/
MDF25
VFD015CB21A-20/-21/-21M; MDF25 Single Phase Industrial Motor Drive Filters - High Performance 25

VFD022CB21A-20/-21/-21M; Amps

VFD004CB23A-20/-21/-21M; http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/products/industrial_emc_filters/three_pha

VFD007CB23A-20/-21/-21M; KMF318A se_industrial_mains_filters_high_performance/

VFD015CB23A-20/-21/-21M; KMF318 Three Phase Industrial Mains Filters - General Purpose 18 Amps

http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/products/industrial_emc_filters/three_pha

VFD022CB23A-20/-21/-21M; se_industrial_mains_filters_high_performance/
KMF325A
VFD037CB23A-20/-21/-21M; KMF325A Three Phase Industrial Mains Filters - High Performance 25
Amps

http://www.schaffner.com/en/products/emcemi.html
VFD007CB43A-20/-21/-21M;
FN 3258-7-45 FN 3258 Ultra-compact EMC/EMI Filter for three-phase systems and motor
VFD015CB43A-20/-21/-21M;
drives

http://www.schaffner.com/en/products/emcemi.html
VFD022CB43A-20/-21/-21M;
FN 3258-16-45 FN 3258 Ultra-compact EMC/EMI Filter for three-phase systems and motor
VFD037CB43A-20/-21/-21M;
drives

VFD040CB43A-20/-21/-21M; http://www.schaffner.com/en/products/emcemi.html

VFD055CB43A-20/-21/-21M; FN 3258-30-47 FN 3258 Ultra-compact EMC/EMI Filter for three-phase systems and motor

VFD075CB43A-20/-21/-21M; drives

EMI Filter Installation


All electrical equipment, including AC motor drives, will generate high-frequency/low-frequency noise and will
interfere with peripheral equipment by radiation or conduction when in operation. By using an EMI filter with correct
installation, much interference can be eliminated. It is recommended to use DELTA EMI filter to have the best
interference elimination performance.
We assure that it can comply with following rules when AC motor drive and EMI filter are installed and wired
according to user manual:
„ EN61000-6-4
„ EN61800-3: 1996
„ EN55011 (1991) Class A Group 1 (1st Environment, restricted distribution)

General precaution
1. EMI filter and AC motor drive should be installed on the same metal plate.
2. Please install AC motor drive on footprint EMI filter or install EMI filter as close as possible to the AC motor drive.
3. Please wire as short as possible.
4. Metal plate should be grounded.
5. The cover of EMI filter and AC motor drive or grounding should be fixed on the metal plate and the contact area
should be as large as possible.

Choose suitable motor cable and precautions


Improper installation and choice of motor cable will affect the performance of EMI filter. Be sure to observe the
following precautions when selecting motor cable.

7-9
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C200 Series

1. Use the cable with shielding (double shielding is the best).


2. The shielding on both ends of the motor cable should be grounded with the minimum length and maximum
contact area.
3. Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with the plate and shielding.
Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with
the plate and shielding.

saddle the plate with grounding

Figure 1

Saddle on both ends

Saddle on one end

Figure 2

The length of motor cable


When motor is driven by an AC motor drive of PWM type, the motor terminals will experience surge voltages easily
due to components conversion of AC motor drive and cable capacitance. When the motor cable is very long
(especially for the 460V series), surge voltages may reduce insulation quality. To prevent this situation, please
follow the rules below:
„ Use a motor with enhanced insulation.
„ Connect an output reactor (optional) to the output terminals of the AC motor drive
„ The length of the cable between AC motor drive and motor should be as short as possible (10 to 20 m or less)
„ For models 7.5hp and above:
Insulation level of motor 1000V 1300V 1600V

460VAC input voltage 66 ft (20m) 328 ft (100m) 1312 ft (400m)

230VAC input voltage 1312 ft (400m) 1312 ft (400m) 1312 ft (400m)

„ For models 5hp and less:


Insulation level of motor 1000V 1300V 1600V

460VAC input voltage 66 ft (20m) 165 ft (50m) 165 ft (50m)

230VAC input voltage 328 ft (100m) 328 ft (100m) 328 ft (100m)

7-10
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C200 Series

NOTE
Never connect phase lead capacitors or surge absorbers to the output terminals of the AC motor drive.
„ If the length is too long, the stray capacitance between cables will increase and may cause leakage current. It
will activate the protection of over current, increase leakage current or not insure the correction of current
display. The worst case is that AC motor drive may damage.
„ If more than one motor is connected to the AC motor drive, the total wiring length is the sum of the wiring
length from AC motor drive to each motor.
„ For the 460V series AC motor drive, when an overload relay is installed between the drive and the motor to
protect motor over heating, the connecting cable must be shorter than 50m. However, an overload relay
malfunction may still occur. To prevent the malfunction, install an output reactor (optional) to the drive or lower
the carrier frequency setting (Pr.00-17).

NOTE
When a thermal O/L relay protected by motor is used between AC motor drive and motor, it may malfunction
(especially for 460V series), even if the length of motor cable is only 165 ft (50m) or less. To prevent it, please use
AC reactor and/or lower the carrier frequency (Pr. 00-17 PWM carrier frequency).

7-11
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C200 Series

Digital Keypad
KPC-CC01 KPC-CE01

Communication Interface
RJ-45 (socket)、RS-485 interface;

Installation Method
Embedded type and can be put flat on the surface
of the control box. The front cover is water proof.

Descriptions of Keypad Functions


Key Descriptions
Start Operation Key
1. It is only valid when the source of operation command is from the keypad.
2. It can operate the AC motor drive by the function setting and the RUN LED will be ON.
3. It can be pressed again and again at stop process.
4. When enabling “HAND” mode, it is only valid when the source of operation command is
from the keypad.
Stop Command Key. This key has the highest processing priority in any situation.
1. When it receives STOP command, no matter the AC motor drive is in operation or stop
status, the AC motor drive needs to execute “STOP” command.
2. The RESET key can be used to reset the drive after the fault occurs. For those faults that
can’t be reset by the RESET key, see the fault records after pressing MENU key for
details.
Operation Direction Key
1. This key is only control the operation direction NOT for activate the drive. FWD: forward,
REV: reverse.
2. Refer to the LED descriptions for more details.
ENTER Key
Press ENTER and go to the next level. If it is the last level then press ENTER to execute the command.

ESC Key
ESC key function is to leave current menu and return to the last menu. It is also functioned as a
return key in the sub-menu.
Press menu to return to main menu.
Menu content:
KPC-CE01 does not support function 5 ~13.
1. Detail Parameter 7. Quick/Simple Setup 13. PC Link
2. Copy Parameter 8. Display Setup
3. Keypad Locked 9. Time Setup
4. PLC Function 10. Language Setup
5. Copy PLC 11. Startup Menu
6. Fault Record 12. Main Page
Direction: Left/Right/Up/Down
1. In the numeric value setting mode, it is used to move the cursor and change the numeric
value.
2. In the menu/text selection mode, it is used for item selection.

7-12
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C200 Series

Function Key
1. It has the factory setting function and the function can be set by the user. The present
factory setting: F1 is JOG function.
2. Other functions must be defined by TPEditor first. TPEditor software V1.30.6 is available
for download at:
http://www.delta.com.tw/ch/product/em/download/download_main.asp?act=3&pid=1&cid=1&tp
id=3
HAND ON Key
1. This key is executed by the parameter settings of the source of Hand frequency and hand
operation. The factory settings of both source of Hand frequency and hand operation are
the digital keypad.
2. Press HAND ON key at stop status, the setting will switch to hand frequency source and
hand operation source. Press HAND ON key at operation status, it stops the AC motor
drive first (display AHSP warning), and switch to hand frequency source and hand
operation source.
3. Successful mode switching for KPC-CE01, “H/A” LED will be on; for KPC-CC01, it will
display HAND mode/ AUTO mode on the screen.
1. This key is executed by the parameter settings of the source of AUTO frequency and
AUTO operation. The factory setting is the external terminal (source of operation is
4-20mA).
2. Press Auto key at stop status, the setting will switch to hand frequency source and hand
operation source. Press Auto key at operation status, it stops the AC motor drive first
(display AHSP warning), and switch to hand frequency source and hand operation source.
3. Successful mode switching for KPC-CE01, “H/A” LED will be off; for KPC-CC01, it will
display HAND mode/ AUTO mode on the screen

Descriptions of LED Functions


LED Descriptions
Steady ON: operation indicator of the AC motor drive, including DC brake, zero speed,
standby, restart after fault and speed search.
Blinking: drive is decelerating to stop or in the status of base block.
Steady OFF: drive doesn’t execute the operation command
Steady ON: stop indicator of the AC motor drive.
Blinking: drive is in the standby status.
Steady OFF: drive doesn’t execute “STOP” command.
Operation Direction LED
1. Green light is on, the drive is running forward.
2. Red light is on, the drive is running backward.
3. Twinkling light: the drive is changing direction.
(Only KPC-CE01 support this function)
Setting can be done during operation.
HAND LED: When HAND LED is on (HAND mode); when HAND LED is off (AUTO mode).
(Only KPC-CE01Support this function )
Setting can be done during operation.
AUTO LED: when AUTO LED is on (AUTO mode); when AUTO LED is off (HAND mode).
Dimension

7-13
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C200 Series

Panel Mounting (MKC-KPPK)

For MKC-KPPK model, user can choose wall mounting or embedded mounting, protection level is IP56.
Applicable to the digital keypads (KPC-CC01 & KPC-CE01).
Wall Mounting Embedded Mounting
accessories*1 accessories*2

Screw *4 ~M4*p 0.7 *L8mm


Screw *4 ~M4*p 0.7 *L8mm
Torque: 10-12kg-cm (8.7-10.4lb-in.)
Torque: 10-12kg-cm (8.7-10.4lb-in.)
Panel cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] Panel cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch]

Normal cutout dimension


Panel
1.2mm 1.6mm 2.0mm
thickness
A 66.4 [2.614]
B 110.2 [4.339] 111.3 [4.382] 112.5 [4.429]
*Deviation: ±0.15mm /±0.0059inch
Cutout dimension (Waterproof level: IP56)
Panel
1.2mm 1.6mm 2.0mm
thickness
A 66.4 [2.614]
B 110.8 [4.362]
*Deviation: ±0.15mm /±0.0059inch

7-14
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C200 Series

RJ45 Extension Lead for Digital Keypad


(Designed only for KEYPAD,NOT for CANopen communication)

Part # Description
CBC-K3FT 3 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 0.9m)
CBC-K5FT 5 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 1.5 m)
CBC-K7FT 7 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 2.1 m)
CBC-K10FT 10 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 3 m)
CBC-K16FT 16 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 4.9 m)

7-15
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C200 Series

Fan Kit

„ Frames of the fan kit


Model『MKCB-AFKM1』This fan is a12Vdc ON/OFF control fan.

Applicable Model
VFD015CB21A-20/-21/-21M; VFD022CB21A-20/-21/-21M; VFD022CB23A-20/-21/-21M;
VFD037CB23A-20/-21/-21M; VFD022CB43A-20/-21/-21M; VFD037CB43A-20/-21/-21M;
VFD040CB43A-20/-21/-21M; VFD055CB43A-20/-21/-21M;

Model『MKCB-A0FKM』 Model『MKCB-AFKM2』
This fan is a12Vdc ON/OFF control fan. This fan is a12Vdc ON/OFF control fan.
Applicable Model VFD015CB23A-20/-21/-21M; Applicable Model VFD075CB43A-20/-21/-21M;

Fan Removal
Frame A0
Applicable model
VFD015CB21A-20/-21/-21M; VFD022CB21A-20/-21/-21M; VFD022CB23A-20/-21/-21M;
VFD037CB23A-20/-21/-21M; VFD022CB43A-20/-21/-21M; VFD037CB43A-20/-21/-21M;
1. Press the tabs on both side of the fan to 2. Disconnect the power terminal before removing
successfully remove the fan. (The arrow) the fan. (As shown below.)

7-16
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C200 Series

Frame A0
Applicable model
VFD015CB23A-20/-21/-21M;

1) Disconnect the power terminal before removing the fan. (As shown below.)
2) Loosen the two screws to remove the fan.

Frame A
Applicable model
VFD040CB43A-20/-21/-21M; VFD055CB43A-20/-21/-21M;VFD075CB43A-20/-21/-21M
1. Press the tabs on both side of the fan to 2. Disconnect the power terminal before removing
successfully remove the fan. (The arrow) the fan. (As shown below.)

※ 1 VFD040CB43A-20/-21/-21M; VFD055CB43A-20/-21/-21M: optional fan model#『MKCB-AFKM1』.


This fan is a 12Vdc ON/OFF control fan.
※ 2 VFD075CB43A-20/-21/-21M: optional fan model #『MKCB-AFKM2』.
This fan is a 12Vdc PWM control fan.

7-17
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C200 Series

USB/RS-485 Communication Interface IFD6530


Warning
3 Please thoroughly read this instruction sheet before installation and putting it into use.
3 The content of this instruction sheet and the driver file may be revised without prior notice. Please
consult our distributors or download the most updated instruction/driver version at
http://www.delta.com.tw/product/em/control/cm/control_cm_main.asp

1. Introduction
IFD6530 is a convenient RS-485-to-USB converter, which does not require external power-supply and
complex setting process. It supports baud rate from 75 to 115.2kbps and auto switching direction of data
transmission. In addition, it adopts RJ-45 in RS-485 connector for users to wire conveniently. And its tiny
dimension, handy use of plug-and-play and hot-swap provide more conveniences for connecting all
DELTA IABU products to your PC.
Applicable Models: All DELTA IABU products.
(Application & Dimension)

2. Specifications

Power supply No external power is needed


Power consumption 1.5W
Isolated voltage 2,500VDC
Baud rate 75, 150, 300, 600, 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200, 38,400, 57,600, 115,200 bps
RS-485 connector RJ-45
USB connector A type (plug)
Compatibility Full compliance with USB V2.0 specification
Max. cable length RS-485 Communication Port: 100 m
Support RS-485 half-duplex transmission

ƒ RJ-45
PIN Description PIN Description
1 Reserved 5 SG+
2 Reserved 6 GND
3 GND 7 Reserved
4 SG- 8 +9V

7-18
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C200 Series

MKCB-HUB01 Multi-Function Communication Expansion Card

In order to coordinate with the integrity of parallel communication between RS485 and CANopen,
Delta has introduced a multi-function communication expansion card.

Via RS-232 communication port of a computer, connect RS232/RS485 communication interface to


any terminal of a communication board MKCB-HUB01. Then connect parallely to one or more VFDs
to di multi-function communication control.

MODBUS RS-485&CANopen Application


MODBUS RS-485

When using MODBUS RS-485, set the terminal resistor’s PIN short of the last VFD at 120Ω. And the
terminal resistor’s PIN short of the rest of VFD need to be set at OPEN.

CANopen

When using CANopen, connect the MKCB-HUB1 of the last VFD to a terminal resistor.

1 2 3 ............... N END

電腦 ...............

IF D8500
...............

MK CB -HUB 0 1 Co n n e ct to th e te rm in a l
re s isto r in th e HUB 0 1

C200 RJ-45 PIN definition


PIN Signal Note
1 CAN_H CAN_H bus line (dominant high)
2 CAN_L CAN_L bus line (dominant low)
3 CAN_GND Ground /0V/V-
4 SG-
5 SG+
8~1
6 NC
插座 7 CAN_GND Ground /0V/V-
8 EV

Terminal resistor
PIN Note

1~2 120Ω 1/4W

3~8 NC

7-19
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C200 Series

CANopen communication cable


Model #: TAP-CB03, TAP-CB04

L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 TAP-CB03 500 ± 10 19 ± 0.4
2 TAP-CB04 1000± 10 39 ± 0.4

Dimensions
Unit: mm [inch]

7-20
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 8 Specification |C200 Series

Chapter 08 Specification
230V Series -1 Phase
Frame Size A0
*1
Model VFD -_ _ _CB21A-_ _ _ 004 007 015 022
Applicable Motor Output (kW) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2
Applicable Motor Output (HP) 0.5 1 2 3
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 1.2 2.0 3.2 4.4
NORMAL

Rated Output Current (A) 3 5 8 11


DUTY

rated output current is 120% for 60 seconds;


Overload Tolerance
rated output current is 160% for 3 seconds
Output Rating

Max. Output Frequency (Hz) 600.00Hz


Carrier Frequency (kHz) 2~15kHz (Factory Setting: 8 kHz)
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 1.1 1.9 2.8 4.0
Rated Output Current (A) 2.8 4.8 7.1 10
HEAVY
DUTY

rated output current is 150% for 60 seconds;


Overload Tolerance
rated output current is 180% for 3 seconds
Max. Output Frequency (Hz) 600.00Hz
Carrier Frequency (kHz) 2~15kHz (Factory Setting: 2 kHz)
Input Current (A) Normal Duty 7.2 12 15.7 22
Input Current (A) Heavy Duty 6.7 11.5 14 20
Rating
Input

Rated Voltage/Frequency AC 200V~240V (-15% ~ +10%), 50/60Hz, 1-Phase


Operating Voltage Range 170~265Vac
Frequency Tolerance 47~63Hz
Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling
Braking Chopper Built-in

230V Series -3 Phase


Frame Size A0
*1
Model VFD -_ _ _CB23A-_ _ _ 004 007 015 022 037
Applicable Motor Output (kW) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7
Applicable Motor Output (HP) 0.5 1 2 3 5
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 1.2 2.0 3.2 4.4 6.8
NORMAL

Rated Output Current (A) 3 5 8 11 17


DUTY

rated output current is 120% for 60 seconds;


Overload Tolerance
rated output current is 160% for 3 seconds
Output Rating

Max. Output Frequency (Hz) 600.00Hz


Carrier Frequency (kHz) 2~15kHz (Factory Setting: 8 kHz)
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 1.1 1.9 2.8 4.0 6.4
Rated Output Current (A) 2.8 4.8 7.1 10 16
HEAVY
DUTY

rated output current is 150% for 60 seconds;


Overload Tolerance
rated output current is 180% for 3 seconds
Max. Output Frequency (Hz) 600.00Hz
Carrier Frequency (kHz) 2~15kHz (Factory Setting: 2 kHz)
Input Current (A) Normal Duty 3.9 6.4 12 16 20
Input Current (A) Heavy Duty 3.6 6.1 11 15 18.5
Rating
Input

Rated Voltage/Frequency AC 200V~240V (-15% ~ +10%), 50/60Hz 3-Phase


Operating Voltage Range 170~265Vac
Frequency Tolerance 47~63Hz
Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling
Braking Chopper Built-in

8-1
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com

460V Series
Frame Size A0 A
*1
Model VFD-_ _ _CB43A-_ _ _ 015 022 007 037 040 055 075
Applicable Motor Output (kW) 1.5 2.2 0.75 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5
Applicable Motor Output (HP) 2 3 1 5 5.5 7.5 10
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 3.2 4.8 2.4 7.2 8.4 10 14
NORMAL

Rated Output Current (A) 4.0 6.0 3.0 9.0 10.5 12 18


DUTY

rated output current is 120% for 60 seconds;


Overload Tolerance
rated output current is 160% for 3 seconds
Output Rating

Max. Output Frequency (Hz) 600.00Hz


Carrier Frequency (kHz) 2~15kHz (Factory Setting: 8 kHz)
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 2.3 3.0 4.5 6.5 7.6 9.6 14
Rated Output Current (A) 2.9 3.8 5.7 8.1 9.5 11 17
HEAVY
DUTY

rated output current is 150% for 60 seconds;


Overload Tolerance
rated output current is 180% for 3 seconds
Max. Output Frequency (Hz) 600.00Hz
Carrier Frequency (kHz) 2~15kHz (Factory Setting: 2 kHz)
Input Current (A) Normal Duty 4.3 5.9 8.7 14 15.5 17 20
Input Current (A) Heavy Duty 4.1 5.6 8.3 13 14.5 16 19
Rating
Input

Rated Voltage/Frequency AC 380V~480V (-15% ~ +10%), 50/60Hz 3-Phase


Operating Voltage Range 323~528Vac
Frequency Tolerance 47~63Hz
Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling
Braking Chopper Built-in
*1:_ _ _ " means models such as -20 / -21 / -21M.

General Specifications
Control Method 1: V/F, 2: SVC, 3: VF+PG, 4: FOC+PG,
Reach up to 150% or above at 0.5Hz.
Starting Torque
Under FOC+PG mode, starting torque can reach 150% at 0Hz.
Speed Response Ability 5Hz (vector control can reach up to 40Hz)
Torque Limit Max. 200% torque current
Torque Accuracy ±5%
Max. Output Frequency (Hz) normal duty: 0.00~600.00Hz; Heavy duty: 0.00 ~ 600.00 Hz
Control Characteristics

Frequency Output Accuracy Digital command:±0.01%, -10℃~+40℃, Analog command: ±0.1%, 25±10℃
Output Frequency Digital command:0.01Hz, Analog command: 0.03 X max. output
Resolution frequency/60 Hz (±11 bit)
Frequency Setting Signal +10V~-10,0~+10V,4~20mA,0-20mA
Accel./decel. Time 0.00~600.00 seconds or 0.0~6000.0 seconds
Torque control, Droop control, Speed/torque control switching, Feed forward
control, Zero-servo control, Momentary power loss ride thru, Speed search,
Over-torque detection, Torque limit, 16-step speed (max), Accel/decel time
switch, S-curve accel/decel, 3-wire sequence, Auto-Tuning (rotational,
Main control function stationary), Dwell, Cooling fan on/off switch, Slip compensation, Torque
compensation, JOG frequency, Frequency upper/lower limit settings, DC
injection braking at start/stop, High slip braking, PID control (with sleep
function),Energy saving control, MODOBUS communication (RS-485 RJ45,
max. 115.2 kbps), Fault restart, Parameter copy
Fan Control User Pr07-19 to control cooling fans.
Motor Protection Electronic thermal relay protection
For drive model 230V and 460V
Over-current Protection Over-current protection for 240% rated current
Characteristics

current clamp『Normal duty: 170~175%』;『Heavy duty: 180~185%』


Protection

Over-voltage Protection 230: drive will stop when DC-BUS voltage exceeds 410V
460: drive will stop when DC-BUS voltage exceeds 820V
Over-temperature Protection Built-in temperature sensor
Stall Prevention Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration and running independently
Grounding Leakage Current
Leakage current is higher than 50% of rated current of the AC motor drive
Protection
Certifications
GB/T12668-2

8-2
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 8 Specification |C200 Series

Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation


DO NOT expose the AC motor drive in the bad environment, such as dust, direct sunlight, corrosive/inflammable
2
gasses, humidity, liquid and vibration environment. The salt in the air must be less than 0.01mg/cm every year.
Installation IEC60364-1/IEC60664-1 Pollution degree 2, Indoor use only
location
o o
Storage -25 C ~ +70 C
Surrounding Transportation -25 C ~ +70 oC
o

Temperature Only allowed at non-condensation, non-frozen,


non-conductive pollution environment.
Operation Max. 90%
Storage/ Max. 95%
Rated
Transportation
Humidity
Only allowed at non-condensation, non-frozen,
non-conductive pollution environment.
Operation/ 86 to 106 kPa
Environment Air Pressure Storage
Transportation 70 to 106 kPa
IEC721-3-3
Operation Class 3C2; Class 3S2
Pollution Storage Class 2C2; Class 2S2
Level Transportation Class 1C2; Class 1S2
Only allowed at non-condensation, non-frozen,
non-conductive pollution environment.
If AC motor drive is installed at altitude 0~1000m, follow normal
operation restriction. If it is install at altitude 1000~3000m, decrease
Altitude Operation 2% of rated current or lower 0.5℃ of temeperature for every 100m
increase in altitude. Maximum altitude for Corner Grounded is
2000m.
Package Storage ISTA procedure 1A(according to weight) IEC60068-2-31
Drop Transportation
1.0mm, peak to peak value range from 2Hz to 13.2 Hz; 0.7G~1.0G range from 13.2Hz to 55Hz; 1.0G
Vibration
range from 55Hz to 512 Hz. Comply with IEC 60068-2-6
Impact IEC/EN 60068-2-27
10 10
Max. allowed offset angle ±10 (under normal
o
Operation
Position installation position)

Specification for Operation Temperature and Protection Level


Model Frame Top cover Conduit Box
Frame A0~A
VFDxxxCBxxA-20 230V: 0.4~3.7kW IP20 / UL Open Type -10~50℃
460V: 0.75~7.5kW
Frame A0~A
VFDxxxCBxxA-21 230V: 0.4~3.7kW IP20 / NEMA1 -10~40℃
460V: 0.75~7.5kW
Frame A0~A
*2
VFDxxxCBxxA-21M 230V: 0.4~3.7kW IP20 / NEMA1 -10~40℃
460V: 0.75~7.5kW
*2: The model names end by "-21M" are models which have strengthen cover cases. When the temperture is
between -10~35℃, the rated current remains at 100%, but if the temperature increases to 36℃, the rated current
will start to decrease by 2% as the temperature increases by 1℃.

8-3
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 9 Digital Keypad|C200

Chapter 9 Digital Keypad

Description of the Digital Keypad KPE-LE02


1
3
2
RUN Key
Start AC drive MODE
operation. Change between different display mode.

4
STOP/RESET
Stops AC drive operation and reset the drive
ENTER
after fault occurred. Used to enter/modify programming
parameters
1 Status Display
Display the driver's current status.

2 LED Display
Indicates frequency, voltage, current, user
defined units and etc.

3 Potentiometer
For master Frequency setting.

4 UP and DOWN Key


Set the parameter number and changes the numerical data, such as Master Frequency.

Display Message Descriptions

Displays the AC drive Master Frequency.

Displays the actual output frequency at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.

User defined unit (where U = F x Pr.00.05)

Displays the output current at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.

Displays the AC motor drive forward run status.

Displays the AC motor drive reverse run status.

The counter value (C).

Displays the selected parameter.

Displays the actual stored value of the selected parameter.

9-1
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 9 Digital Keypad|C200 Series

External Fault.

Display “End” for approximately 1 second if input has been accepted by pressing
key. After a parameter value has been set, the new value is automatically
stored in memory. To modify an entry, use the and keys.

Display “Err”, if the input is invalid.

NOTE
When the setting exceeds 99.99 for those numbers with 2 decimals (i.e. unit is 0.01), it will only display 1
decimal due to 4-digital display.

9-2
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 9 Digital Keypad|C200

How to Operate the Digital Keypad

Setting Mode
START

GO STA RT
NOTE: In the selection mode, press to set the parameters.

Setting parameters

or

Success to Input data error


set parameter.

NOTE:In the parameter setting mode, you can press to return the selecting mode.

To shift data

Setting direc tion (When operation source is digital keypad)

Setting PLC Mode

enter PLC2 mode

enter PLC1 mode

9-3
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 9 Digital Keypad|C200 Series

Reference Table for the 7-segment LED Display of the Digital Keypad

Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Seven Segment Display

English letter A a B C c D d E e F

Seven Segment Display - - - -

English letter f G g H h I i J j K

Seven Segment Display - -

English letter k L l M m N n O o P

Seven Segment Display - - - -

English letter p Q q R r S s T t U

Seven Segment Display - - - -

English letter u V v W w X x Y y Z

Seven Segment Display - - - - - - -

English letter z

Seven Segment Display -

Keypad Dimensions
Dimensions are in millimeter [inch]

71.9 [2.83] 25.9 [1.02] 8.6 [0.34] 52.4 [2.06]


M3*0.5(2X)
42.4 [1.67]

34.3 [1.35]

16.3 [0.64] 1.5 [0.06] 61.0 [2.40]


8.1 [0.32]

9-4
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings


This chapter provides summary of parameter settings for user to gather the parameter setting ranges,
factory settings and set parameters. The parameters can be set, changed and reset by the digital keypad.
NOTE

1) : the parameter can be set during operation


2) For more detail on parameters, please refer to Ch11 Description of Parameter Settings.

00 Drive Parameters
NOTE IM: Induction Motor; PM: Permanent Magnet Motor
Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
2:230V, 04kW
4: 230V, 1HP
5: 460 V, 1HP
6: 230V,2HP
7: 460 V, 2HP
8: 230V, 3HP
Identity Code of the AC Motor 9: 460 V, 3HP Read
00-00
Drive 10: 230V, 5HP only
11: 460 V, 5HP
12: 230V, 7.5HP
13: 460 V, 7.5HP
14: 230V, 10HP
15: 460V, 10HP
93: 460V, 5HP(4kW)
Display AC Motor Drive
00-01 Display by models Read
Rated Current
only
0: No function
1: Read only
5: Reset KWH display to 0
6: Reset PLC
7: Reset CANopen Index (Slave)
00-02 Parameter Reset 0
8: keypad lock
9: All parameters are reset to factory settings(base
frequency is 50Hz)
10: All parameters are reset to factory settings
(base frequency is 60Hz)
0: F (frequency command)
1: H (output frequency)
00-03 Start-up Display Selection 0
2: U (multi-function display, see Pr.00-04)
3: A (output current)
0: Display output current (A)
1: Display counter value (c)
2: Display actual output frequency (H.)
3: Display DC-BUS voltage (v)
4: Display output voltage (E)
5: Display output power angle (n)
Content of Multi-function 6: Display output power in kW (P)
00-04 3
Display 7: Display actual motor speed rpm (r)
8: Display estimate output torque % (t)
9: Reserved
10: Display PID feedback in % (b)
11: Display AVI in % (1.)
12: Display ACI in % (2.)
13: Display AUI in % (3.)

10-1
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
14: Display the temperature of IGBT in oC (i.)
15: Display the temperature of capacitance in oC
(c.)
16: The status of digital input (ON/OFF) (i)
17: The status of digital output (ON/OFF) (o)
18: Multi-step speed (S)
19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital
input (d.)
20: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital
output (0.)
21~24: Reserved
25: Overload count (0.00~100.00%) (h.)
26: Ground Fault GFF (Unit :%)(G.)
27: DC Bus voltage ripple (Unit: Vdc) (r.)
28: Display PLC data D1043 (C)
29: Reserved
30: Display output of user defined (U)
31: Display Pr.00-05 user Gain(K)
32~34: Reserved
35: Control Mode display: 0= Speed control mode
(SPD), 1= torque control mode (TQR) (t.)
36: Present operating carrier frequency of drive
(Hz) (J.)
Coefficient Gain in Actual
00-05 0~160.00 0
Output Frequency
Read-only
00-06 Software Version #.#
Parameter Protection 0~65535
00-07
Password Input 0~3: the times of password attempts 0
0 ~ 65535
Parameter Protection 0: No password protection / password is entered
00-08 0
Password Setting correctly (Pr00-07)
1: Parameter is locked
00-09 Reserved
0: Speed mode
00-10 Control Mode 1: Reserved 0
2: Torque mode
0: VF (IM V/f control)
1: VFPG (IM V/f control+ Encoder)
2: SVC(IM Sensorless vector control)
3: FOCPG (IM FOC vector control+ encoder)
00-11 Control of Speed Mode 0
4: Reserved
5: Reserved
6: PM Sensorless (PM field oriented sensorless
vector control)
00-12 Reserved
0: TQCPG(IM Torque control + Encoder)
00-13 Torque Mode Control 1: Reserved 0
2: Reserved
00-14 Reserved
00-15 Reserved
0: Normal load
00-16 Load Selection 0
1: Heavy load
Normal load: 1-15HP 8
00-17 Carrier Frequency
Heavy load: 1-15HP 2
0: 3-phase Read
00-18 Single or Three-phase setting
1: 1-phase only

10-2
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
Bit 0: Control command by PLC force control Read
00-19 PLC Command Mask
Bit 1: Frequency command by PLC force control only
0: Digital keypad
1: RS-485 serial communication
2: External analog input (Pr.03-00)
Source of Master Frequency 3: External UP/DOWN terminal
00-20 0
Command(AUTO) 4: Reserved
5: Reserved
6: CANopen communication
7: Digital keypad potentiometer
0: Digital keypad
1: External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled.
Source of the Operation
00-21 2: RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP 0
Command (AUTO)
disabled.
3: CANopen communication card
0: Ramp to stop
00-22 Stop Method 0
1: Coast to stop
0: Enable forward/reverse
00-23 Control of Motor Direction 1: Reverse disable 0
2: Forward disable
Memory of Frequency Read
00-24 Read only
Command only
Bit 0~3: user define on decimal place
0000b: no decimal place
0001b: one decimal place
0010b: two decimal place
0011b: three decimal place
00-25 User Defined Characteristics 0
Bit 4~15: user define on unit
000xh: Hz
001xh: rpm
002xh: %
003xh: kg
0: Disable
0~65535 (when Pr.00-25 set to no decimal place)
00-26 Max. User Defined Value 0.0~6553.5 (when Pr.00-25 set to 1 decimal place) 0
0.0~655.35 (when Pr.00-25 set to 2 decimal place)
0.0~65.535 (when Pr.00-25 set to 3 decimal place)
Read
00-27 User Defined Value Read only
Only
00-28 Reserved
0: Standard HOA function
1: Switching Local/Remote, the drive stops
2: Swithcing Local/Remote, the drive runs as the
REMOTE setting for frequency and operation
status
00-29 LOCAL/REMOTE Selection 3: Swithcing Local/Remote, the drive runs as the
LOCAL setting for frequency and operation status
4: Swithcing Local/Remote, the drive runs as
LOCAL setting when switch to Local and runs as
REMOTE setting when switch to Remote for
frequency and operation status.
0: Digital keypad
1: RS-485 serial communication
2: External analog input (Pr.03-00)
Source of the Master
3: External UP/DOWN terminal
00-30 Frequency Command 0
4: Reserved
(HAND)
5: Reserved
6: CANopen communication
7: Digital keypad potentiometer

10-3
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
0: Digital keypad
1: External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled.
Source of the Operation
00-31 2: RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP 0
Command (HAND)
disabled.
3: CANopen communication card
Digital Keypad STOP 0: STOP key disable
00-32 0
Function 1: STOP key enable
00-33
~ Reserved
00-47
00-48 Display Filter Time (Current) 0.001~65.535 sec 0.100
00-49 Display Filter Time (Keypad) 0.001~65.535 sec 0.100
00-50 Software Version (date) Read only #####

10-4
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

01 Basic Parameters
Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
60.00/
01-00 Max. Operation Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz
50.00
60.00/
01-01 Output Frequency of Motor 1 0.00~600.00Hz
50.00
230V: 0.0V~255.0V 200.0
01-02 Output Voltage of Motor 1
460V: 0.0V~510.0V 400.0
Mid-point Frequency 1 of
01-03 0.00~600.00Hz 3.00
Motor 1
230V: 0.0V~240.0V 11.0
01-04 Mid-point Voltage 1 of Motor 1
460V: 0.0V~480.0V 22.0
Mid-point Frequency 2 of
01-05 0.00~600.00Hz 0.50
Motor 1
230V: 0.0V~240.0V 2.0
01-06 Mid-point Voltage 2 of Motor 1
460V: 0.0V~480.0V 4.0
Min. Output Frequency of
01-07 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00
Motor 1
230V: 0.0V~240.0V 0.0
01-08 Min. Output Voltage of Motor 1
460V: 0.0V~480.0V 0.0
01-09 Start-Up Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 0.50
01-10 Output Frequency Upper Limit 0.00~600.00Hz 600.00
01-11 Output Frequency Lower Limit 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.00
01-12 Accel. Time 1
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second 10.0
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.00
01-13 Decel Time 1
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second 10.0
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.00
01-14 Accel Time 2
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second 10.0
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.00
01-15 Decel Time 2
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second 10.0
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.00
01-16 Accel Time 3
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second 10.0
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.00
01-17 Decel Time 3
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second 10.0
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.00
01-18 Accel Time 4
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second 10.0
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.00
01-19 Decel Time 4
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second 10.0
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.00
01-20 JOG Acceleration Time
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second 10.0
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.00
01-21 JOG Deceleration Time
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second 10.0
01-22 JOG Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 6.00
01-23 1st/4th Accel/decel Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00
S-curve Acceleration Begin Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 second 0.20
01-24
Time 1 Pr.01-45=1: 0.0~250.0 second 0.2
S-curve Acceleration Arrival Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 second 0.20
01-25
Time 2 Pr.01-45=1: 0.0~250.0 second 0.2
S-curve Deceleration Begin Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 second 0.20
01-26
Time 1 Pr.01-45=1: 0.0~250.0 second 0.2
S-curve Deceleration Arrival Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 second 0.20
01-27
Time 2 Pr.01-45=1: 0.0~250.0 second 0.2
01-28 Skip Frequency 1 (upper limit) 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00
01-29 Skip Frequency 1 (lower limit) 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00

10-5
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
01-30 Skip Frequency 2 (upper limit) 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00
01-31 Skip Frequency 2 (lower limit) 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00
01-32 Skip Frequency 3 (upper limit) 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00
01-33 Skip Frequency 3 (lower limit) 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00
0: Output waiting
01-34 Zero-speed Mode 1: Zero-speed operation 0
2: Fmin (the 4th output frequency)
60.00/
01-35 Output Frequency of Motor 2 0.00~600.00Hz
50.00
230V: 0.0V~255.0V 200.0
01-36 Output Voltage of Motor 2
460V: 0.0V~510.0V 400.0
Mid-point Frequency 1 of
01-37 0.00~600.00Hz 3.00
Motor 2
230V: 0.0V~240.0V 11.0
01-38 Mid-point Voltage 1 of Motor 2
460V: 0.0V~480.0V 22.0
Mid-point Frequency 2 of
01-39 0.00~600.00Hz 0.50
Motor 2
230V: 0.0V~240.0V 2.0
01-40 Mid-point Voltage 2 of Motor 2
460V: 0.0V~480.0V 4.0
Min. Output Frequency of
01-41 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00
Motor 2
230V: 0.0V~240.0V 0.0
01-42 Min. Output Voltage of Motor 2
460V: 0.0V~480.0V 0.0
0: V/f curve determined by Pr.01-00~Pr.01-08
01-43 V/f Curve Selection 1: Curve to the power of 1.5 0
2: Curve to the power of 2
0: Linear accel. /decel.
1: Auto accel.; linear decel.
Optimal
2: Linear accel.; auto decel.
01-44 Acceleration/Deceleration 0
3: Auto accel./decel.
Setting
4: Linear, stall prevention by auto accel./decel. (limit
by Pr.01-12 to 01-21)
Time Unit for Accel. /Decel. 0: Unit: 0.01 sec
01-45 0
and S Curve 1: Unit: 0.1sec
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 sec
01-46 CANopen Quick Stop Time 1.00
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.0~6000.0 sec

10-6
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

02 Digital Input/Output Parameters


Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
0: 2-wire mode, power on for operation control
2-wire/3-wire Operation
02-00 1: 2-wire mode 2, power on for operation control 0
Control
2: 3-wire, power on for operation control
Multi-function Input
02-01 0: No function 1
Command 1 (MI1)
Multi-function Input 1: Multi-step speed command 1/multi-step position
02-02 2
Command 2 (MI2) command 1
Multi-function Input 2: Multi-step speed command 2/multi-step position
02-03 3
Command 3 (MI3) command 2
Multi-function Input 3: Multi-step speed command 3/multi-step position
02-04 4
Command 4 (MI4) command 3
Multi-function Input 4: Multi-step speed command 4/multi-step position
02-05 0
Command 5 (MI5) command 4
Multi-function Input
02-06 5: Reset 0
Command 6 (MI6)
Multi-function Input
02-07 6: JOG command(By KPC-CC01 or external control) 0
Command 7 (MI7)
Multi-function Input
02-08 7: Acceleration/deceleration speed inhibit 0
Command 8 (MI8)
8: The 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection 0
rd th
9: The 3 , 4 acceleration/deceleration time selection 0
10: EF Input (Pr.07-20) 0
11: B.B input from external (Base Block) 0
12: Output stop 0
13: Cancel the setting of optimal accel. /decel. time 0
14: Switch between motor 1 and motor 2
15: Operation speed command from AVI
16: Operation speed command from ACI
17: Operation speed command from AUI
18: Emergency stop (Pr.07-20)
19: Digital up command
20: Digital down command
21: PID function disabled
22: Clear counter
23: Input the counter value (MI6)
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
26: TQC/FOCmodel selection
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
28: Emergency stop (EF1)
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for Δ-connection
31: High torque bias (Pr.11-30)
32: Middle torque bias (Pr.11-31)
33: Low torque bias (Pr.11-32)
34~37: Reserved
38: Disable EEPROM write function
39: Torque command direction
40: Force coast to stop
41: HAND switch
42: AUTO switch
43~47: Reserved
48: Mechanical gear ratio switch
49: Drive enable

10-7
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
50: Master dEb action input
51: Selection for PLC mode bit0
52: Selection for PLC mode bit1
53: Trigger CANopen quick stop
54~55: Reserved
56: Local/Remote Selection
0: up/down by the accel. /decel. time
02-09 UP/DOWN key mode 0
1: up/down constant speed (Pr.02-10)
Constant speed. The
02-10 Accel. /Decel. Speed of the 0.01~1.00Hz/ms 0.01
UP/DOWN Key
Digital Input Response
02-11 0.000~30.000 second 0.005
Time
Digital Input Mode
02-12 0000h~FFFFh (0: N.O.; 1: N.C.) 0000
Selection
Multi-function Output 1
02-13 0: No function 11
RY1
Multi-function Output 2
02-14 1: Operation Indication 1
RY2
Multi-function Output 3
(MO1)
02-16 2: Operation speed attained 0
(When Pr02-21 =0, this
parameter is enabled.)
Multi-function Output 4
(MO2)
02-17 3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-22) 0
(When Pr02-55 =0, this
parameter is enabled.)
4: Desired frequency attained 2 (Pr.02-24) 0
5: Zero speed (Frequency command) 0
6: Zero speed, include STOP(Frequency command) 0
7: Over torque 1(Pr.06-06~06-08) 0
8: Over torque 2(Pr.06-09~06-11) 0
9: Drive is ready 0
10: Low voltage warning(LV)(Pr.06-00) 0
11: Malfunction indication 0
12: Mechanical brake release(Pr.02-32) 0
13: Overheat warning (Pr.06-15) 0
14: Software brake signal indication(Pr.07-00) 0
15: PID feedback error
16: Slip error (oSL)
17: Terminal count value attained, does not return to 0
(Pr.02-20)
18: Preliminary count value attained, returns to 0
(Pr.02-19)
19: Base Block
20: Warning output
21: Over voltage warning
22: Over-current stall prevention warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
24: Operation mode indication
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current >= Pr.02-33 (>= 02-33)
28: Output when current <=Pr.02-33 (<= 02-33)
29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-34 (>= 02-34)

10-8
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
30: Output when frequency <= Pr.02-34 (<= 02-34)
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
32: △-connection for the motor coil
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed include stop(actual output frequency)
35: Error output selection 1(Pr.06-23)
36: Error output selection 2(Pr.06-24)
37: Error output selection 3(Pr.06-25)
38: Error output selection 4(Pr.06-26)
39: Reserved
40: Speed attained (including Stop)
41: Reserved
42: Crane function
43: Actual motor speed slower than Pr.02-47
44: Low current output (use with Pr.06-71~06-73)
45: Reserved
46: Master dEb warning output
47: Closed brake output
48: Reserved
49: Reserved
50: Output for CANopen control
51: Output for RS485
Multi-function output
02-18 0000h~FFFFh (0: N.O.; 1: N.C.) 0000
direction
Terminal counting value
02-19 0~65500 0
attained (returns to 0)
Preliminary counting value
02-20 0~65500 0
attained (not return to 0)
02-21 Digital Output Gain (DFM) 0~106 1
Desired Frequency 60.00/
02-22 0.00~600.00Hz
Attained 1 50.00
The Width of the Desired
02-23 0.00~600.00Hz 2.00
Frequency Attained 1
Desired Frequency 60.00/
02-24 0.00~600.00Hz
Attained 2 50.00
The Width of the Desired
02-25 0.00~600.00Hz 2.00
Frequency Attained 2
02-26
~ Reserved
02-31
02-32 Brake Delay Time 0.000~65.000 sec. 0.000
Output Current Level
02-33 Setting for Multi-function 0~100% 0
External Terminals
Output frequency setting
02-34 for multi-function output 0.00~600.00Hz(Motor speed when using PG Card) 0.00
terminal
External Operation Control 0: Disable
02-35 Selection after Reset and 0
1: Drive runs if run command exists after reset
Activate
02-36
~ Reserved
02-46
02-47 Zero-speed Level of Motor 0~65535 rpm 0
Max. Frequency of
02-48 0.00~600.00Hz 60.00
Resolution Switch
Switch the delay time of
02-49 0~65000 ms 0
Max. output frequency
Status of Multi-function Read
02-50 Monitor the status of multi-function input terminals
Input Terminal only

10-9
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
Status of Multi-function Read
02-51 Monitor the status of multi-function output terminals
Output Terminal only
Display External Output Read
02-52 Monitor the status of PLC input terminals
terminal occupied by PLC only
Display Analog Input Read
02-53 Monitor the status of PLC output terminals
Terminal occupied by PLC only
Display the Frequency
Read
02-54 Command Executed by Read only
only
External Terminal
02-55 Digital Output Gain (DFM2) 0~106 1

10-10
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

03 Analog Input/Output Parameters


Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
Analog Input Selection
03-00 0: No function 1
(AVI)
Analog Input Selection 1: Frequency command (torque limit under torque
03-01 0
(ACI) control mode)
Analog Input Selection
03-02 2: Torque command (torque limit under speed mode) 0
(AUI)
3: Torque compensation command
4: PID target value
5: PID feedback signal
6: PTC thermistor input value
7: Positive torque limit
8: Negative torque limit
9: Regenerative torque limit
10: Positive/negative torque limit
03-03 Analog Input Bias (AVI) -100.0~100.0% 0
03-04 Analog Input Bias (ACI) -100.0~100.0% 0
Analog Positive Voltage
03-05 -100.0~100.0% 0
Input Bias (AUI)
03-06 Reserved
Positive/negative Bias 0: No bias
03-07
Mode (AVI) 1: Lower than or equal to bias
Positive/negative Bias 2: Greater than or equal to bias
03-08 0
Mode (ACI) 3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving
Positive/negative Bias as the center
03-09 4: Serve bias as the center
Mode (AUI)
0: Negative frequency is not valid. Forward and
reverse run is controlled by digital keypad or
Analog Frequency external terminal.
03-10 Command for Reverse 1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive frequency = 0
Run forward run; negative frequency = reverse run.
Direction can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI) -500.0~500.0% 100.0
03-12 Analog Input Gain (ACI) -500.0~500.0% 100.0
Analog Positive Input
03-13 -500.0~500.0% 100.0
Gain (AUI)
Analog Negative Input
03-14 -500.0~500.0% 100.0
Gain (AUI)
Analog Input Filter Time
03-15 0.00~20.00 sec. 0.01
(AVI)
Analog Input Filter Time
03-16 0.00~20.00 sec. 0.01
(ACI)
Analog Input Filter Time
03-17 0.00~20.00 sec. 0.01
(AUI)
Addition Function of the 0: Disable (AVI, ACI, AUI)
03-18 0
Analog Input 1: Enable
0: Disable
1: Continue operation at the last frequency
03-19 ACI Signal Loss 0
2: Decelerate to 0Hz
3: Stop immediately and display ACE
Multi-function Output 1
03-20 0: Output frequency (Hz) 0
(AFM1)

10-11
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
Multi-function Output 2
03-23 1: Frequency command (Hz) 0
(AFM2)
2: Motor speed (Hz)
3: Output current (rms)
4: Output voltage
5: DC Bus voltage
6: Power factor
7: Power
8: Output torque
9: AVI
10: ACI
11: AUI
12: Iq current
13: Iq feedback value
14: Id current
15: Id feedback value
16: Vq-axis voltage
17: Vd-axis voltage
18: Torque command
19: Reserved
20: CANopen analog output
21: RS485 analog output
22: Reserved
23: Constant voltage/current output
Gain of Analog Output 1
03-21 0~500.0% 100.0
(AFM1)
0: Absolute output voltage
Analog Output 1 when in
03-22 1: Reverse output 0V; Positive output 0-10V 0
REV Direction (AFM1)
2: Reverse output 5-0V; Positive output 5-10V
Gain of Analog Output 2
03-24 0~500.0% 100.0
(AFM2)
0: Absolute output voltage
1: Output 0V in REV direction; output 0-10V in FWD
Analog Output 2 when in
03-25 direction 0
REV Direction (AFM2)
2: Output 5-0V in REV direction; output 5-10V in FWD
direction
03-26 Reserved
03-27 Reserved
0: 0-10V
03-28 AVI Selection 1: 0-20mA 0
2: 4-20mA
0: 4-20mA
03-29 ACI Selection 1: 0-10V 0
2: 0-20mA
Status of PLC Output Read
03-30 Monitor the status of PLC output terminals
Terminal only
AFM2 0-20mA Output 0: 0-20mA Output
03-31 0
Selection 1: 4-20mA Output
AFM1 DC output setting
03-32 0.00~100.00% 0.00
level
AFM2 DC Output Setting
03-33 0.00~100.00% 0.00
Level
03-34
~ Reserved
03-38
keypad potentiometer 0: No function
03-39 0
Selection 1: Frequency command
keypad potentiometer
03-40 -100.0~100.0% 0.0
Input Bias

10-12
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
keypad potentiometer
2: Greater than or equal to bias
03-41 Positive/negative Bias 0
3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving
Mode
as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
keypad potentiometer
03-42 -500.0~500.0% 100.0
Input Gain
keypad potentiometer
03-43 0~2.00 sec. 0.01
Analog Input Filter Time
03-44
~ Reserved
03-49
0: Regular Curve
1: 3 point curve of AVI
2: 3 point curve of ACI
Analog Input Curve 3: 3 point curve of AVI & ACI
03-50 0
Selection 4: 3 point curve of AUI
5: 3 point curve of AVI & AUI
6: 3 point curve of ACI & AUI
7: 3 point curve of AVI & ACI & AUI
Pr.03-28=0, 0.00~10.00V
03-51 AVI Low Point 0.00
Pr.03-28≠0, 0.00~20.00mA
03-52 AVI Proportional Low Point 0.00~100.00% 0.00
Pr.03-28=0, 0.00~10.00V
03-53 AVI Mid Point 5.00
Pr.03-28≠0, 0.00~20.00mA
03-54 AVI Proportional Mid Point 0.00~100.00% 50.00
Pr.03-28=0, 0.00~10.00V
03-55 AVI High Point 10.00
Pr.03-28≠0, 0.00~20.00mA
AVI Proportional High
03-56 0.00~100.00% 100.00
Point
Pr.03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V
03-57 ACI Low Point 4.00
Pr.03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA
ACI Proportional Low
03-58 0.00~100.00% 0.00
Point
Pr.03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V
03-59 ACI Mid Point 12.00
Pr.03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA
03-60 ACI Proportional Mid Point 0.00~100.00% 50.00
Pr.03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V
03-61 ACI High Point 20.00
Pr.03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA
ACI Proportional High
03-62 0.00~100.00% 100.00
Point
Positive AUI Voltage Low
03-63 0.00~10.00V 0.00
Point
Positive AUI Voltage
03-64 0.00~100.00% 0.00
Proportional Low Point
Positive AUI Voltage Mid
03-65 0.00~10.00V 5.00
Point
Positive AUI Voltage
03-66 0.00~100.00% 50.00
Proportional Mid Point
Positive AUI Voltage High
03-67 0.00~10.00V 10.00
Point
Positive AUI Voltage
03-68 0.00~100.00% 100.00
Proportional High Point
Negative AUI Voltage Low
03-69 0.00~ -10.00V 0.00
Point

10-13
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
Negative AUI Voltage
03-70 0.00~ -100.00% 0.00
Proportional Low Point
Negative AUI Voltage Mid
03-71 0.00~ -10.00V -5.00
Point
Negative AUI Voltage
03-72 0.00~ -100.00% -50.00
Proportional Mid Point
Negative AUI Voltage High
03-73 0.00~ -10.00V -10.00
Point
Negative AUI Voltage -100.0
03-74 0.00~ -100.00%
Proportional High Point 0

10-14
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

04 Multi-step Speed Parameters


Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
04-00 1st Step Speed Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 0
2nd Step Speed 0.00~600.00Hz
04-01 0
Frequency
3rd Step Speed 0.00~600.00Hz
04-02 0
Frequency
04-03 4th Step Speed Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 0
04-04 5th Step Speed Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 0
04-05 6th Step Speed Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 0
04-06 7th Step Speed Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 0
04-07 8th Step Speed Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 0
04-08 9th Step Speed Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 0
10th Step Speed 0.00~600.00Hz
04-09 0
Frequency
11th Step Speed 0.00~600.00Hz
04-10 0
Frequency
12th Step Speed 0.00~600.00Hz
04-11 0
Frequency
13th Step Speed 0.00~600.00Hz
04-12 0
Frequency
14th Step Speed 0.00~600.00Hz
04-13 0
Frequency
15th Step Speed 0.00~600.00Hz
04-14 0
Frequency

10-15
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

05 Motor Parameters
Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
0: No function
1: Rolling test for induction motor(IM) (Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx,
no-load current)
2: Static test for induction motor(IM)
3: No function
05-00 Motor Auto Tuning 0
4: Rolling test for PM motor magnetic pole
5: Rolling test for PM motor
6: Rolling test for IM motor flux curve
12: FOC Sensorless inertia estimation
13: High frequency and blocked rotor test for PM motor
Full-load Current of 10~120% of drive’s rated current
05-01 #.##
Induction Motor 1(A)
Rated Power of Induction 0~655.35kW
05-02 #.##
Motor 1(kW)
Rated Speed of Induction 0~65535
05-03 1710
Motor 1 (rpm) 1710(60Hz 4poles) ; 1410(50Hz 4 poles)
Pole Number of Induction 2~20
05-04 4
Motor 1
No-load Current of 0~ Pr.05-01 factory setting
05-05 #.##
Induction Motor 1 (A)
Stator Resistance (Rs) of 0~65.535mΩ
05-06 0
Induction Motor 1
Rotor Resistance (Rr) of 0~65.535mΩ
05-07 0
Induction Motor 1
Magnetizing Inductance 0~6553.5mH
05-08 0
(Lm) of Induction Motor 1
Stator Inductance (Lx) of 0~6553.5mH
05-09 0
Induction Motor 1
05-10 ~
Reserved
05-12
Full-load Current of 10~120%
05-13 #.##
Induction Motor 2 (A)
Rated Power of Induction 0~655.35kW
05-14 #.##
Motor 2 (kW)
Rated Speed of Induction 0~65535
05-15 1710
Motor 2 (rpm) 1710(60Hz 4 poles) ; 1410(50Hz 4 poles)
Pole Number of Induction 2~20
05-16 4
Motor 2
No-load Current of 0~ Pr.05-01 factory setting
05-17 #.##
Induction Motor 2 (A)
Stator Resistance (Rs) of 0~65.535mΩ
05-18 0
Induction Motor 2
Rotor Resistance (Rr) of 0~65.535mΩ
05-19 0
Induction Motor 2
Magnetizing Inductance 0~6553.5mH
05-20 0
(Lm) of Induction Motor 2
Stator Inductance (Lx) of 0~6553.5mH
05-21 0
Induction Motor 2
Induction Motor 1/ 2 1: motor 1
05-22 1
Selection 2: motor 2
Frequency for 0.00~600.00Hz
Y-connection/△-connectio
05-23 60.00
n Switch of Induction
Motor
Y-connection/△-connectio 0: Disable
05-24 n Switch of Induction 1: Enable 0
Motor
Delay Time for 0.000~60.000 sec.
05-25 Y-connection/△-connectio 0.200
n Switch of Induction

10-16
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
Motor
Accumulative
05-26 Watt-second of Motor in Read only #.#
Low Word (W-sec)
Accumulative
05-27 Watt-second of Motor in Read only #.#
High Word (W-sec)
Accumulative Watt-hour of
05-28 Read only #.#
Motor (W-Hour)
Accumulative Watt-hour of
05-29 Motor in Low Word Read only #.#
(KW-Hour)
Accumulative Watt-hour of
05-30 Motor in High Word Read only #.#
(KW-Hour)
Accumulative Motor 00~1439
05-31 0
Operation Time (Min)
Accumulative Motor 00~65535
05-32 0
Operation Time (day)
Induction Motor and 0: Induction Motor
05-33 Permanent Magnet Motor 1: Permanent Magnet Motor 0
Selection
Full-load current of 0.00~655.35Amps
05-34 0.00
Permanent Magnet Motor
Rated Power of 0.00~655.35kW
05-35 0.00
Permanent Magnet Motor
Rated speed of 0~65535rpm
05-36 2000
Permanent Magnet Motor
Pole number of 0~65535
05-37 10
Permanent Magnet Motor
2
Inertia of Permanent 0.0~6553.5 kg.cm
05-38 0.0
Magnet Motor
Stator Resistance of PM 0.000~65.535Ω
05-39 0.000
Motor
Permanent Magnet Motor 0.00~655.35mH
05-40 0.000
Ld
Permanent Magnet Motor 0.00~655.35mH
05-41 0.000
Lq
PG Offset angle of PM 0.0~360.0°
05-42 0.0
Motor
05-43 Ke parameter of PM Motor 0~65535 (Unit: V/1000rpm) 0

10-17
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

06 Protection Parameters
Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
230V: 150.0~220.0Vdc 180.0
06-00 Low Voltage Level
460V: 300.0~440.0Vdc 360.0
0: Disabled
Over-voltage Stall
06-01 230V: 0.0~450.0Vdc 380.0
Prevention
460V: 0.0~900.0Vdc 760.0
Selection for Over-voltage 0: Traditional over-voltage stall prevention
06-02 0
Stall Prevention 1: Smart over-voltage prevention
Over-current Stall
Normal Load: 0~160%(100%: drive’s rated current) 120
06-03 Prevention during
Heavy Load: 0~180%(100%: drive’s rated current) 150
Acceleration
Over-current Stall
Normal Load: 0~160%(100%: drive’s rated current) 120
06-04 Prevention during
Heavy Load: 0~180%(100%: drive’s rated current) 150
Operation
0: by current accel/decel time
Accel. /Decel. Time 1: by the 1st accel/decel time
Selection of Stall 2: by the 2nd accel/decel time
06-05 0
Prevention at Constant 3: by the 3rd accel/decel time
Speed 4: by the 4th accel/decel time
5: by auto accel/decel
0: No function
1: Over-torque detection during constant speed
operation, continue to operate after detection
2: Over-torque detection during constant speed
Over-torque Detection
06-06 operation, stop operation after detection 0
Selection (OT1)
3: Over-torque detection during operation, continue to
operate after detection
4: Over-torque detection during operation, stop
operation after detection
Over-torque Detection
06-07 10~250% (100%: drive’s rated current) 120
Level (OT1)
Over-torque Detection
06-08 0.0~60.0 sec. 0.1
Time (OT1)
0: No function
1: Over-torque detection during constant speed
operation, continue to operate after detection
2: Over-torque detection during constant speed
Over-torque Detection
06-09 operation, stop operation after detection 0
Selection (OT2)
3: Over-torque detection during operation, continue to
operation after detection
4: Over-torque detection during operation, stop
operation after detection
Over-torque Detection
06-10 10~250% (100%: drive’s rated current) 120
Level (OT2)
Over-torque Detection
06-11 0.1~60.0 sec. 0.1
Time (OT2)
06-12 Current Limit 0~250% (100%: drive’s rated current) 150
0: Inverter motor
Electronic Thermal Relay
06-13 1: Standard motor 2
Selection (Motor 1)
2: Disable
Electronic Thermal
06-14 30.0~600.0 sec. 60.0
Characteristic for Motor 1
Heat Sink Over-heat (OH)
06-15 0.0~110.0℃ 85.0
Warning
Stall Prevention Limit
06-16 0~100% (Pr.06-03, Pr.06-04) 50
Level
06-17 Present Fault Record 0: No fault record 0
Second Most Recent Fault
06-18 1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA) 0
Record

10-18
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
Third Most Recent Fault
06-19 2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd) 0
Record
Fourth Most Recent Fault
06-20 3: Over-current during constant speed(ocn) 0
Record
Fifth Most Recent Fault
06-21 4: Ground fault (GFF) 0
Record
Sixth Most Recent Fault
06-22 5: IGBT short-circuit (occ) 0
Record
6: Over-current at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
14: Stop mid-low voltage (LvS)
15: Phase loss protection (OrP)
16: IGBT over-heat (oH1)
17: Capacitance over-heat (oH2)
18: tH1o (TH1 open: IGBT over-heat
protection error)
19: tH2o (TH2 open: capacitance over-heat
protection error)
20: Reserved
21: Drive over-load (oL)
22: Electronics thermal relay 1 (EoL1)
23: Electronics thermal relay 2 (EoL2)
24: Motor overheat (oH3) (PTC)
25: Reserved
26: Over-torque 1 (ot1)
27: Over-torque 2 (ot2)
28: Low current (uC)
29: Reserved
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
32: Reserved
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
39: Ground current detection error (Hd3)
40: Auto tuning error (AUE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
46: Reserved
47: Reserved
48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
50: Emergency stop (EF1)
51: External Base Block (bb)
52: Password error (PcodE)
53: Reserved
54: Communication error (CE1)
55: Communication error (CE2)
56: Communication error (CE3)

10-19
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
57: Communication error (CE4)
58: Communication Time-out (CE10)
59: Reserved
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection/△-connection switch error (ydc)
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb)
63: Slip error (oSL)
64: Electromagnet switch error (ryF)
65 : PG Card Error (PGF5)
66-78: Reserved
79: U phase over current (Uocc)
80: V phase over current (Vocc)
81: W phase over current (Wocc)
82: U phase output phase loss (OPHL)
83: V phase output phase loss (OPHL)
84: W phase output phase loss (OPHL)
85~100: Reserved
101: CANopen software disconnect1 (CGdE)
102: CAN open software disconnect2 (CHbE)
103: CANopen synchronous error (CSYE)
104: CANopen hardware disconnect (CbFE)
105: CANopen index setting error (CIdE)
106: CANopen slave station number setting error
(CAdE)
107: CANopen index setting exceed limit (CFrE)
111: Internal communication overtime error(InrCOM)
06-23 Fault Output Option 1 0~65535(refer to bit table for fault code) 0
06-24 Fault Output Option 2 0~65535(refer to bit table for fault code) 0
06-25 Fault Output Option 3 0~65535(refer to bit table for fault code) 0
06-26 Fault Output Option 4 0~65535(refer to bit table for fault code) 0
0: Inverter motor
Electronic Thermal Relay
06-27 1: Standard motor 2
Selection 2 (Motor 2)
2: Disable
Electronic Thermal
06-28 30.0~600.0 sec 60.0
Characteristic for Motor 2
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
06-29 PTC Detection Selection 0
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning
06-30 PTC Level 0.0~100.0% 50.0
Frequency Command for Read
06-31 0.00~655.35 Hz
Malfunction only
Output Frequency at Read
06-32 0.00~655.35 Hz
Malfunction only
Output Voltage at Read
06-33 0.0~6553.5 V
Malfunction only
Read
06-34 DC Voltage at Malfunction 0.0~6553.5 V
only
Output Current at Read
06-35 0.00~655.35 Amp
Malfunction only
IGBT Temperature at Read
06-36 0.0~6553.5 ℃
Malfunction only
Capacitance Temperature Read
06-37 0.0~6553.5 ℃
at Malfunction only
Motor Speed in rpm at Read
06-38 0~65535
Malfunction only
Torque Command at Read
06-39 0~65535
Malfunction only

10-20
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
Status of Multi-function Read
06-40 Input Terminal at 0000h~FFFFh only
Malfunction
Status of Multi-function Read
06-41 Output Terminal at 0000h~FFFFh only
Malfunction
Drive Status at Read
06-42 0000h~FFFFh
Malfunction only
06-43 Reserved
06-44 Reserved
0: Warn and keep operation
Treatment to Output
1: Warn and ramp to stop
06-45 Phase Loss Detection 3
2: Warn and coast to stop
(OPHL)
3: No warning
Deceleration Time of
06-46 0.000~65.535 sec 0.500
Output Phase Loss
06-47 Current Bandwidth 0.00~655.35% 1.00
DC Brake Time of Output
06-48 0.000~65.535sec 0.000
Phase Loss
06-49 Reserved
Time for Input Phase Loss
06-50 0.00~600.00 sec. 0.20
Detection
06-51 Reserved
Ripple of Input Phase 230V model: 0.0~160.0 Vdc 30.0
06-52
Loss 460V model: 0.0~320.0 Vdc /60.0
Treatment for the detected 0: warn and ramp to stop
06-53 0
Input Phase Loss (OrP) 1: warn and coast to stop
06-54 Reserved
0: constant rated current and limit carrier wave by load
current and temperature
1: constant carrier frequency and limit load current by
06-55 Derating Protection 0
setting carrier wave
2: constant rated current(same as setting 0), but close
current limit
06-56
~ Reserved
06-59
Software Detection GFF 0.0~6553.5 %
06-60 60.0
Current Level
Software Detection GFF 0.0~6553.5 %
06-61 0.10
Filter Time
230V series: 0.0~220.0 Vdc 180.0
06-62 Disable Level of dEb
460V series: 0.0~440.0 Vdc /360.0
Read
06-63 Fault Record 1 (Min) 0~64799 min
only
Read
06-64 Fault Record 2 (Min) 0~64799 min
only
Read
06-65 Fault Record 3 (Min) 0~64799 min
only
Read
06-66 Fault Record 4 (Min) 0~64799 min
only
Read
06-67 Fault Record 5 (Min) 0~64799 min
only
Read
06-68 Fault Record 6 (Min) 0~64799 min
only
Read
06-69 Days of operation Read only
only

10-21
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
Read
06-70 Minutes of operation Read only
only
06-71 Low Current Setting Level 0.0 ~ 6553.5 % 0.0
Low Current Detection
06-72 0.00 ~ 655.35sec 0.00
Time
0 : No function
1 : Warn and coast to stop
06-73 Treatment for low current 0
2 : Warn and ramp to stop by 2nd deceleration time
3 : Warn and operation continue

10-22
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

07 Special Parameters
Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
230V: 350.0~450.0Vdc 380.0
07-00 Software Brake Level
460V: 700.0~900.0Vdc 760.0
07-01 DC Brake Current Level 0~100% 0
07-02 DC Brake Time at Start-up 0.0~60.0 sec. 0.0
07-03 DC Brake Time at Stop 0.0~60.0 sec. 0.0
Startup Frequency for DC
07-04 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00
Brake
07-05 Reserved
0: Stop operation
Restart after Momentary
07-06 1: Speed search for last frequency command 0
Power Loss
2: Speed search for minimum output frequency
Maximum Power Loss
07-07 0.1~20.0 sec. 2.0
Duration
07-08 Base Block Time 0.1~5.0 sec. 0.5
Current Limit for Speed
07-09 20~200% 50
Search
0: Stop operation
Treatment to Reboots After
07-10 1: Speed search starts with current speed 0
Fault
2: Speed search starts with minimum output frequency
07-11 Auto Restart After Fault 0~10 0
0: Disable
Speed Search during 1: Speed search for maximum output frequency
07-12 0
Start-up 2: Speed search for start-up motor frequency
3: Speed search for minimum output frequency
0: Disable
1: 1st decel. time
2: 2nd decel. time
Decel. Time to Momentary
07-13 3: 3rd decel. time 0
Power Loss
4: 4th decel. time
5: current decel. time
6: Auto decel. time
07-14 DEB Return Time 0.0~25.0sec 0.0
07-15 Dwell Time at Accel. 0.00 ~ 600.00sec 0.00
07-16 Dwell Frequency at Accel. 0.00 ~ 600.00Hz 0.00
07-17 Dwell Time at Decel. 0.00 ~ 600.00sec 0.00
07-18 Dwell Frequency at Decel. 0.00 ~ 600.00Hz 0.00
0: Fan always ON
1: 1 minute after the AC motor drive stops, fan will be
OFF
2: When the AC motor drive runs, the fan is ON. When
07-19 Fan Cooling Control 0
the AC motor drive stops, the fan is OFF
3: Fan turns ON when preliminary heat sink
o
temperature (around 60 C) is attained.
4: Fan always OFF
0: Coast stop
1: By deceleration Time 1
2: By deceleration Time 2
Emergency Stop (EF) &
07-20 3: By deceleration Time 3 0
Force to Stop Selection
4: By deceleration Time 4
5: System Deceleration
6: Automatic Deceleration
Auto Energy-saving 0: Disable
07-21 0
Operation 1: Enable

10-23
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
07-22 Energy-saving Gain 10~1000% 100
0: Enable AVR
Auto Voltage
07-23 1: Disable AVR 0
Regulation(AVR) Function
2: Disable AVR during deceleration
Filter Time of Torque
07-24 Command (V/F and SVC 0.001~10.000 sec 0.020
control mode)
Filter Time of Slip
07-25 Compensation (V/F and 0.001~10.000 sec 0.100
SVC control mode)
Torque Compensation
07-26 Gain (V/F and SVC control 0~10 0
mode)
Slip Compensation Gain
07-27 (V/F and SVC control 0.00~10.00 0.00
mode)
07-28 Reserved
0.0~100.0%
07-29 Slip Deviation Level 0
0: No detection
Detection Time of Slip
07-30 0.0~10.0 sec 1.0
Deviation
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
07-31 Over Slip Treatment 0
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning
07-32 Motor Hunting Gain 0~10000 1000
Auto Reset Time for
07-33 0.0~6000.0 sec 60.0
Restart after Fault

10-24
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

08 High-function PID Parameters


Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
0: No function
1: Negative PID feedback: input from external terminal
AVI (Pr.03-00)
2: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip
direction)
Input Terminal for PID
08-00 3: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15) 0
Feedback
4: Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI
(Pr.03-00)
5: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip
direction)
6: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
08-01 Proportional Gain (P) 0.0~500.0% 1.0
08-02 Integral Time (I) 0.00~100.00sec 1.00
08-03 Derivative Control (D) 0.00~1.00sec 0.00
Upper Limit of Integral
08-04 0.0~100.0% 100.0
Control
PID Output Frequency
08-05 0.0~110.0% 100.0
Limit
08-06 Reserved
08-07 PID Delay Time 0.0~2.5 秒 0.0
Feedback Signal
08-08 0.0~3600.0sec 0.0
Detection Time
0: Warn and keep operation
Feedback Signal Fault 1: Warn and ramp to stop
08-09 0
Treatment 2: Warn and coast to stop
3: Warn and operate at last frequency
Pr.08-18=0: 0.00 ~ 600.00Hz
08-10 Sleep Frequency 0.00
Pr.08-18=1: 0.00~200.00%
Pr.08-18=0: 0.00 ~ 600.00Hz
08-11 Wake-up Frequency 0.00
Pr.08-18=1: 0.00~200.00%
08-12 Sleep Time 0.0 ~ 6000.0sec 0.0
08-13 PID Deviation Level 1.0 ~ 50.0% 10.0
08-14 PID Deviation Time 0.1~300.0sec 5.0
Filter Time for PID
08-15 0.1~300.0sec 5.0
Feedback
PID Compensation 0: Parameter setting
08-16 0
Selection 1: Reserved
08-17 PID Compensation -100.0~+100.0% 0
Setting of Sleep Mode 0: Follow PID output command
08-18 0
Function 1: Follow PID feedback signal
08-19 Wake-up Integral Limit 0.0~200.0% 50.0
0: Serial connection
08-20 PID Mode Selection 0
1: Parallel connection
Enable PID to Change 0: Operation direction can be changed
08-21 0
Operation Direction 1: Operation direction can not be changed

10-25
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

09 Communication Parameters
Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
COM1 Communication
09-00 1~254 1
Address
COM1 Transmission
09-01 4.8~115.2Kbps 19.2
Speed
0: Warn and continue operation
COM1 Transmission Fault 1: Warn and ramp to stop
09-02 3
Treatment 2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning and continue operation
09-03 COM1 Time-out Detection 0.0~100.0 sec. 0.0
0: 7N1 (ASCII)
1: 7N2 (ASCII)
2: 7E1 (ASCII)
3: 7O1 (ASCII)
4: 7E2 (ASCII)
5: 7O2 (ASCII)
6: 8N1 (ASCII)
7: 8N2 (ASCII)
COM1 Communication 8: 8E1 (ASCII)
09-04 13
Protocol 9: 8O1 (ASCII)
10: 8E2 (ASCII)
11: 8O2 (ASCII)
12: 8N1 (RTU)
13: 8N2 (RTU)
14: 8E1 (RTU)
15: 8O1 (RTU)
16: 8E2 (RTU)
17: 8O2 (RTU)
09-05
~ Reserved
09-08
09-09 Response Delay Time 0.0~200.0ms 2.0
Main Frequency of the
09-10 0.00~600.00Hz 60.00
Communication
09-11 Block Transfer 1 0~65535 0
09-12 Block Transfer 2 0~65535 0
09-13 Block Transfer 3 0~65535 0
09-14 Block Transfer 4 0~65535 0
09-15 Block Transfer 5 0~65535 0
09-16 Block Transfer 6 0~65535 0
09-17 Block Transfer 7 0~65535 0
09-18 Block Transfer 8 0~65535 0
09-19 Block Transfer 9 0~65535 0
09-20 Block Transfer 10 0~65535 0
09-21 Block Transfer 11 0~65535 0
09-22 Block Transfer 12 0~65535 0
09-23 Block Transfer 13 0~65535 0
09-24 Block Transfer 14 0~65535 0
09-25 Block Transfer 15 0~65535 0
09-26 Block Transfer 16 0~65535 0

10-26
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
09-27
~ Reserved
09-29
Communication Decoding 0: Decoding Method 1
09-30 1
Method 1: Decoding Methond 2
Internal Communication
09-31 0: Modbus 485 0
Protocol
09-32
~ Reserved
09-34
09-35 PLC Address 1~254 2
0: Disable
09-36 CANopen Slave Address 0
1~127
0: 1M
1: 500k
2: 250k
09-37 CANopen Speed 0
3: 125k
4: 100k (Delta only)
5: 50k
09-38 CANopen Frequency Gain 0.00 ~ 2.00 1.00
bit 0: CANopen Guarding Time out
bit 1: CANopen Heartbeat Time out
bit 2: CANopen SYNC Time out
09-39 CANopen Warning Record bit 3: CANopen SDO Time out 0
bit 4: CANopen SDO buffer overflow
bit 5: Can Bus Off
bit 6: Error protocol of CANopen
CANopen Decoding 0: Delta defined decoding method
09-40 1
Method 1: CANopen DS402 Standard
0: Node Reset State
1: Com Reset State
CANopen Communication 2: Boot up State Read
09-41
Status 3: Pre Operation State Only
4: Operation State
5: Stop State
0: Not ready for use state
1: Inhibit start state
2: Ready to switch on state
3: Switched on state Read
09-42 CANopen Control Status
4: Enable operation state Only
7: Quick Stop Active state
13: Err Reaction Activation state
14: Error state
bit0: reset address 20XX to 0.
bit1: reset address 264X to 0
09-43 Reset CANopen Index 65535
bit2: reset address 26AX to 0
bit3: reset address 60XX to 0
Read
09-44 CAN error state 0~65535
only

10-27
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters


NOTE IM: Induction Motor; PM: Permanent Magnet Motor
Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
10-00 Reserved
10-01 Encoder Pulse 1~20000 600
0: Disable
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase
B leads in a reverse run command
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase
Encoder Input Type A leads in a reverse run command
Setting 3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction
10-02 0
input. (low input=reverse direction, high input=forward
(MI7=A, MI8=B)
direction)
4: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction
input. (low input=forward direction, high input=reverse
direction)
5: Single-phase input
10-03 Reserved
Electrical Gear at Load
10-04 1~65535 100
Side A1
Electrical Gear at Motor
10-05 1~65535 100
Side B1
Electrical Gear at Load
10-06 1~65535 100
Side A2
Electrical Gear at Motor
10-07 1~65535 100
Side B2
0: Warn and keep operation
Treatment for Encoder
10-08 1: Warn and ramp to stop 2
Feedback Fault
2: Warn and coast to stop
Detection Time of Encoder 0.0~10.0sec
10-09 1.0
Feedback Fault 0: No function
0~120%
10-10 Encoder Stall Level 115
0: No function
Detection Time of Encoder
10-11 0.0 ~ 2.0sec 0.1
Stall
0: Warn and keep operation
Treatment for Encoder
10-12 1: Warn and ramp to stop 2
Stall
2: Warn and coast to stop
10-13 Encoder Slip Range 0~50% (0: disable) 50
Detection Time of Encoder
10-14 0.0~10.0sec 0.5
Slip
0: Warn and keep operation
Treatment for Encoder
10-15 1: Warn and ramp to stop 2
Stall and Slip Error
2: Warn and coast to stop
10-16
~ Reserved
10-23
FOC&TQC Function
10-24 0~65535 0
Control
FOC Bandwidth of
10-25 20.0~100.0Hz 40.0
Speed Observer
FOC Minimum Stator
10-26 0.0~10.0%fN 2.0
Frequency
FOC Low-pass Filter Time
10-27 1~1000ms 50
Constant
FOC Excitation Current
10-28 33~100%Tr 100
Rise Time
Top Limit of Frequency
10-29 0.00~100.00Hz 20.00
Deviation

10-28
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
10-30 Reserved
10-31 Obeserver Gain 0~65535 600
PM Sensorless Obeserver
10-32 Bandwith for High Speed 0.00~600.00Hz 4.00
Zone
PM Sensorless Obeserver
10-33 Bandwith for Low Speed 0.00~600.00Hz 0.50
Zone
PM Sensorless Observer
10-34 0.00~655.35 1.00
Low-pass Filter Gain
Speed bandwidth
10-35 0.00~655.35Hz 10.00
switching
High/Low speed OBS
10-36 0.00~655.35Hz 2.00
bandwidth
PM Sensorless Control
10-37 0000h~FFFFh 0000
Word
Required Time for PM
10-38 Sensorless d-axis Current 0.0~6553.5 sec 1.0
Command Return to 0
PM Sensorless Frequency
10-39 Level to switch from V/F 0.00~600.00Hz 20.00
Mode to Detection Mode
PM Sensorless Frequency
Level to switch from
10-40 0.00~600.00Hz 20.00
Detection Mode to V/F
Mode
I/F mode, low pass-filter
10-41 0.0~6.0sec 0.2
time
Initial Angle Detection
10-42 0~10ms 0
Time

10-29
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

11 Advanced Parameters
NOTE IM: Induction Motor; PM: Permanent Magnet Motor
Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
bit 0: Auto tuning for ASR and APR
bit 1: Inertia estimate (only for FOCPG mode)
11-00 System Control bit 2: Zero servo 0
bit 3: Dead Time compensation closed
Bit 7: Selection to save or not save the freqeuncy
Per Unit of System
11-01 1~65535(256=1PU) 400
Inertia
ASR1/ASR2 Switch
11-02 5.00~600.00Hz (0: Disable) 7.00
Frequency
ASR1 Low-speed
11-03 1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM) 10
Bandwidth
ASR2 High-speed
11-04 1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM) 10
Bandwidth
11-05 Zero-speed Bandwidth 1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM) 10
11-06 ASR Control ( P) 1 0~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM) 10
11-07 ASR Control (I) 1 0.000~10.000 sec 0.100
11-08 ASR Control ( P) 2 0~40Hz (IM)/ 0~100Hz (PM) 10
11-09 ASR Control (I) 2 0.000~10.000 sec 0.100
11-10 P Gain of Zero Speed 0~40Hz (IM)/ 0~100Hz (PM) 10
11-11 I Gain of Zero Speed 0.000~10.000 sec 0.100
Gain for ASR Speed
11-12 0~100% 0
Feed Forward
11-13 PDFF Gain 0~200% 30
Low-pass Filter Time of
11-14 0.000~0.350 sec 0.008
ASR Output
11-15 Notch Filter Depth 0~20db 0
11-16 Notch Filter Frequency 0.00~200.00Hz 0.00
Forward Motor Torque
11-17 0~500% 500
Limit
Forward Regenerative
11-18 0~500% 500
Torque Limit
Reverse Motor Torque
11-19 0~500% 500
Limit
Reverse Regenerative
11-20 0~500% 500
Torque Limit
Gain Value of Flux
11-21 Weakening Curve for 0~200% 90
Motor 1
Gain Value of Flux
11-22 Weakening Curve for 0~200% 90
Motor 2
Speed Response of Flux
11-23 0~150% 65
Weakening Area
11-24
~ Reserved
11-26
11-27 Max. Torque Command 0~500% 100
0: No function
1: Analog signal input (Pr.03-00)
11-28 Source of Torque Offset 0
2: RS485 communication (Pr.11-29)
3: Control by external terminal (Pr.11-30~11-32)

10-30
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 10 Summary of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory
Parameter Explanation Settings
Setting
11-29 Torque Offset Setting 0~100% 0.0
11-30 High Torque Offset 0~100% 30.0
11-31 Middle Torque Offset 0~100% 20.0
11-32 Low Torque Offset 0~100% 10.0
0: Digital keypad
Source of Torque 1: RS-485 communication (Pr.11-34)
11-33 0
Command 2: Analog input (Pr.03-00)
3: CANopen
11-34 Torque Command -100.0~+100.0% (Pr.11-27=100%) 0.0
Filter Time of Torque
11-35 0.000~1.000sec 0.000
Command
0: Set by Pr.11-37 (Forward speed limit) and Pr.11-38
(Reverse speed limit)
1: Set by Pr.11-37,11-38 and Pr.00-20 (Source of
11-36 Speed Limit Selection 0
Master Frequency Command)
2: Set by Pr.00-20 (Source of Master Frequency
Command).
11-37 Forward Speed Limit 0~120% 10
(torque mode)
11-38 Reverse Speed Limit 0~120% 10
(torque mode)
Zero Torque Command 0: Torque mode
11-39 0
Mode 1: Speed mode

10-31
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings

00 Drive Parameters This parameter can be set during operation.

Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive


Factory Setting: #.#
Settings Read Only
Display AC Motor Drive Rated Current
Factory Setting: #.#
Settings Read Only
Pr. 00-00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive. Using the following table to check if
Pr.00-01 setting is the rated current of the AC motor drive. Pr.00-01 corresponds to the identity
code Pr.00-01.
The factory setting is the rated current for normal duty. Please set Pr.00-16 to 1 to display the rated
current for the heavy duty.
230V Series
Frame A0
kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7
HP 0.5 1 2 3 5
Pr.00-00 2 4 6 8 10
Rated Current for Heavy Duty (A) 2.8 4.8 7.1 10 16
Rated Current for Normal Duty (A) 3 5 8 11 17

460V Series
Frame A0 A
kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5
HP 0.5 1 2 3 5 5.5 7.5 10
Pr.00-00 3 5 7 9 11 93 13 15
Rated Current for Heavy Duty (A) 1.5 2.9 3.8 5.7 8.1 9.5 11 17
Rated Current for Normal Duty (A) 1.6 3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 10.5 12 18

Parameter Reset
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: No Function
1: Write protection for parameters
5: Reset KWH display to 0
6: Reset PLC
7: Reset CANopen Index (Slave)
8: keypad lock
9: All parameters are reset to factory settings(base frequency is 50Hz)
10: All parameters are reset to factory settings (base frequency is 60Hz)
When it is set to 1, all parameters are read only except Pr.00-02~00-08 and it can be used with
password setting for password protection. It needs to set Pr.00-02 to 0 before changing other
parameter settings.
When it is set to 9 or 10: all parameters are reset to factory settings. If password is set in Pr.00-08,

11-1
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

input the password set in Pr.00-07 to reset to factory settings.


When it is set to 5, KWH display value can be reset to 0 even when the drive is operating. Pr.
05-26, 05-27, 05-28, 05-29, 05-30 reset to 0.
When it is set to 6: clear internal PLC program
When it is set to 7: reset the related settings of CANopen slave.

Start-up Display Selection


Factory setting: 0
Settings 0: Display the frequency command (F)
1: Display the actual output frequency (H)
2: Display User define (U)
3: Output current ( A)
This parameter determines the start-up display page after power is applied to the drive. User
defined choice display according to the setting in Pr.00-04.

Content of Multi-function Display


Factory setting: 3
Settings 0: Display output current (A)
1: Display counter value (c)
2: Display actual output frequency (H.)
3: Display DC-BUS voltage (v)
4: Display output voltage (E)
5: Display output power angle (n)
6: Display output power in kW (P)
7: Display actual motor speed rpm (r = 00: positive speed; -00 negative
speed)
8: Display estimate output torque % (t = 00: positive torque; -00 negative
torque) (t) (refer to Note 4)
9: Reserved
10: Display PID feedback in % (b)
11: Display AVI in % (1.), 0~10V/4-20mA/0-20mA corresponds to 0~100%
(Refer to Note 1)
12: Display ACI in % (2.), 4~20mA/0~10V/0-20mA corresponds to
0~100%(Refer to Note 1)
13: Display AUI in % (3.), -10V~10V corresponds to -100~100%(Refer to
Note 2)
14: Display the temperature of IGBT in oC (i.)
15: Display the temperature of capacitance in oC (c.)
16: The status of digital input (ON/OFF) refer to Pr.02-12 (i) (Refer to Note
2)
17: Display digital output status ON/OFF (Pr.02-18) (o) (Refer to NOTE 3)
18: Display the multi-step speed that is executing (S)
19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (d) (refer to NOTE 2)

11-2
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

20: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output (0.) (refer to NOTE
3)
21~24: Reserved
25: Overload counting (0.00~100.00%) (o.) (Refer to Note 5)
26: GFF Ground Fault (Unit :%)(G.)
27: DC Bus voltage ripple (Unit: Vdc)(r.)
28: Display PLC register D1043 data (C) display in hexadecimal
29: Reserved
30 : Display output of user defined (U)
31 : H page x 00-05 Display user Gain(K)
32~34: Reserved
35: Control Mode display: 0= Speed control mode (SPD), 1= torque control
mode (TQR) (t.)
36: Present operating carrier frequency of drive (Hz) (J.)

NOTE
1. It can display negative values when setting analog input bias (Pr.03-03~03-10).
Example: assume that AVI input voltage is 0V, Pr.03-03 is 10.0% and Pr.03-07 is 4 (Serve bias as the
center).
2. Example: If REV, MI1 and MI6 are ON, the following table shows the status of the terminals.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Terminal MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 REV FWD
Status 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
If REV, MI1 and MI6 are ON, the value is 0000 0000 1000 0110 in binary and 0086h in HEX. When
Pr.00-04 is set to “16” or “19”, it will display “0086h” with LED U is ON on the keypad KPC-CE01. The
setting 16 is the status of digital input by Pr.02-12 setting and the setting 19 is the corresponding CPU
pin status of digital input, the FWD/REV action and the three-wire MI are not controlled by Pr.02-12.
User can set to 16 to monitor digital input status and then set to 19 to check if the wire is normal.
3. Assume that RY1: Pr.02-13 is set to 9 (Drive ready). After applying the power to the AC motor drive, if
there is no other abnormal status, the contact will be ON. The display status will be shown as follows.
N.O. switch status:
Terminal Reserved Reserved Reserved DFM2 DFM1 Reserved RY2 RY1
Status 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
At the meanwhile, if Pr.00-04 is set to 17 or 20, it will display in hexadecimal “0001h” with LED U is ON
on the keypad. The setting 17 is the status of digital output by Pr.02-18 setting and the setting 20 is the
corresponding CPU pin status of digital output. User can set 17 to monitor the digital output status and
then set to 20 to check if the wire is normal.
4. Setting 8: 100% means the motor rated torque. Motor rated torque = (motor rated power x60/2π)/motor
rated speed
5. If Pr.00-04 = 25, when display value reaches 100.00%, the drive will show “oL” as an overload warning.

Coefficient Gain in Actual Output Frequency


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~160.00
This parameter is to set coefficient gain in actual output frequency. Set Pr.00-04= 31 to display the
calculation result on the screen (calculation = output frequency * Pr.00-05).

11-3
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Software Version
Factory Setting: #.#
Settings Read only
Parameter Protection Password Input
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 1~9998, 10000~65535
Display 0~3 (the times of password attempts)
This parameter allows user to enter their password (which is set in Pr.00-08) to unlock the
parameter protection and to make changes to the parameter.
Pr.00-07 and Pr.00-08 are used to prevent the personal misoperation.
When the user have forgotten the password, clear the setting by input 9999 and press ENTER key,
then input 9999 again and press Enter within 10 seconds. After decoding, all the settings will
return to factory setting.
Parameter Protection Password Setting
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 1~9998, 10000~65535
0: No password protection / password is entered correctly (Pr00-07)
1: Password has been set
To set a password to protect your parameter settings.If the display shows 0, no password is set
nor password has been correctly entered in Pr.00-07. All parameters can then be changed,
including Pr.00-08. The first time you can set a password directly. After successful setting of
password the display will show 1. Be sure to write down the password for later use. To cancel the
parameter lock, set the parameter to 0 after inputting correct password into Pr. 00-07.
How to retrieve parameter protection after decoding by Pr.00-07:
Method 1: Re-enter the password to Pr.00-08 (input the password once).
Method 2: After reboots, password function will be recovered.
Method 3: Input any value into Pr.00-07 (Do not enter the password).
Password Decode Flow Chart
Pass word Setting Pass word Forgotten Pass word Incor rect
00-07 00-07
00-08

Displays 01 afte r Enter 9999 and press ENTER, 3 chan ces of p assword inpu t:
correct passwo rd is then ente r 9999 aga in withi n 10 Incorre ct p ass word 1: d isplays "01"
entered to Pr.00 -08. se cond s an d pre ss ENTER. Incorre ct p ass word 2: disp lays "02 "
Then all pa ra meters will re set Incorre ct p ass word 3: "Pcode "(blin king)
to factory se ttings.

Keyp ad will be locked after 3 wrong attemp ted


pas swords. To re-activate t he k eypa d, please
reboo t the drive an d in put t he correct
pas sword.

11-4
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Decode Flow Char t

00-08
Password Set

00-07
Password Input

Yes Shut down th drive


Pr.00-08=0 and re-app ly power

No
Re-apply po we r.
(The p assword is still valid)

Reserved

Control Mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Speed mode
1: Reserved
2: Torque mode
This parameter determines the control mode of C200 series AC motor drive.

Control of Speed Mode


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: VF (IM V/f control)
1: VFPG (IM V/f control+ Encoder)
2: SVC(IM sensorless vector control)
3: FOCPG (IM FOC vector control+ encoder)
4~5: Reserved
6 : PM Sensorless (PM field oriented sensorless vector control)
This parameter determines the control method of the AC motor drive:
0: (IM V/f control): user can design proportion of V/f as required and can control multiple motors
simultaneously.
1: (IM V/f control + Encoder): user can use optional PG card with encoder for the closed-loop
speed control.
2: (IM Sensorless vector control): get the optimal control by the auto-tuning of motor
parameters.
3: (IM FOC vector control+ encoder): besides torque increases, the speed control will be more
accurate (1:1000).
6: PM Sensorless (PM field oriented sensorless vector control)

11-5
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

When setting Pr.00-11 to 0, the V/F control diagram is shown as follows.


Fcmd
Pr00-20
accel/decel time
DC BUS
Voltage DC BUS Voltage Protection
Detect

Current Detection

V/F 2/3 AVR IGBT M


table e->s 07-23 PWM
Top Limit F:01-10 01-00
01-00,01-01 01-01
01-02,01-03 Lower Limit F:01-11
01-02
01-04,01-05 05-01
01-06,01-07 05-02
01-08 Vcmd Filter Torque 3/2 05-03
Time Compe nsate s->e
05-04
07-24 07-26

When setting Pr.00-11 to 1, the V/F control + encoder diagram is shown as follows.
Fcmd Frequ en cy Frequ en cy
Cu rren t
D etec t
00-20 Ina cc ura cy Ina ccura cy
V/F IGBT M
table PWM
Vol tage Compe nsate
Vol tage
Co mm an d +
X
+
Vol tage Powe r
Filter cmd Slip Factor EN
com p. Irm s
Fcmd Time
07-24 07-26

Filter Time Real Speed Real Speed

When setting Pr.00-11 to 2, the sensorless vector control diagram is shown as follows.
DC BUS
Voltage DC BUS Voltage
D etection Protection

Current
Fcm d Detection
Pr00-20
V/F 2/ 3 AV R I GBT
t able e-> s 07-23
M
PWM

01-00,01-01 Top limit F: 01-10 01-00


Accel/decel
time 01-02,01-03 Low er lim it F: 01-11 01-01
01-04,01-05 01-02
01-06,01-07 05-01
01-08 05-02
Filt er 3/ 2 05-03
Slip
Time Com pensate s -> e 05-04
Fc m d
07-25 07-27

11-6
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

When setting Pr.00-11 to 3, the FOCPG control diagram is shown as follows.

When setting Pr.00-11 to 6, PM FOC sensorless control diagram is shown as follows:


10- 39
07-01
Id command
AMR
ACRd dq2abc
Id feedback

Wr_cmd Iq command
Wr_est ACRq
10-35 θ_est
11-01~11-05
10-31~10-33
10-36
Iq feedback
dq2abc

10-34

Reserved

Control of Torque Mode


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: TQCPG(IM Torque control + Encoder)
1~2: Reserved
TQCPG control diagram is shown in the following:

11-7
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

no offset
by P r.03- 00
by P r.11- 29
by multi -function input
+
Tor que command +
11- 34
06-12 11-35
11- 36 or 00- 20
Speed li mit or command
s peed/torque
+
-
ASR mode switc h
11-00 B it 0=0 T orque l imit 11-14
11-06~11- 11 11- 17~ 11- 20
11-00 B it 0=1
11-03~11- 05
flux weakening curve
11-21/11-22 lq
command

Curr en t IGBT
M En cod er
con tro l &
ld command 10-00
PWM Motor 1 Motor1
~
01- 01 0 1-3 5
0 1-3 6
10-02
01- 02
05- 01 0 5-1 3
~ ~
Curre nt 05- 09 0 5-2 1
me asu re C urrent feedback
actual fr equency

Reserved
Reserved

Load Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Normal load
1: Heavy load
Normal duty: over load, rated output current 160% in 3 second. Please refer to Pr.00-17 for the
setting of carrier wave. Refer to chapter specifications or Pr.00-01 for the rated current.
Heavy duty: over load, rated output current 180% in 3 second. Please refer to Pr.00-17 for the
setting of carrier wave. Refer to chapter specifications or Pr.00-01 for the rated current.

Carrier Frequency
Factory setting: Table below
Settings 2~15kHz
This parameter determinates the PWM carrier frequency of the AC motor drive.
230V Series 460V Series
Models 1-Phase 0.4-2.2kW 3-Phase 0.4-3.7 kW 3-Phase 0.75-7.5kW
Setting Range 02~15kHz 02~15kHz
Normal Duty Factory Setting 8kHz 8kHz
Heavy Duty Factory Setting 2kHz 2kHz

11-8
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Electromagnetic Heat Current


Carrier Acoustic Noise or Leakage Dissipation
Frequency Noise Wave
Current
1kH z Significant M inimal Minimal
8kH z
15kHz
M inimal Significant Significant

From the table, we see that the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the
electromagnetic noise, AC motor drive heat dissipation, and motor acoustic noise. Therefore, if the
surrounding noise is greater than the motor noise, lower the carrier frequency is good to reduce the
temperature rise. Although it is quiet operation in the higher carrier frequency, the entire wiring and
interference resistance should be considerate.
When the carrier frequency is higher than the factory setting, it needs to protect by decreasing the
carrier frequency. See Pr.06-55 for the related setting and details.

Single or Three-phase setting


Factory Setting: Read Only
Settings 0: 3-phase
1: 1-phase
When Pr.00-00=2, 00-18=0 : 230V, 0.4kW, 3-Phase
Pr.00-00=2, 00-18=1 : 230V, 0.4kW, 1-Phase
Pr.00-00=4, 00-18=0 : 230V, 0.75kW, 3-Phase
Pr.00-00=4, 00-18=1 : 230V, 0.75kW, 1-Phase
Pr.00-00=5, 00-18=0 : 460V, 0.75kW
Pr.00-00=6, 00-18=0 : 230V, 1.5kW, 3-Phase
Pr.00-00=6, 00-18=1 : 230V, 1.5kW, 1-Phase
Pr.00-00=7, 00-18=0 : 460V, 1.5kW
Pr.00-00=8, 00-18=0 : 230V, 2.2kW, 3-Phase
Pr.00-00=8, 00-18=1 : 230V, 2.2kW, 1-Phase
Pr.00-00=9, 00-18=0 : 460V, 2.2kW
Pr.00-00=10, 00-18=0 : 230V, 3.7kW, 3-Phase
Pr.00-00=11, 00-18=0 : 460V, 3.7kW
Pr.00-00=13, 00-18=0 : 230V, 5.5kW
Pr.00-00=15, 00-18=0 : 460V, 7.5kW
Pr.00-00=93, 00-18=0 : 460V, 4.0kW

PLC Command Mask


Factory Setting: Read Only
Settings Bit 0: Control command by PLC force control
Bit 1: Frequency command by PLC force control
This parameter determines if frequency command or control command is occupied by PLC

11-9
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Source of the Master Frequency Command(AUTO)


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Digital keypad
1: RS-485 serial communication
2: External analog input (Pr.03-00)
3: External UP/DOWN terminal
4~5: Reserved
6: CANopen communication card
7: Digital keypad potentiometer
It is used to set the source of the master frequency in AUTO mode.
Pr.00-20 and 00-21 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in AUTO mode.
Pr.00-30 and 00-31 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in HAND mode.
The AUTO/HAND mode can be switched by the keypad KPC-CC01 or multi-function input terminal
(MI).
The factory setting of frequency source or operation source is for AUTO mode. It will return to
AUTO mode whenever power on again after power off. If there is multi-function input terminal used
to switch AUTO/HAND mode. The highest priority is the mutli-function input terminal. When the
external terminal is OFF, the drive won’t receive any operation signal and can’t execute JOG.

Source of the Operation Command (AUTO)


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Digital keypad
1: External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled.
2: RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP disabled.
3: CANopen communication
It is used to set the source of the operation frequency in AUTO mode.
When the operation command is controlled by the keypad KPC-CC01, keys RUN, STOP and JOG
(F1) are valid.

Stop Method
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Ramp to stop
1: Coast to stop
The parameter determines how the motor is stopped when the AC motor drive receives a valid stop
command.

11-10
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Freq uen cy Freq uen cy


Output Ou tp ut
Frequenc y Freq uenc y
Moto r Moto r
Ro tatio n Ro tatio n
Spe ed Spe ed

Free running
Time to stop
Time
Oper atio n Stops acc ording t o
deceler ation time Oper atio n
Co mmand RUN STOP Co mmand RUN STOP

Ra mp to Stop and Co ast to Sto p


Ramp to stop: the AC motor drive decelerates from the setting of deceleration time to 0 or
minimum output frequency (Pr. 01-09) and then stop (by Pr.01-07).
Coast to stop: the AC motor drive stops the output instantly upon a STOP command and the
motor free runs until it comes to a complete standstill.
(1) It is recommended to use “ramp to stop” for safety of personnel or to prevent material from
being wasted in applications where the motor has to stop after the drive is stopped. The
deceleration time has to be set accordingly.
(2) If the motor free running is allowed or the load inertia is large, it is recommended to select
“coast to stop”. For example, blowers, punching machines and pumps
The stop method of the torque control is also set by Pr.00-22.

Control of Motor Direction


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Enable forward/ reverse
1: Disable reverse
2: Disable forward
This parameter enables the AC motor drives to run in the forward/reverse Direction. It may be
used to prevent a motor from running in a direction that would consequently injure the user or
damage the equipment.

Memory of Frequency Command


Factory Setting: Read Only
Settings Read only
If keypad is the source of frequency command, when Lv or Fault occurs the present frequency
command will be saved in this parameter.

User Defined Characteristics


Factory Setting: 0
Settings Bit 0~3: user define on decimal place
0000b: no decimal place
0001b: one decimal place
0010b: two decimal place
0011b: three decimal place

11-11
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Bit 4~15: user define on unit


000xh: Hz
001xh: rpm
002xh: %
003xh: kg
Bit 0~3: F & H page unit and Pr.00-26 decimal display is supported up to 3 decimal places.
Bit 4~15: F & H page unit and Pr.00-26 unit display is supported up to 4 types of unit display.

Max. User Defined Value


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
0~65535 (when Pr.00-25 set to no decimal place)
0.0~6553.5 (when Pr.00-25 set to 1 decimal place)
0.0~655.35 (when Pr.00-25 set to 2 decimal place)
0.0~65.535 (when Pr.00-25 set to 3 decimal place)
User define is enabled when Pr.00-26 is not 0. The setting of Pr.00-26 corresponds to Pr.01.00
(Max. output frequency of the drive).
Example: User define: 100.0%, Pr.01-00 = 60.00Hz
Pr.00-25 setting is 0021h; Pr.00-26 setting is 100.0%

NOTE
The drive will display as Pr.00-25 setting when Pr.00-25 is properly set and Pr.00-26 is not 0.

User Defined Value


Factory Setting: Read only
Settings Read only
Pr.00-27 will show user defined value when Pr.00-26 is not set to 0.
User defined function is valid when Pr.00-20 is set to digital keypad control or RS-285
communication input control.

Reserved

LOCAL/REMOTE Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Standard HOA function
1: Switching Local/Remote, the drive stops
2: Switching Local/Remote, the drive runs as the REMOTE setting for
frequency and operation status
3: Switching Local/Remote, the drive runs as the LOCAL setting for frequency
and operation status
4: Switching Local/Remote, the drive runs as LOCAL setting when switch to
Local and runs as REMOTE setting when switch to Remote for frequency
and operation status.
The factory setting of Pr.00-29 is 0 (standard Hand-Off-Auto function). The AUTO frequency and
source of operation can be set by Pr.00-20 and Pr.00-21, and the HAND frequency and source of
operation can be set by Pr.00-30 and Pr.00-31. AUTO/HAND mode can be selected or switched by
using digital keypad (KPC-CC01) or setting multi-function input terminal MI= 41, 42.

11-12
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

When external terminal MI is set to 41 and 42 (AUTO/HAND mode), the settings Pr.00-29=1, 2, 3,
4 will be disabled. The external terminal has the highest priority among all command, Pr.00-29 will
always function as Pr.00-29=0, standard HOA mode.
When Pr.00-29 is not set to 0, Local/Remote function is enabled, the top right corner of digital
keypad (KPC-CC01) will display “LOC” or “REM” (the display is available when KPC-CC01 is
installed with firmware version higher than version 1.021). The LOCAL frequency and source of
operation can be set by Pr.00-20 and Pr.00-21, and the REMOTE frequency and source of
operation can be set by Pr.00-30 and Pr.00-31. Local/Remote function can be selected or switched
by using digital keypad(KPC-CC01) or setting external terminal MI=56. The AUTO key of the digital
keypad now controls for the REMOTE function and HAND key now controls for the LOCAL
function.
When MI is set to 56 for LOC/REM selection, if Pr.00-29 is set to 0, then the external terminal is
disabled.
When MI is set to 56 for LOC/REM selection, if Pr.00-29 is not set to 0, the external terminal has
the highest priority of command and the ATUO/HAND keys will be disabled.

Source of the Master Frequency Command(HAND)


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Digital keypad
1: RS-485 serial communication
2: External analog input (Pr.03-00)
3: External UP/DOWN terminal
4~5: Reserved
5: Pulse input with direction command (Pr.10-16)
6: CANopen communication
7: Digital keypad potentiometer
It is used to set the source of the master frequency in HAND mode.

Source of the Operation Command (HAND)


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Digital keypad
1: External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled.
2: RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP disabled.
3: CANopen communication
It is used to set the source of the operation frequency in HAND mode.
Pr.00-20 and 00-21 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in AUTO mode.
Pr.00-30 and 00-31 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in HAND mode.
The AUTO/HAND mode can be switched by the keypad KPC-CC01 or multi-function input terminal
(MI).
The factory setting of frequency source or operation source is for AUTO mode. It will return to
AUTO mode whenever power on again after power off. If there is multi-function input terminal used
to switch AUTO/HAND mode. The highest priority is the multi-function input terminal. When the

11-13
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

external terminal is OFF, the drive won’t receive any operation signal and can’t execute JOG.

Digital Keypad STOP Function


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: STOP key disable
1: STOP key enable

~ Reserved

Display Filter Time (Current)


Factory Settings: 0.100
Settings: 0.001~65.535 sec
Set this parameter to minimize the current fluctuation displayed by digital keypad.

Display Filter Time (Keypad)


Factory Settings: 0.100
Settings: 0.001~65.535 sec
Set this parameter to minimize the display value fluctuation displayed by digital keypad.

Software Version (date)


Factory Settings: ####
Settings: Read only
This parameter displays the drive’s software version by date.

11-14
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Group 1 Basic Parameters This parameter can be set during operation.

Maximum Output Frequency


Factory Setting: 60.00/50.00
Settings 50.00~600.00Hz
This parameter determines the AC motor drive’s Maximum Output Frequency. All the AC motor
drive frequency command sources (analog inputs 0 to +10V, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 20mAand ±10V) are
scaled to correspond to the output frequency range.

Output Frequency of Motor 1(base frequency and motor rated frequency)


Output Frequency of Motor 2(base frequency and motor rated frequency)
Factory Setting: 60.00/50.00
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the motor
nameplate. If the motor is 60Hz, the setting should be 60Hz. If the motor is 50Hz, it should be set
to 50Hz.
Pr.01-35 is used for the application occasion that uses double base motor.

Output Voltage of Motor 1(base frequency and motor rated frequency)


Output Voltage of Motor 2(base frequency and motor rated frequency)
Factory Setting: 200.0/400.0
Settings 230V series: 0.0~255.0V
460V series: 0.0~510.0V
This value should be set according to the rated voltage of the motor as indicated on the motor
nameplate. If the motor is 220V, the setting should be 220.0. If the motor is 200V, it should be set to
200.0.
There are many motor types in the market and the power system for each country is also difference.
The economic and convenience method to solve this problem is to install the AC motor drive. There
is no problem to use with the different voltage and frequency and also can amplify the original
characteristic and life of the motor.

Mid-point Frequency 1 of Motor 1


Factory Setting: 3.00
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
Mid-point Voltage 1 of Motor 1
Factory Setting: 11.0/22.0
Settings 230V series: 0.0~240.0V
460V series: 0.0~480.0V

Mid-point Frequency 1 of Motor 2


Factory Setting: 3.00
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz

11-15
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Mid-point Voltage 1 of Motor 2


Factory Setting: 11.0/22.0
Settings 230V series: 0.0~240.0V
460V series: 0.0~480.0V

Mid-point Frequency 2 of Motor 1


Factory Setting: 0.50
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
Mid-point Voltage 2 of Motor 1
Factory Setting: 2.0/4.0
Settings 230V series: 0.0~240.0V
460V series: 0.0~480.0V

Mid-point Frequency 2 of Motor 2


Factory Setting: 0.50
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
Mid-point Voltage 2 of Motor 2
Factory Setting: 2.0/4.0
Settings 230V series: 0.0~240.0V
460V series: 0.0~480.0V

Min. Output Frequency of Motor 1


Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
Min. Output Voltage of Motor 1
Factory Setting: 0.0/0.0
Settings 230V series: 0.0~240.0V
460V series: 0.0~480.0V

Min. Output Frequency of Motor 2


Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
Min. Output Voltage of Motor 2
Factory Setting: 0.0/0.0
Settings 230V series: 0.0~240.0V
460V series: 0.0~480.0V
V/f curve setting is usually set by the motor’s allowable loading characteristics. Pay special
attention to the motor’s heat dissipation, dynamic balance, and bearing lubricity, if the loading
characteristics exceed the loading limit of the motor.
There is no limit for the voltage setting, but a high voltage at low frequency may cause motor
damage, overheat, and stall prevention or over-current protection. Therefore, please use the low

11-16
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

voltage at the low frequency to prevent motor damage.


Pr.01-35 to Pr.01-42 is the V/f curve for the motor 2. When multi-function input terminals
Pr.02-01~02-08 and Pr.02-26 ~Pr.02-31 are set to 14 and enabled, the AC motor drive will act as
the 2nd V/f curve.
The V/f curve for the motor 1 is shown as follows. The V/f curve for the motor 2 can be deduced
from it.
Vol tage
1s t Output Output F requency
Voltage Set ting 01-11 Output Frequency Lower Limit 01-10Upper Limi t
01-02 F requenc y out put
2nd Output
ranges limit ation
Voltage Setting
01-04 R egul ar V /f Cur ve
3r d Output
Voltage Setting Special V/f C urve
01-06

4th Output
Voltage Setting
F requenc y
01-08 01-07 01-09 01-05 01-03 01-01 01-00
4t h F req. Start Freq. 2nd F req.1st F req. Maximum Output
3rd Fr eq. F requenc y

V/f Curve
Common settings of V/f curve:
(1) General purpose
Motor s pec. 6 0Hz Motor s pec. 5 0Hz

V V
220 Pr. Settin g 220 Pr. Settin g
01-00 60.0 01-00 50.0
01-01 60.0 01-01 50.0
01-02 220 .0 01-02 220 .0
01-03 01-03
1.50 1.30
01-05 01-05
01-04 01-04
10 10.0 10 12.0
01-06 01-06
F F
1.5 60.0 01-07 1.50 1.3 50.0 01-07 1.30
01-08 10.0 01-08 12.0

(2) Fan and hydraulic machinery


Motor spec. 60Hz Motor s pec. 5 0Hz

V Pr. Settin g V Pr. Setting


220 220
01-00 60.0 01-00 50.0
01-01 60.0 01-01 50.0
01-02 220.0 01-02 220 .0
01-03 01-03
30.0 25.0
01-05 01-05
50 01-04 50 01-04
50.0 50.0
10 01-06 10 01-06
F 01-07 1.50 F 01-07 1.30
1.5 30 60.0 1.3 25 50.0
01-08 10.0 01-08 10.0

11-17
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

(3) High starting torque


Motor s pec. 6 0Hz Motor s pec. 5 0Hz

V Pr. Settin g V Pr. Settin g


220 01-00 60.0 220 01-00 50.0
01-01 60.0 01-01 50.0
01-02 220 .0 01-02 220 .0
01-03 01-03
3.00 2.20
01-05 01-05
23 23
01-04 01-04
23.0 23.0
01-06 14 01-06
18
F 01-07 1.50 F 01-07 1.30
1.5 3 60.0 01-08 18.0 1.3 2.2 50.0 01-08 14.0

Start-Up Frequency
Factory Setting: 0.50
Settings 0.0~600.00Hz
When start frequency is higher than the min. output frequency, drives’ output will be from start
frequency to the setting frequency. Please refer to the following diagram for details.
Fcmd=frequency command,
Fstart=start frequency (Pr.01-09),
fstart=actual start frequency of drive,
Fmin=4th output frequency setting (Pr.01-07/Pr.01-41),
Flow=output frequency lower limit (Pr.01-11)

NO
F cmd>Fmi n by Pr.01- 34

Y ES

NO YES
F star t>Fmin fstart=F min F low= 0 H=Fc md
Hz
F cmd
Y ES
F min
fstart=F star t
F star t
Time
operation after NO
start-up NO
F low= 0 F cmd>Fl ow

NO

Y ES by
YES F cmd<Fmi n Pr.01- 34
by NO
F cmd>Fmi n
Pr.01- 34
NO
Y ES H=Fl ow
Y ES
H=Fc md
H =Fc md Hz
Hz Hz
60H z
60Hz H=Fl ow
H=Fc md1 F low F low> Fcmd1
F cmd
F cmd1 F cmd1>Flow & F cmd1 >F min
F star t F min F cmd1>Fmin F min
F min F cmd2 F cmd2
Time F low Time
Time by Pr.01- 34
by Pr.01- 34 F min>Fc md2
F cmd2>Flow &
F cmd2<Fmin

11-18
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Output Frequency Upper Limit


Factory Setting: 600.00
Settings 0.0~600.00Hz
Output Frequency Lower Limit
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.0~600.00Hz
The upper/lower output frequency setting is used to limit the actual output frequency. If the
frequency setting is higher than the upper limit, it will run with the upper limit frequency. If output
frequency lower than output frequency lower limit and frequency setting is higher than min.
frequency, it will run with lower limit frequency. The upper limit frequency should be set to be higher
than the lower limit frequency.
Pr.01-10 setting must be ≥ Pr.01-11 setting. Pr.01-00 setting is regarded as 100.0%.
Output frequency upper limit = (Pr.01-00 × Pr.01-10) /100
This setting will limit the max. Output frequency of drive. If frequency setting is higher than Pr.01-10,
the output frequency will be limited by Pr.01-10 setting.
When the drive starts the function of slip compensation (Pr.07-27) or PID feedback control, drive
output frequency may exceed frequency command but still be limited by this setting.
Related parameters: Pr.01-00 Max. Operation Frequency and Pr.01-11 Output Frequency Lower
Limit
Voltage

0 1.02
Motor r ated voltage
(V bas e)

0 1.04
Mid-point voltage
(V mid)

0 1.06 F requenc y
Min. output voltage 01.0 5 01.0 3 0 1.01 0 1.00
setting (V min) Min. output Mid-point Motor r ated Max. oper ation
frequency frequency frequency frequency
(F min) (F mid) (F base)

This setting will limit the min. output frequency of drive. When drive frequency command or
feedback control frequency is lower than this setting, drive output frequency will limit by the lower
limit of frequency.
When the drive starts, it will operate from min. output frequency (Pr.01-05) and accelerate to the
setting frequency. It won’t limit by this parameter setting.
The setting of output frequency upper/lower limit is used to prevent personal disoperation, overheat
due to too low operation frequency or damage due to too high speed.
If the output frequency upper limit setting is 50Hz and frequency setting is 60Hz, max. output
frequency will be 50Hz.
If the output frequency lower limit setting is 10Hz and min. operation frequency setting (Pr.01-05) is
1.5Hz, it will operate by 10Hz when the frequency command is greater than Pr.01-05 and less than
10Hz. If the frequency command is less than Pr.01-05, the drive will be in ready status and no
output.

11-19
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

If the frequency output upper limit is 60Hz and frequency setting is also 60Hz, it won’t exceed 60Hz
even after slip compensation. If the output frequency needs to exceed 60Hz, it can increase output
frequency upper limit or max. operation frequency.

Accel. Time 1
Decel. Time 1
Accel. Time 2
Decel. Time 2
Accel. Time 3
Decel. Time 3
Accel. Time 4
Decel. Time 4
JOG Acceleration Time
JOG Deceleration Time
Factory Setting: 10.00/10.0
Settings Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 seconds
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.00 seconds
The Acceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp from
0Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00).
The Deceleration Time is used to determine the time require for the AC motor drive to decelerate
from the Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) down to 0Hz.
The Acceleration/Deceleration Time is invalid when using Pr.01-44 Optimal
Acceleration/Deceleration Setting.
The Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1, 2, 3, 4 are selected according to the Multi-function Input
Terminals settings. The factory settings are Accel./Decel. time 1.
When enabling torque limits and stalls prevention function, actual accel./decel. time will be longer
than the above action time.
Please note that it may trigger the protection function (Pr.06-03 Over-current Stall Prevention
during Acceleration or Pr.06-01 Over-voltage Stall Prevention) when the setting of accel./decel.
time is too short.
Please note that it may cause motor damage or drive protection enabled due to over current during
acceleration when the setting of acceleration time is too short.
Please note that it may cause motor damage or drive protection enabled due to over current during
deceleration or over-voltage when the setting of deceleration time is too short.
It can use suitable brake resistor (see Chapter 07 Accessories) to decelerate in a short time and
prevent over-voltage.
When enabling Pr.01-24~Pr.01-27, the actual accel./decel. time will be longer than the setting.

11-20
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Frequency

01-00
M ax. O utput
Frequency
Frequency
Setting

Time
accel. time decel. time
01-12,14,16,18,20 01-13,15,17,19,21
Accel./Decel. Time

JOG Frequency
Factory Setting: 6.00
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
Both external terminal JOG and key “F1” on the keypad KPC-CC01 can be used. When the jog
command is ON, the AC motor drive will accelerate from 0Hz to jog frequency (Pr.01-22). When the
jog command is OFF, the AC motor drive will decelerate from Jog Frequency to zero. The Jog
Accel./Decel. time (Pr.01-20, Pr.01-21) is the time that accelerates from 0.0Hz to Pr.01-22 JOG
Frequency.
The JOG command can’t be executed when the AC motor drive is running. In the same way, when
the JOG command is executing, other operation commands are invalid except forward/reverse
commands and STOP key on the digital keypad.
It does not support JOG function in the optional keypad KPC-CE01.

1st/4th Accel./decel. Frequency


Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
The transition from acceleration/deceleration time 1 to acceleration/deceleration time 4, may also
be enabled by the external terminals. The external terminal has priority over Pr. 01-23.
F reque nc y

1st Acceler ati on 4th Dec ele ration


Time T ime
01-23

4th A cceleratio n 1s t Dec eleratio n


Time T ime Ti me

1st/4th A cceleratio n/Dec eleration F requenc y S witch i ng

S-curve Acceleration Begin Time 1


S-curve Acceleration Arrival Time 2
S-curve Deceleration Begin Time 1

11-21
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

S-curve Deceleration Arrival Time 2


Factory Setting: 0.20/0.2
Settings Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 seconds
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~250.0 seconds
It is used to give the smoothest transition between speed changes. The accel./decel. curve can
adjust the S-curve of the accel./decel. When it is enabled, the drive will have different accel./decel.
curve by the accel./decel. time.
The S-curve function is disabled when accel./decel. time is set to 0.
When Pr.01-12, 01-14, 01-16, 01-18 ≥ Pr.01-24 and Pr.01-25,
The Actual Accel. Time = Pr.01-12, 01-14, 01-16, 01-18 + (Pr.01-24 + Pr.01-25)/2
When Pr.01-13, 01-15, 01-17, 01-19 ≥ Pr.01-26 and Pr.01-27,
The Actual Decel. Time = Pr.01-13, 01-15, 01-17, 01-19 + (Pr.01-26 + Pr.01-27)/2
Frequency
01-25 01-26

Time
01-24 01-27

Skip Frequency 1 (upper limit)


Skip Frequency 1 (lower limit)
Skip Frequency 2 (upper limit)
Skip Frequency 2 (lower limit)
Skip Frequency 3 (upper limit)
Skip Frequency 3 (lower limit)
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
These parameters are used to set the skip frequency of the AC drive. But the frequency output is
continuous. There is no limit for the setting of these six parameters and can be used as required.
The skip frequencies are useful when a motor has vibration at a specific frequency bandwidth. By
skipping this frequency, the vibration will be avoided. It offers 3 zones for use.
These parameters are used to set the skip frequency of the AC drive. But the frequency output is
continuous. The limit of these six parameters is 01-28≥01-29≥01-30≥01-31≥01-32≥01-33. This
function will be invalid when setting to 0.0.
The setting of frequency command (F) can be set within the range of skip frequencies. In this
moment, the output frequency (H) will be limited by these settings.
When accelerating/decelerating, the output frequency will still pass the range of skip frequencies.

11-22
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

01- 28
01- 29 fa ll in g fr eq ue ncy
Inter nal 01- 30
frequency
01- 31
command
01- 32
01- 33 r ising fre qu en cy

0
F requenc y s etting command

Zero-speed Mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Output waiting
1: Zero-speed operation
2: Fmin (4th output frequency setting)
When the frequency is less than Fmin (Pr.01-07 or Pr.01-41), it will operate by this parameter.
When it is set to 0, the AC motor drive will be in waiting mode without voltage output from terminals
U/V/W.
When setting 1, it will execute DC brake by Vmin. (Pr.01-08 and Pr.01-42) in V/f, VFPG and SVC
modes. It executes zero-speed operation in VFPG and FOCPG mode.
When it is set to 2, the AC motor drive will run by Fmin (Pr.01-07, Pr.01-41) and Vmin (Pr.01-08,
Pr.01-42) in V/f, VFPG, SVC and FOCPG modes.
In V/f, VFPG and SVC modes
fout

01-34=1 01-34=2
01-34=0
stop output

fmin
01-07 0H z 0Hz
stop w aiting for output 0H z oper ation
(D C br ake)
In FOCPG mode, when Pr.01-34 is set to 2, it will act according Pr.01-34 setting.
fout

01-34=1 01-34=2
01-34=0

fmin
01-07
frequency command frequency command

V/f Curve Selection


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: V/f curve determined by group 01
1: 1.5 power curve
2: Square curve

11-23
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

When setting to 0, refer to Pr.01-01~01-08 for motor 1 V/f curve. For motor 2, please refer to
Pr.01-35~01-42.
When setting to 1 or 2, 2nd and 3rd voltage frequency setting are invalid.
If motor load is variable torque load (torque is in direct proportion to speed, such as the load of fan
or pump), it can decrease input voltage to reduce flux loss and iron loss of the motor at low speed
with low load torque to raise the entire efficiency.
When setting higher power V/f curve, it is lower torque at low frequency and is not suitable for rapid
acceleration/deceleration. It is recommended Not to use this parameter for the rapid
acceleration/deceleration.
01-02
Voltage %
100
90
80
70 1.5 power c urve
60
50
40
30
20
Square curve 01-01
10
F requenc y%
0 20 40 60 80 100

Optimal Acceleration/Deceleration Setting


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Linear accel./decel.
1: Auto accel., linear decel.
2: Linear accel., auto decel.
3: Auto accel./decel. (auto calculate the accel./decel. time by actual load)
4: Stall prevention by auto accel./decel. (limited by 01-12 to 01-21)
Pr.01-44 is used to reduce the drive’s vibration during load starts and stops. Also it will speed up to
the setting frequency with the fastest and smoothest start-up current when it detects small torque.
At deceleration, it will auto stop the drive with the fastest and the smoothest deceleration time when
the regenerated voltage of the load is detected.
Setting 0 Linear accel./decel.: it will accelerate/decelerate according to the setting of
Pr.01-12~01-19.
Setting to Auto accel./decel.: it can reduce the mechanical vibration and prevent the complicated
auto-tuning processes. It won’t stall during acceleration and no need to use brake resistor. In
addition, it can improve the operation efficiency and save energy.
Setting 3 Auto accel./decel. (auto calculate the accel./decel. time by actual load): it can auto detect
the load torque and accelerate from the fastest acceleration time and smoothest start current to the
setting frequency. In the deceleration, it can auto detect the load re-generation and stop the motor
smoothly with the fastest decel. time.
Setting 4 Stall prevention by auto accel./decel. (limited by 01-12 to 01-21): if the
acceleration/deceleration is in the reasonable range, it will accelerate/decelerate by

11-24
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Pr.01-12~01-19. If the accel./decel. time is too short, the actual accel./decel. time is greater than
the setting of accel./decel. time.
F requenc y

1
01-00
Max.
Fr equency 2

01- 07
Min. T ime
Fr equency accel. time decel. time
01-12 01-14 01-13 01-15
01-16 01-18 01-17 01-19
Acc el./Decel. Time
1 When P r. 01-44 is set to 0.
2 When P r. 01-44 is set to 3.

Time Unit for Acceleration/Deceleration and S Curve


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Unit 0.01 sec
1: Unit 0.1 sec

Time for CANopen Quick Stop


Factory Setting: 1.00
Settings Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 sec
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.0~6000.0 sec
It is used to set the time that decelerates from the max. operation frequency (Pr.01-00) to 0.00Hz in
CANopen control

11-25
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

02 Digital Input/Output Parameter This parameter can be set during operation.

2-wire/3-wire Operation Control


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: 2 wire mode 1
1: 2 wire mode 2
2: 3 wire mode
It is used to set the operation control method:

Pr.02-00 Control Circuits of the External Terminal


0
FWD/STOP FWD:("OPEN":STOP)
2-wire mode 1 ("CLOSE":FWD)
FWD/STOP REV/STOP REV:("OPEN": STOP)
("CLOSE": REV)
REV/STOP DCM
VFD-Cx

1
FWD:("OPEN":STOP)
2-wire mode 2 RUN/STOP
("CLOSE":RUN)
RUN/STOP FWD/REV REV:("OPEN": FWD)
REV/FWD ("CLOSE": REV)
DCM
VFD-Cx

3 FWD "CLOSE":RUN
STOP RUN
3-wire operation control MI1 "OPEN":STOP

REV/FWD "OPEN": FWD


REV/FWD "CLOSE": REV
DCM
VFD-Cx

Multi-function Input Command 1 (MI1) (MI1= STOP command when in 3-wire operation
control)
Factory Setting: 1
Multi-function Input Command 2 (MI2)
Factory Setting: 2
Multi-function Input Command 3 (MI3)
Factory Setting: 3
Multi-function Input Command 4 (MI4)
Factory Setting: 4
Multi-function Input Command 5 (MI5)
Multi-function Input Command 6 (MI6)
Multi-function Input Command 7 (MI7)
Multi-function Input Command 8 (MI8)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: no function
1: multi-step speed command 1/multi-step position command 1
2: multi-step speed command 2/multi-step position command 2
3: multi-step speed command 3/multi-step position command 3

11-26
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

4: multi-step speed command 4/multi-step position command 4


5: Reset
6: JOG command(By KPC-CC01 or external control)
7: acceleration/deceleration speed not allow
8: the 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection
9: the 3rd, 4th acceleration/deceleration time selection
10: EF Input (Pr.07-20)
11: B.B input from external (Base Block)
12: Output stop
13: cancel the setting of the optimal acceleration/deceleration time
14: switch between motor 1 and motor 2
15: operation speed command from AVI
16: operation speed command from ACI
17: operation speed command from AUI
18: Emergency stop (Pr.07-20)
19: Digital up command
20: Digital down command
21: PID function disabled
22: Clear counter
23: Input the counter value (MI6)
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
26: FOCG/TQC model selection
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
28: Emergency stop (EF1)
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for Δ-connection
31: High torque bias (Pr.11-30)
32: Middle torque bias (Pr.11-31)
33: Low torque bias (Pr.11-32)
34: Switch between multi-step position and multi-speed control
35: Enable position control
36: Enable multi-step position learning function (valid at stop)
37: Enable pulse position input command
38: Disable write EEPROM function
39: Torque command direction
40: Force coast to stop
41: HAND switch
42: AUTO switch
43~47: Reserved
48: Mechanical gear ratio switch
49: Drive enable
50: Master dEb action input
51: Selection for PLC mode bit0
52: Selection for PLC mode bit1
53: Trigger CANopen quick stop
54~55: Reserved
56: Local/Remote Selection
This parameter selects the functions for each multi-function terminal.
The terminals of Pr.02-26~Pr.02-29 are virtual and set as MI10~MI13 when using with optional card
EMC-D42A. Pr.02-30~02-31 are virtual terminals.
When being used as a virtual terminal, it needs to change the status (0/1: ON/OFF) of bit 8-15 of
Pr.02-12 by digital keypad KPC-CC01 or communication.
If Pr.02-00 is set to 3-wire operation control. Terminal MI1 is for STOP contact. Therefore, MI1 is
not allowed for any other operation.
Summary of function settings (Take the normally open contact for example, ON: contact is closed,

11-27
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

OFF: contact is open)


Settings Functions Descriptions
0 No Function
Multi-step speed command
1 1/multi-step position command
1
Multi-step speed command 2/ 15 step speeds could be conducted through the digital status of the 4
2
multi-step position command 2 terminals, and 16 in total if the master speed is included. (Refer to
Multi-step speed command 3/ Parameter set 4)
3
multi-step position command 3
Multi-step speed command 4/
4
multi-step position command 4
After the error of the drive is eliminated, use this terminal to reset the
5 Reset
drive.
Before executing this function, it needs to wait for the drive stop
completely. During running, it can change the operation direction and
STOP key on the keypad is valid. Once the external terminal
receives OFF command, the motor will stop by the JOG deceleration
time. Refer to Pr.01-20~01-22 for details.
0 1- 22
JO G fr eq ue ncy

6 JOG Command

0 1- 07
Min. o utp ut freq ue ncy
o f moto r 1
JO G a ccel. time JO G d ece l. ti me
0 1-20 01 -2 1
MIx-G ND ON O FF

When this function is enabled, acceleration and deceleration is


stopped. After this function is disabled, the AC motor drive starts to
accel./decel. from the inhibit point.
Fr eq ue ncy
S etti ng
fr eq uency A ccel . in hi bi t
De cel . in hibit
a re a
a re a A ctua l o pe ra tio n
Acceleration/deceleration fr eq uency
7 A ccel. in hi bi t
Speed Inhibit a rea De cel . in hi bi t
a re a
Actua l o pe ra tion fr eq ue ncy

Time
MIx- GND ON ON ON ON

O pe ra tio n ON O FF
co mman d
st nd
The 1 , 2 acceleration or The acceleration/deceleration time of the drive could be selected from
8
deceleration time selection this function or the digital status of the terminals; there are 4
rd th
The 3 , 4 acceleration or acceleration/deceleration speeds in total for selection.
9
deceleration time selection
External fault input terminal. It will decelerate by Pr.07-20 setting (it
10 EF Input (EF: External fault)
will have fault record when external fault occurs)
When this contact is ON, output of the drive will be cut off immediately,
External B.B. Input (Base
11 and the motor will be free run and display B.B. signal. Refer to
Block)
Pr.07-08 for details.
If this contact is ON, output of the drive will be cut off immediately, and
12 Output Stop the motor will then be free run. And once it is turned to OFF, the drive
will accelerate to the setting frequency.

11-28
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Settings Functions Descriptions


V ol tage
Fr eque ncy
Setti ng
fr eque ncy

Ti me
MI x - GND ON O FF ON

O pe ra tio n
ON
co mmand
Before using this function, Pr.01-44 should be set to 01/02/03/04 first.
Cancel the setting of the
13 When this function is enabled, OFF is for auto mode and ON is for
optimal accel./decel. time
linear accel./decel.
Switch between drive settings 1 When the contact is ON: use motor 2 parameters. OFF: use motor 1
14
and 2 parameters.
When the contact is ON, the source of the frequency will force to be
Operation speed command AVI. (If the operation speed commands are set to AVI, ACI and AUI at
15
form AVI
the same time. The priority is AVI>ACI>AUI)
When the contact is ON, the source of the frequency will force to be
Operation speed command ACI. (If the operation speed commands are set to AVI, ACI and AUI at
16
form ACI
the same time. The priority is AVI>ACI>AUI)
When this function is enabled, the source of the frequency will force to
Operation speed command be AUI. (If the operation speed commands are set to AVI, ACI and AUI
17
form AUI
at the same time. The priority is AVI>ACI>AUI)
When the contact is ON, the drive will ramp to stop by Pr.07-20
18 Emergency Stop (07-20)
setting.

19 Digital Up command
When the contact is ON, the frequency will be increased and
decreased. If this function is constantly ON, the frequency will be
increased/decreased by Pr.02-09/Pr.02-10.
20 Digital Down command

21 PID function disabled When the contact is ON, the PID function is disabled.
When the contact is ON, it will clear current counter value and display
22 Clear counter
“0”. Only when this function is disabled, it will keep counting upward.
Input the counter value
The counter value will increase 1 once the contact is ON. It needs to
23 (multi-function input command
be used with Pr.02-19.
6)
When the contact is ON, the drive will execute forward Jog command.
When execute JOG command under torque mode, the drive will
24 FWD JOG command
automatically switch to speed mode; after JOG command is done, the
drive will return to torque mode.
When the contact is ON the drive will execute reverse Jog command.
When execute JOG command under torque mode, the drive will
25 REV JOG command
automatically switch to speed mode; after JOG command is done, the
drive will return to torque mode.
FOCPG/TQCPG mode When the contact is ON: TQCPG mode.
26
selection When the contact is OFF: FOCPG mode.

11-29
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Settings Functions Descriptions


RU N/STOP
command RU N STOP
Multi- func ti on i np ut
ter minal is set to 26
(to rque/speed OFF ON OFF ON
mode sw itch )
03 -0 0~02= 1 sp eed speed limit sp eed speed limit
(AVI/AUI/ACI i s command command
fr eq uency command)
03 -0 0~02= 2 tor que tor que
(AVI/AUI/ACI i s limit torque limit tor que
tor que command) command command

contro l sp eed sp eed sp eed


mode co ntrol tor que co ntrol tor que co ntrol
control control (decel. t o stop )
Sw itch timing for t orq ue/speed contr ol
(00-10=0/4 , mu lt i-fu nct ion inpu t t erminal is set to 2 6)
When the contact is ON: speed will be adjusted by ASR 2 setting.
27 ASR1/ASR2 selection OFF: speed will be adjusted by ASR 1 setting. Refer to Pr.11-02 for
details.
When the contact is ON, the drive will execute emergency stop and
display EF1 on the keypad. The motor won’t run and be in the free run
until the fault is cleared after pressing RESET” (EF: External Fault)
V oltag e

Fr eq ue ncy

S etti ng
fr eq ue ncy

28 Emergency stop (EF1)

Ti me
MI x - GND ON OFF ON

Re set ON O FF

O pe ra tio n
ON
co mman d

Signal confirmation for


29 When is the contact is ON, the drive will operate by 1st V/f.
Y-connection
Signal confirmation for
30 When the contact is ON, the drive will operate by 2nd V/f.
Δ-connection
31 High torque bias
32 Middle torque bias Refer to Pr.11-30~11-32 for details.
33 Low torque bias
34~37 Reserved
Disable EEPROM write
38 When this contact is ON, write to EEPROM is disabled.
function
For torque control (Pr.00-10=2), when torque command is AVI or ACI,
39 Torque command direction
the contact is ON and it is negative torque.
When this contact is ON during the operation, the drive will free run to
40 Force coast to stop
stop.
1. When MI is switched to off status, it executes a STOP command. ,
41 HAND switch If MI is switched to off during operation, the drive will also stop.
2. Using keypad KPC-CC01 to switch between HAND/AUTO, the
drive will stop first then switch to the HAND or AUTO status.
3. On the digital keypad KPC-CC01, it will display current drive
status (HAND/OFF/AUTO).
Bit 1 Bit 0
42 AUTO switch OFF 0 0
AUTO 0 1
HAND 1 0
OFF 1 1
43~47 Reserved
48 Mechanical gear ratio switch When this contact is ON, the mechanical gear ratio switch will be the

11-30
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Settings Functions Descriptions


second group A2/B2 (refer to Pr.10-08 and Pr.10-09).
When drive=enable, RUN command is valid.
49 Drive enable When drive= disable, RUN command is invalid.
When drive is in operation, motor coast to stop.
Input the message setting in this parameter when dEb occurs to
50 Master dEb action input Master. This will ensure dEb also occurs to Slave, then Master and
Slave will stop simultaneously.
PLC status Bit 1 Bit 0
51 Selection for PLC mode bit0 Disable PLC function (PLC 0) 0 0
Trigger PLC to operation (PLC 1) 0 1
52 Selection for PLC mode bit1 Trigger PLC to stop (PLC 2) 1 0
No function 1 1
When this function is enabled under CANopen control, it will change to
53 Enable CANopen quick stop
quick stop. Refer to Chapter 15 for more details.
54~55 Reserved
Use Pr.00-29 to select for LOCAL/REMOTE mode(refer to Pr.00-29)
When Pr.00-29 is not set to 0, on the digital keypad KPC-CC01 it will
display LOC/REM status. (It will display on the KPC-CC01 if the
firmware version is above version 1.021).
56 LOCAL/REMOTE Selection Bit 0
REM 0
LOC 1

UP/DOWN Key Mode


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Up/down by the accel/decel time
1: Up/down constant speed (Pr.02-10)

Constant speed. The Accel. /Decel. Speed of the UP/DOWN Key


Factory Setting: 0.01
Settings 0.01~1.00Hz/ms
These settings are used when multi-function input terminals are set to 19/20. Refer to Pr.02-09 and
02-10 for the frequency up/down command.
Pr.02-09 set to 0: it will increase/decrease frequency command (F) by the external terminal
UP/DOWN key as shown in the following diagram. In this mode, it also can be controlled by
UP/DOWN key on the digital keypad.
F requenc y

F requenc y c ommand

UP Ml1~15
T ime
DOWN Ml1~15
External ter minal ON OFF DCM
U P k ey VFD-Cx
Pr.02-09 set to 1: it will increase/decrease frequency command (F) by the setting of
acceleration/deceleration (Pr.01-12~01-19) and only be valid during operation.

11-31
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Fr eq ue ncy

Fr eq ue ncy
co mman d

In cre ase d b y acce le ra tio n ti me


Ti me
Mu lti-fu ncti on
i np ut te rmina l
1 0 Fr eq ue ncy ON OFF
i ncr ea sed comma nd

Digital Input Response Time


Factory Setting: 0.005
Settings 0.000~30.000 sec
This parameter is used to set the response time of digital input terminals FWD, REV and MI1~MI8.
It is used for digital input terminal signal delay and confirmation. The delay time is confirmation
time to prevent some uncertain interference that would cause error in the input of the digital
terminals. Under this condition, confirmation for this parameter would improve effectively, but the
response time will be somewhat delayed.

Digital Input Operation Direction


Factory Setting: 0000h
Settings 0000h~FFFFh(0:N.O. ; 1:N.C.)
The setting of this parameter is In hexadecimal.
This parameter is used to set the input signal level and it won’t be affected by the SINK/SOURCE
status.
Bit0 is for FWD terminal, bit1 is for REV terminal and bit2 to bit15 is for MI1 to MI14.
User can change terminal status by communicating.
For example, MI1 is set to 1 (multi-step speed command 1), MI2 is set to 2 (multi-step speed
command 2). Then the forward + 2nd step speed command=1001(binary)=9 (Decimal). Only need
to set Pr.02-12=9 by communication and it can forward with 2nd step speed. It doesn’t need to wire
any multi-function terminal.
bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 REV FWD

Multi-function Output 1 (Relay1)


Factory Setting: 11
Multi-function Output 2 (Relay2)
Factory Setting: 1
Multi-function Output 3 (MO1) When Pr02-21 =0, this parameter is enabled.
Multi-function Output 4 (MO2) When Pr02-55 =0, this parameter is enabled.
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: No function
1: Operation Indication

11-32
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

2: Operation speed attained


3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-22)
4: Desired frequency attained 2 (Pr.02-24)
5: Zero speed (Frequency command)
6: Zero speed, include STOP(Frequency command)
7: Over torque 1(Pr.06-06~06-08)
8: Over torque 2(Pr.06-09~06-11)
9: Drive is ready
10: Low voltage warning(LV)(Pr.06-00)
11: Malfunction indication
12: Mechanical brake release(Pr.02-32)
13: Overheat warning (Pr.06-15)
14: Software brake signal indication(Pr.07-00)
15: PID feedback error
16: Slip error (oSL)
17: Terminal count value attained (Pr.02-20; not return to 0)
18: Preliminary count value attained (Pr.02-19; returns to 0)
19: Base Block
20: Warning output
21: Over voltage warning
22: Over-current stall prevention warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
24: Operation mode indication
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current >= Pr.02-33 (>= 02-33)
28: Output when current <=Pr.02-33 (<= 02-33)
29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-34 (>= 02-34)
30: Output when frequency <= Pr.02-34 (<= 02-34)
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
32: △-connection for the motor coil
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed include stop(actual output frequency)
35: Error output selection 1(Pr.06-23)
36: Error output selection 2(Pr.06-24)
37: Error output selection 3(Pr.06-25)
38: Error output selection 4(Pr.06-26)
39: Reserved
40: Speed attained (including Stop)
41: Reserved
42: Crane function
43: Actual motor speed slower than Pr.02-47

11-33
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

44: Low current output (Pr.06-71 to Pr.06-73)


45: Reserved
46: Master dEb action output
47: Closed brake output
48~49: Reserved
50: Output for CANopen control
51: Output for RS-485
This parameter is used for setting the function of multi-function terminals.
Summary of function settings (Take the normally open contact for example, ON: contact is closed,
OFF: contact is open)
Settings Functions Descriptions
0 No Function
1 Operation Indication Active when the drive is not at STOP.
Master Frequency
2 Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output frequency setting.
Attained
Desired Frequency
3 Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-22) is attained.
Attained 1 (Pr.02-22)
Desired Frequency
4 Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-24) is attained.
Attained 2 (Pr.02-24)
Zero Speed
Active when frequency command =0. (the drive should be at RUN
5 (frequency
mode)
command)
Zero Speed with Stop
6 (frequency Active when frequency command =0 or stop.
command)
Active when detecting over-torque. Refer to Pr.06-07 (over-torque
7 Over Torque 1 detection level-OT1) and Pr.06-08 (over-torque detection time-OT1).
Refer to Pr.06-06~06-08.
Active when detecting over-torque. Refer to Pr.06-10 (over-torque
8 Over Torque 2 detection level-OT2) and Pr.06-11 (over-torque detection time-OT2).
Refer to Pr.06-09~06-11.
9 Drive Ready Active when the drive is ON and no abnormality detected.
Low voltage warn Active when the DC Bus voltage is too low. (refer to Pr.06-00 low
10
(Lv) voltage level)
11 Malfunction Indication Active when fault occurs (except Lv stop).
Mechanical Brake When drive runs after Pr.02-32, it will be ON. This function should be
12
Release (Pr.02-32) used with DC brake and it is recommended to use contact ”b”(N.C).
Active when IGBT or heat sink overheats to prevent OH turn off the
13 Overheat
drive. (refer to Pr.06-15)
Software Brake
14 Active when the soft brake function is ON. (refer to Pr.07-00)
Signal Indication
15 PID Feedback Error Active when the feedback signal is abnormal.
16 Slip Error (oSL) Active when the slip error is detected.
Terminal Count Value
Active when the counter reaches Terminal Counter Value (Pr.02-19).
17 Attained (Pr.02-20;
This contact won’t active when Pr.02-20>Pr.02-19.
not return to 0)
Preliminary Counter
Value Attained Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Counter Value
18
(Pr.02-19; returns to (Pr.02-19).
0)
External Base Block Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off during base
19
input (B.B.) block.
20 Warning Output Active when the warning is detected.
21 Over-voltage Warning Active when the over-voltage is detected.
Over-current Stall
22 Active when the over-current stall prevention is detected.
Prevention Warning

11-34
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Settings Functions Descriptions


Over-voltage Stall
23 Active when the over-voltage stall prevention is detected.
prevention Warning
Operation Mode Active when the operation command is controlled by external
24
Indication terminal. (Pr.00-20≠0)
25 Forward Command Active when the operation direction is forward.
26 Reverse Command Active when the operation direction is reverse.
Output when Current
27 Active when current is >= Pr.02-33.
>= Pr.02-33
Output when Current
28 Active when current is <= Pr.02-33.
<= Pr.02-33
Output when
29 frequency >= Active when frequency is >= Pr.02-34.
Pr.02-34
Output when
30 Frequency <= Active when frequency is <= Pr.02-34.
Pr.02-34
Y-connection for the Active when PR.05-24 is less than Pr.05-23 and time is more than
31
Motor Coil Pr.05-25.
-connection for the Active when PR.05-24 is higher than Pr.05-23 and time is more than
32
Motor Coil Pr.05-25.
Zero Speed (actual Active when the actual output frequency is 0. (the drive should be at
33
output frequency) RUN mode)
Zero Speed with Stop
34 (actual output Active when the actual output frequency is 0 or Stop.
frequency)
Error Output
35 Active when Pr.06-23 is ON.
Selection 1 (Pr.06-23)
Error Output
36 Active when Pr.06-24 is ON.
Selection 2 (Pr.06-24)
Error Output
37 Active when Pr.06-25 is ON.
Selection 3 (Pr.06-25)
Error Output
38 Active when Pr.06-26 is ON.
Selection 4 (Pr.06-26)
39 Reserved
Speed Attained
40 (including zero Active when the output frequency reaches frequency setting or stop.
speed)
41 Reserved
This function should be used with Pr.02-32, Pr.02-33 and Pr.02-34.
Active when setting Pr.07-16=Pr.02-34 and Fcmd > Pr.02-34 and
42 Crane Function output current > Pr.02-33 and Time > Pr.02-32.
The example of the crane application is in the following for your
reference.
Motor Zero-speed
43 Active when motor actual speed is less than Pr.02-47.
Output (Pr.02-47)
44 Low Current Output This function needs to be used with Pr.06-71 ~ Pr.06-73
45 Reserved
When dEb arise at Master, MO will send a dEb signal to Slave. Then
Master dEb signal
46 Slave will follow Master’s command and decelerate to stop
output
simultaneously.
When drive stops, the corresponding multi-function terminal will be
Brake Release at
47 ON if the frequency is less than Pr.02-34. After it is ON, it will be OFF
Stop
when brake delay time exceeds Pr.02-32.

11-35
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Settings Functions Descriptions


Output Frequency

Output Frequency
< Pr.02-34

RUN RUN

Mu lti-function Output
Ti me
MO=d47 02-32

48~49 Reserved
Output for CANopen
50 For CANopen communication output
control
51 Output for RS-485 For RS-485 output
Example: Crane Application
Output
Frequency
Freq. Co mma nd>02-34 Freq. com mand <02 -3 4
& output current >02 -3 3 or o utput current <02 -33

mu lti-function output
MO=42 (Acti ve whe n
Fco m>=02-3 4, ou tput
cu rren t>0 2-33 a nd ti me 02-32 02-32
>02-32)

It is recommended to be used with Dwell function as shown in the following:

Set 07-16=02-34and Set 07-18=02-34 and


output current >02-33 output current <02-33

07-18 Dwe ll Freq.


07-16 Dwe ll at Decel.
Freq.
at Acce l.
Output Freq. 07-15 07-17
Dwell Time at Accel. Dwell Time atDecel.

Multi-function output
MO = 4 2
( Activate when 02-32
Fcmd >= 02-34 02-32 Brake Delay Time
output current > 02-33 Brake Delay Time
Time > 02-32)

Reserved

Multi-function Output Direction


Factory Setting: 0000h

11-36
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Settings 0000h~FFFFh(0:N.O. ; 1:N.C.)


The setting of this parameter is in hexadecimal.
This parameter is set via bit setting. If a bit is 1, the corresponding output acts in the opposite way.
Bit setting
bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
DFM2 DFM1 Reserved RY2 RY1

Terminal Counting Value Attained (return to 0)


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~65500
The counter trigger can be set by the multi-function terminal MI6 (set Pr.02-06 to 23). Upon
completion of counting, the specified output terminal will be activated (Pr.02-13~02-14, Pr.02-36,
02-37 is set to 18). Pr.02-19 can’t be set to 0.
When the display shows c5555, the drive has counted 5,555 times. If display shows c5555•, it
means that real counter value is between 55,550 to 55,559.

Preliminary Counting Value Attained (not return to 0)


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~65500
When the counter value counts from 1 and reaches this value, the corresponding multi-function
output terminal will be activated, provided one of Pr. 02-13, 02-14, 02-36, 02-37 set to 17
(Preliminary Count Value Setting). This parameter can be used for the end of the counting to make
the drive runs from the low speed to stop.
1.0 msec
Di spl ay valu e
[00 -04 =0 1]
TRG [02-06=23]
Counter Trigger
1.0msec
( output signal) Th e wi dth of trig ger si gnal
P reli min ary Cou nte r V al ue 02 -20=3
RY1 P r.0 2- 13=17
02 -13, 02- 14, 0 2-3 6, 02 -37
02 -19=5
Te rmi nal Co unter Valu e 02 -14= 1 7
RY 2 P r.0 2-14 =18

Digital Output Gain(DFM 1)


Factory Setting: 1
Settings 0~106
It is used to set the signal for the digital output terminals (DFM-DCM) and digital frequency output
(pulse X work period=50%). Output pulse per second = output frequency X Pr.02-21 ≤ 33kHz.
When Pr02-21=0, the external terminal (DFM1) will be multi-function output. Pr02-16 sets up the
function of DFM1’s output.
When Pr02-21≥1, the external terminal (DFM1) will be digital frequency output. Output frequency =
H*Gain.

Desired Frequency Attained 1

11-37
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory Setting: 60.00/50.00


Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
The Width of the Desired Frequency Attained 1
Factory Setting: 2.00
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
Desired Frequency Attained 2
Factory Setting: 60.00/50.00
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
The Width of the Desired Frequency Attained 2
Factory Setting: 2.00
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
Once output frequency reaches desired frequency and the corresponding multi-function output
terminal is set to 3 or 4 (Pr.02-13, 02-14, 02-36, and 02-37), this multi-function output terminal will
be ON.
H

Fcmd=60Hz

02-23=40Hz 42Hz
02-24=2Hz 40Hz
38Hz

12Hz
02-21=10Hz 10Hz
02-22=2Hz 8Hz

02-13,
02-14,
02-36, =3
02-37,
02-13,
02-14, =4
02-36,
02-37,

~ Reserved

Brake Delay Time


Factory Setting: 0.000
Settings 0.000~65.000 sec
When the AC motor drive runs after Pr.02-32 delay time, the corresponding multi-function output
terminal (12: mechanical brake release) will be ON. It is recommended to use this function with DC
brake.

11-38
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

A
frequ ency
comma nd
07-0 2 07 -0 3
DC b ra ke DC bra ke
time du ri ng time du ri ng
s tart-u p B=A stopping
Outp ut DC b ra ke DC b ra ke
freq uen cy

RUN STOP
RUN/STOP

02 -3 2 brak e de lay time

M ulti -fu nctio n outp ut


(mech an ical brake rele as e)
Pr.0 2-11 to 02-14=d1 2 b oun ce time of me ch ani cal brake

braked rele ase braked


Mechan ical b ra ke Time

If this parameter is used without DC brake, it will be invalid. Refer to the following operation timing.

zero A ze ro
frequency speed sp eed
co mma nd

B=A

output
frequency

RUN STOP
RUN/STOP

Multi-function output
(mec hani cal brake
relea se)
Pr.02-11 to 02-14=d12

brake relea se brak e


me chanical brake Tim e

Output Current Level Setting for Multi-function Output Terminals


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~100%
When output current is higher or equal to Pr.02-33, it will activate multi-function output terminal
(Pr.02-13, 02-14, 02-16, and 02-17 is set to 27).
When output current is lower than Pr.02-33, it will activate multi-function output terminal (Pr.02-13,
02-14, 02-16, 02-17 is set to 28).

11-39
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Output Boundary for Multi-function Output Terminals


Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~60.00Hz
When output frequency is higher than Pr.02-34, it will activate the multi-function terminal (Pr.02-13,
02-14, 02-16, 02-17 is set to 29).
When output frequency is lower than Pr.02-34, it will activate the multi-function terminal (Pr.02-13,
02-14, 02-16, 02-17 is set to 30).

External Operation Control Selection after Reset and Activate


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Drive runs if the run command still exists after reset or re-boots.
Setting 1:
Status 1: After the drive is powered on and the external terminal for RUN keeps ON, the drive will
run.
Status 2: After clearing fault once a fault is detected and the external terminal for RUN keeps ON,
the drive can run after pressing RESET key.

~ Reserved

Zero-speed Level of Motor


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~65535 rpm
This parameter should be used with the multi-function output terminals (set to 43). It needs to be
used with PG cared and motor with encoder feedback.
This parameter is used to set the level of motor zero-speed. When the actual speed is lower than
this setting, the corresponding multi-function output terminal 43 will be ON as shown as follows.

a ctua l mo tor
sp ee d

0 2-47

MO =d 43
Ti me

Max. Frequency of Resolution Switch


Factory Setting: 60.00
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
Switch the delay time of Max. output frequency
Factory Setting: 0.000

11-40
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Settings 0.000~65000 ms
It is used to improve the unstable speed or unstable position due to the insufficient of analog
resolution. It needs to be used with external terminal (set to 43). After setting this parameter, it
needs to adjust the analog output resolution of controller simultaneously by this setting.
AUI +10V
Acc el./D ecel. time
01-12~01-19
AUI 0V
Max. output frequency
Max. output frequency
01-00
AUI - 10V 01-00

F requenc y
command

Output
Resolution switch R esolution sw itch
frequency
0Hz frequency frequency
Delay time for max . Delay time for max .
10-25 10-25
frequency switch frequency switch
Resolution ON
10-24 10-24
switch
MI=43
F or war d r unni ng Revers e running

Display the Status of Multi-function Input Terminal


Factory Setting: Read only
Weights 2 9 2 8 27 26 25 24 2
3 2
2
1
2
0
2
Bit 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FWD
RE V
0=On
MI1
1=Off
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
MI8

For Example:
If Pr.02-50 displays 0034h (Hex), i.e. the value is 52, and 110100 (binary). It means MI1, MI3 and
MI4 are active.
Weights 2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
0=O N
Bit 1 1 0 1 0 0 MI1 1=O FF
MI2 Settings
5 4 2
MI3 = bit5x 2 +bit4x2 +bit2x2
5 4 2
MI4 = 1x2 +1x2 + 1x2
=32+16+4 =52 NOTE
MI5 5 4
2 =322 =1 6
3
2 =8
2
2 =4
1 0
MI6 2 =2 2 =1

Status of Multi-function Output Terminal


Factory Setting: Read only
For Example:
If Pr.02-51 displays 000Bh (Hex), i.e. the value is 11, and 1011 (binary). It means RY1, RY2 and
MO1 are ON.

11-41
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Weights
4 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2
Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Relay 1
0=ON Relay 2
1=OFF
NOTE Reserved
4 3
2 =16
2
2 =8
1 0
DFM1
2 =4 2 =2 2 =1
DFM2

Display External Output terminal occupied by PLC


Factory Setting: Read only
P.02-52 shows the external multi-function input terminal that used by PLC.
Weights 2 9 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 2
0

Bit 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FWD
REV
0=ON MI1
1=OFF MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
MI8
For Example:
When Pr.02-52 displays 0034h(hex) and switching to 110100 (binary), it means MI1, MI3 and MI4
are used by PLC.
Weights 2 7 2 6 2 5 2 4 23 22 21 20 0: not used by PLC
B it 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1: used by PLC
Mi1
MI2 Displays
5 4 2
= bit5x2 +bit4x2 +bit2x2
MI3 5 4 2
= 1x2 +1x2 +1x2
MI4 =32+16+4 =52
MI5
NOTE
MI6 7 6
2 =128 2 =64
MI7 5 4 3 2
MI8 2 =322 =16 2 =8 2 =4
1 0
2 =2 2 =1

Display Analog Input Terminal occupied by PLC


Factory Setting: Read only
P.02-53 shows the external multi-function output terminal that used by PLC.
0=ON
Weights 2 4 2 3 2 2 2 1 20 1=OFF
Bit
4 3 2 1 0 Relay 1
Relay 2
NOTE
4 3 Reserved
2 =16 2 =8
2 =4
2 1
2 =2
0
2 =1
DFM1
DFM2

For Example:
If the value of Pr.02-53 displays 0003h (Hex), it means RY1and RY2 are used by PLC.

11-42
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

0=NOT used by PLC


1=Used by PLC
Weights 2 2
4 3
2 2
2 2
1 0

Bit 0 0 0 1 1 Relay 1 Display value


Relay 2 3=2+1
=1x21 +1x20
Reserved
=bit 1x21 +bit 0x20
DFM1
DFM2

Display the Frequency Command Executed by External Terminal


Factory Setting: Read only
Settings Read only
When the source of frequency command comes from the external terminal, if Lv or Fault occurs at
this time, the frequency command of the external terminal will be saved in this parameter.

Digital Output Gain(DFM 2)


Factory Setting: 1
Settings 0~106
It is used to set the signal for the digital output terminals (DFM 2-DCM) and digital frequency output
(pulse X work period=50%). Output pulse per second = output frequency X Pr.02-55 ≤ 33kHz.
When Pr02-55=0, the external terminal (DFM2) will be multi-function output. Pr02-17 sets up the
function of DFM1’s output.
When Pr02-55≥1, the external terminal (DFM2) will be digital frequency output. Output frequency =
H*Gain.

11-43
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

03 Analog Input/Output Parameter This parameter can be set during operation.

Analog Input Selection (AVI)


Factory Setting: 1
Analog Input Selection (ACI)
Factory Setting: 0
Analog Input Selection (AUI)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: No function
1: Frequency command (torque limit under torque control mode)
2: Torque command (torque limit under speed mode)
3: Torque compensation command
4: PID target value
5: PID feedback signal
6: PTC thermistor input value
7: Positive torque limit
8: Negative torque limit
9: Regenerative torque limit
10: Positive/negative torque limit
When it is frequency command or TQC speed limit, the corresponding value for 0~±10V/4~20mA is
0 – max. output frequency(Pr.01-00)
When it is torque command or torque limit, the corresponding value for 0~±10V/4~20mA is 0 – max.
output torque (Pr.11-27).
When it is torque compensation, the corresponding value for 0~±10V/4~20mA is 0 – rated torque.
Positive torque
03-00~02=7
03-00~02=9 Positive torque limit
Regenerative
torque limit

03-00~02=10
Positive/negative torque limit

Reverse Forward

03-00~02=10
Positive/negative torque limit 03-00~02=9
Regenerative
torque limit
03-00~02=8
Negative torque limit
Negative Torque

Analog Input Bias (AVI)


Factory Setting: 0
Settings -100.0~100.0%
It is used to set the corresponding AVI voltage of the external analog input 0.

11-44
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Analog Input Bias (ACI)


Factory Setting: 0
Settings -100.0~100.0%
It is used to set the corresponding ACI voltage of the external analog input 0.

Analog Voltage Input Bias (AUI)


Factory Setting: 0
Settings -100.0~100.0%
It is used to set the corresponding AUI voltage of the external analog input 0.
The relation between external input voltage/current and setting frequency: 0~10V (4-20mA)
corresponds to 0-60Hz.

Reserved

Positive/negative Bias Mode (AVI)


Positive/negative Bias Mode (ACI)
Positive/negative Bias Mode (AUI)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Zero bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
In a noisy environment, it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin. It is
recommended NOT to use less than 1V to set the operation frequency.
In the diagram below: Black color line: Frequency. Gray color line: Voltage
Frequency
Pr.03-03=10%
60Hz
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode)
54Hz
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias volt age
while serving as the cent er
4: Serve bias as the cent er
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse Run)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orw ard and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or ext ernal t erminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = forward run; negat ive
f requency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be switched by digit al keypad or
external t eriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog I nput Gain (AVI)= 100%

11-45
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Frequency Pr.03-03=10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negative Bias Mode)
0: N o bias
1: Lower than or equal t o bias
2: Greater than or equal t o bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
6Hz
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse R un)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: Negat ive f requency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
by digit al keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagt ive f requency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be sw itched by digit al keypad or
ext ernal teriminal cont rol.
Pr.03-11Analog I nput Gain (AVI)=100%

Frequency Pr.03-03=10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode)
54Hz 0: N o bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the cent er
4: Serve bias as the center
6Hz
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse Run)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: Negat ive frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or ext ernal terminal.
1: Neagt ive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = forw ard run; negat ive
f requency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be switched by digit al keypad or
external t eriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog I nput Gain (AVI) = 100%

Pr. 03-03=10%
Frequency
Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode)
60Hz
54Hz 0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal to bias
2: Great er t han or equal to bias
3: T he absolut e value of the bias volt age
while serving as t he cent er
4: Serve bias as t he cent er

-V V Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)


10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orw ard and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or ext ernal t erminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = f orward run; negat ive
f requency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
external t eriminal control.
Pr. 03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI) = 100%

11-46
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Pr. 03-03=10%
F requency
Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode)
60Hz 0: No bias
54Hz 1: Low er t han or equal to bias
2: Greater t han or equal to bias
3: T he absolut e value of t he bias volt age
while serving as t he cent er
4: Serve bias as t he cent er

Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)


-V V 0: Negative f requency is not valid.
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digit al keypad or ext ernal t erminal.
1: Neagtive f requency is valid. Posit ive
frequency = f orward run; negat ive
frequency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog I nput Gain (AVI)= 100%

F requency Pr.03-03=10%

60Hz Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode)


0: No bias
1: Low er t han or equal t o bias
2: Great er t han or equal to bias
3: T he absolut e value of t he bias volt age
while serving as t he center
4: Serve bias as t he cent er
6Hz
-V V Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orw ard and reverse run is cont rolled
by digital keypad or ext ernal t erminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = f orward run; negat ive
f requency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr. 03-11Analog Input Gain (AVI )= 100%

F requency Pr.03-03=10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negative Bias Mode)
54Hz
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal t o bias
2: Greater than or equal t o bias
3: T he absolute value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
6Hz
-V V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse Run)
0: Negat ive frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagt ive frequency is valid. Positive
f requency = forward run; negative
f requency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digit al keypad or
ext ernal t eriminal cont rol.

Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI ) = 100%

11-47
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

F requency Pr.03-03=10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negative Bias Mode)
54Hz 0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal t o bias
2: Greater than or equal t o bias
3: T he absolute value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center

-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)


-6Hz 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negat ive f requency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
by digital keypad or external t erminal.
1: Neagt ive f requency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be sw itched by digital keypad or
ext ernal t eriminal cont rol.
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI ) = 100%

F requency Pr.03-03=-10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal t o bias
2: Greater than or equal t o bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
6Hz
4: Serve bias as the center
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse Run)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: Negat ive f requency is not valid.
Forward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or ext ernal terminal.
1: Neagt ive f requency is valid. Posit ive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digit al keypad or
ext ernal t eriminal cont rol.
Pr.03-11 Analog I nput Gain (AVI)= 100%

F requency Pr. 03-03=-10%


60Hz Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal t o bias
2: Greater t han or equal t o bias
3: T he absolute value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center

-V V Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse R un)


10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negative f requency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
by digit al keypad or external t erminal.
1: Neagtive f requency is valid. Positive
frequency = f orward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
ext ernal teriminal cont rol.
Pr.03-11 Analog I nput Gain (AVI)= 100%

11-48
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

F requency Pr. 03-03=-10%


60Hz Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Low er t han or equal t o bias
2: Great er t han or equal t o bias
3: T he absolut e value of t he bias voltage
while serving as t he center
4: Serve bias as t he center
6Hz
-V V Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negative f requency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
by digit al keypad or external t erminal.
1: Neagtive f requency is valid. Positive
frequency = f orward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. D irection
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
ext ernal teriminal cont rol.
Pr. 03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI ) = 100%

F requency Pr. 03-03=-10%


60Hz Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal to bias
2: Greater t han or equal t o bias
3: T he absolut e value of t he bias volt age
while serving as t he center
4: Serve bias as t he center
6Hz
-V V Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digit al keypad or ext ernal t erminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = f orward run; negat ive
f requency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr. 03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI ) = 100%

F requency Pr.03-03=-10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode)
0: N o bias
1: Lower than or equal t o bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the cent er
4: Serve bias as the center
6Hz
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse R un)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: Negat ive frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagt ive frequency is valid. Positive
f requency = forward run; negative
f requency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digit al keypad or
ext ernal t eriminal cont rol.
Pr.03-11 Analog I nput Gain (AVI)= 100%

11-49
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

F requency Pr. 03-03=-10%


60Hz Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal t o bias
2: Greater than or equal t o bias
3: T he absolute value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center

-V V Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)


10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: Negative f requency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
by digit al keypad or external t erminal.
1: Neagtive f requency is valid. Positive
frequency = f orward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
ext ernal teriminal cont rol.
Pr. 03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI )= 100%

F requency Pr. 03-03=-10%


60Hz Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal t o bias
2: Greater than or equal t o bias
3: T he absolute value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
6Hz
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog Frequency Command f or Reverse R un)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
by digit al keypad or external t erminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = f orward run; negat ive
frequency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr. 03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI ) = 100%

F requency Pr.03-03=-10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal to bias
2: Great er t han or equal to bias
3: T he absolut e value of the bias volt age
while serving as t he cent er
4: Serve bias as t he cent er
6Hz
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or ext ernal t erminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = forward run; negat ive
f requency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external t eriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog I nput Gain (AVI) = 100%

11-50
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

F requency Pr. 03-03=-10%


60Hz Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal t o bias
2: Greater t han or equal t o bias
3: T he absolut e value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center

-V V Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse R un)


10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negative f requency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
by digit al keypad or external t erminal.
1: Neagtive f requency is valid. Positive
frequency = f orward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
ext ernal teriminal cont rol.
Pr. 03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI )= 1 11. 1%
10/ 9=111.1%

F requency Pr.03-03=10%
60Hz Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal to bias
2: Great er t han or equal to bias
3: T he absolut e value of the bias volt age
while serving as t he cent er
4: Serve bias as t he cent er

Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)


-V V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orw ard and reverse run is cont rolled
by digital keypad or ext ernal t erminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = f orward run; negat ive
f requency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr. 03-11Analog Input Gain (AVI )=111.1%
10/9 =111.1%

F requency Pr.03-03=10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal t o bias
2: Greater than or equal t o bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
6.66Hz
4: Serve bias as the center

-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or R everse Run)


10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negat ive frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or ext ernal terminal.
1: Neagt ive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = forw ard run; negat ive
f requency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be switched by digit al keypad or
external t eriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog I nput Gain (AVI ) = 111.1%
10/ 9 =111. 1%

11-51
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

F requency Pr. 03-03=10%


60Hz Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/ Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal t o bias
2: Greater t han or equal t o bias
3: The absolut e value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center

-V V Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)


10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: Negative f requency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
by digit al keypad or external t erminal.
1: Neagtive f requency is valid. Positive
frequency = f orward run; negat ive
frequency = reverse run. D irect ion
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
ext ernal teriminal cont rol.
Pr.03-11 Analog I nput Gain (AVI) = 111.1%
10/ 9 =111. 1%

F requency Pr.03-03=10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Great er than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias volt age
w hile serving as t he cent er
4: Serve bias as t he cent er
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or R everse Run)
-V V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: N egat ive frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or ext ernal terminal.
1: N eagt ive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = forward run; negative
f requency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digit al keypad or
external t eriminal cont rol.
Pr03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI ) = 111. 1%
10/9 =111.1%

F requency Pr.03-03=10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Great er than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias volt age
w hile serving as t he cent er
4: Serve bias as t he cent er
6.66Hz
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse Run)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: N egat ive frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or ext ernal terminal.
1: N eagt ive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = forward run; negative
f requency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digit al keypad or
external t eriminal control.
Pr03-11Analog I nput Gain (AVI ) = 111.1%
10/ 9 =111. 1%

11-52
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

F requency Pr. 03-03=10%


60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal t o bias
2: Greater than or equal t o bias
3: T he absolute value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
6.66Hz
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or R everse Run)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negat ive frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or ext ernal terminal.
1: Neagt ive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = forward run; negative
f requency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digit al keypad or
ext ernal t eriminal cont rol.
Pr03-11 Analog I nput Gain (AVI) = 111.1%
10/9 =111.1%

F requency Pr. 03-03=10%


60Hz Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/ Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal t o bias
2: Greater t han or equal t o bias
3: T he absolut e value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center

-V V Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negative f requency is not valid.
-6.66Hz
F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
by digit al keypad or external t erminal.
1: Neagtive f requency is valid. Positive
frequency = f orward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. D irection
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
ext ernal teriminal cont rol.
Pr03-11 Analog I nput Gain (AVI) = 100%
10/ 9 =111. 1%

F requency Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode)


0: N o bias
60Hz
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias volt age
while serving as the cent er
4: Serve bias as the cent er
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse Run)
6Hz
0: Negat ive frequency is not valid.
-V V F orward and reverse run is controlled
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
by digital keypad or ext ernal terminal.
1: Neagt ive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = forward run; negative
f requency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digit al keypad or
ext ernal t eriminal cont rol.
Calculate the bias: 60-6Hz = 6-0Hz XV= 10 =1.11V
10V XV 9
Pr.03-03= 1.11 × 100%
10
Calculate the gain: Pr.03-11= 10V × 100%=90.0%
11.1V

11-53
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

F requency Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode)


60Hz
0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal t o bias
2: Greater t han or equal t o bias
3: T he absolut e value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency C ommand for Reverse Run)
0: Negative f requency is not valid.
-V V F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
by digit al keypad or external t erminal.
1: Neagtive f requency is valid. Positive
frequency = f orward run; negat ive
frequency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
ext ernal teriminal control.
Calculate the bias: 60-6Hz = 6-0Hz XV= 10 =1.11V
10V XV 9
1.11
Pr.03-03= × 100%
10
Calculate the gain: Pr.03-11= 10V × 100%=90.0%
11.1V

F requency Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode)


0: No bias
60Hz
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Great er than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias volt age
while serving as t he cent er
4: Serve bias as t he cent er
Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency C ommand for Reverse Run)
6Hz 0: Negat ive f requency is not valid.
-V V F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
by digit al keypad or external t erminal.
1: Neagt ive f requency is valid. Positive
frequency = f orward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
ext ernal teriminal cont rol.
Calculate the bias: 60-6Hz = 6-0Hz XV= 10 =1.11V
10V XV 9
1.11
Pr.03-03= × 100%
10
Calculate the gain: Pr.03-11= 10V × 100%=90.0%
11.1V

F requency Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode)


0: No bias
60Hz
1: Low er t han or equal to bias
2: Great er t han or equal to bias
3: T he absolut e value of t he bias volt age
while serving as t he cent er
4: Serve bias as t he cent er

Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)


6Hz 0: Negative frequency is not valid.
-V V F orward and reverse run is controlled
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
by digit al keypad or ext ernal t erminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Posit ive
frequency = f orward run; negat ive
frequency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Calculate the bias: 60-6Hz = 6-0Hz XV=
10
=1.11V
10V XV 9
Pr.03-03= 1.11 × 100%
10
Calculate the gain: Pr.03-11= 10V × 100%=90.0%
11.1V

11-54
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

F requency Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negative Bias Mode)


60Hz 0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal t o bias
2: Greater than or equal t o bias
3: T he absolute value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center

6Hz
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negat ive f requency is not valid.
-V V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
by digital keypad or external t erminal.
1: Neagt ive f requency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be sw itched by digital keypad or
ext ernal t eriminal cont rol.
Calculate the bias: 60-6Hz = 6-0Hz XV= 10 =1.11V
10V XV 9
Pr.03-03= 1.11 × 100%
10

Calculate the gain: Pr.03-11= 10V × 100%=90.0%


11.1V

F requency Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode)


60Hz 0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal t o bias
2: Greater t han or equal t o bias
3: T he absolut e value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as t he center

Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)


0: Negative f requency is not valid.
-V V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
by digit al keypad or ext ernal t erminal.
1: Neagtive f requency is valid. Posit ive
frequency = f orward run; negat ive
frequency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.

Calculate the bias: 60-6Hz = 6-0Hz XV= 10 =1.11V


10V XV 9
Pr.03-03= 1.11 × 100%
10
Calculate the gain: Pr.03-11= 10V × 100%=90.0%
11.1V

F requency Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode)


0: No bias
60Hz
1: Lower than or equal t o bias
2: Greater than or equal t o bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center

Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse Run)


6Hz
0: N egat ive frequency is not valid.
-V V F orward and reverse run is controlled
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
by digital keypad or ext ernal terminal.
1: N eagt ive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = forward run; negat ive
f requency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be switched by digit al keypad or
external t eriminal control.

Calculate the bias: 60-6Hz = 6-0Hz XV=


10
=1.11V
10V XV 9
Pr.03-03= 1.11 × 100%
10
Calculate the gain: Pr.03-11= 10V × 100%=90.0%
11.1V

11-55
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

F requency Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode)


0: No bias
60Hz
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Great er than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias volt age
w hile serving as t he cent er
4: Serve bias as t he cent er

Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse Run)


6Hz
0: Negat ive frequency is not valid.
-V V F orward and reverse run is controlled
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
by digital keypad or ext ernal terminal.
1: Neagt ive frequency is valid. Positive
f requency = forward run; negative
f requency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digit al keypad or
ext ernal t eriminal cont rol.

Calculate the bias: 60-6Hz = 6-0Hz XV= 10 =1.11V


10V XV 9
Pr.03-03= 1.11 × 100%
10
Calculate the gain: Pr.03-11= 10V × 100%=90.0%
11.1V

Pr.00-21=0 (D gital keypad control and d run in F WD direct ion)


F requency Pr.03-05 Analog Posit ive Volt age Input Bias (AUI ) = 10%

60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/N egat ive Bias Mode)


54Hz 0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal t o bias
2: Greater t han or equal t o bias
3: T he absolut e value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse Run)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: N egat ive frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or ext ernal terminal.
1: N eagt ive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = forward run; negative
f requency = reverse run. Direction
60Hz can not be switched by digit al keypad or
external t eriminal control.
Pr. 00-13 Analog Posit ive Input Gain (AUI )= 100%
Pr. 03-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI )= 100%

Pr.00-21=0 (Dgital keypad control and d run in F WD direct ion)


F requency Pr.03-05 Analog Posit ive Volt age Input Bias (AUI ) = 10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/N egat ive Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Low er t han or equal t o bias
2: Great er t han or equal t o bias
3: T he absolut e value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as t he center
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse Run)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: N egat ive frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or ext ernal terminal.
1: N eagt ive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = forward run; negat ive
f requency = reverse run. Direct ion
60Hz can not be switched by digit al keypad or
external t eriminal control.
Pr. 00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr. 03-14 Analog Negative I nput Gain (AUI )= 100%

11-56
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Pr.00-21=0 (Dgit al keypad control and d run in F WD direction)


F requency
Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode)
54Hz 0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal t o bias
2: Greater than or equal t o bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the cent er
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4: Serve bias as the center
-V V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse Run)
0: Negat ive frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or ext ernal terminal.
1: Neagt ive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = forw ard run; negative
f requency = reverse run. Direction
60Hz
can not be switched by digit al keypad or
external t eriminal control.
Pr. 00-13 Analog Posit ive Input Gain (AUI )= 100%
Pr. 03-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI )= 100%

Pr.00-21=0 (Dgit al keypad control and d run in F WD direct ion)


F requency
Pr.03-05 Analog Posit ive Volt age Input Bias (AUI ) = 10%
60Hz
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode)
54Hz
0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal to bias
2: Great er t han or equal to bias
3: T he absolut e value of the bias volt age
while serving as t he center
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4: Serve bias as t he cent er
-V V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse Run)
0: Negat ive f requency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
by digit al keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagt ive f requency is valid. Positive
frequency = f orward run; negative
60Hz
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digit al keypad or
ext ernal teriminal cont rol.
Pr.00-13 Analog Posit ive I nput Gain (AUI )= 100%
Pr.03-14 Analog Negat ive Input Gain (AU I)= 100%

F requency Pr. 00-21=0 (Digital keypad control and run in F WD direct ion )
Pr. 03-05 Analog Positive Voltage I nput Bias (AUI ) = 10%
60Hz
Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode)
54Hz
0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal to bias
2: Great er t han or equal to bias
3: T he absolut e value of the bias volt age
while serving as t he cent er
4: Serve bias as t he cent er
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-V V Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
by digit al keypad or ext ernal t erminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Posit ive
frequency = f orward run; negat ive
frequency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
60Hz external teriminal control.
Pr. 00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr. 03-14 Analog Negative I nput Gain (AUI )= 100%

11-57
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Pr.00-21=0 (Digit al keypad cont rol and run in F WD direct ion)


F requency Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Volt age Input Bias (AUI ) = 10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal t o bias
2: Greater than or equal t o bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or R everse Run)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negat ive f requency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digit al keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagt ive f requency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be sw itched by digit al keypad or
ext ernal teriminal cont rol.
60Hz
Pr.00-13 Analog Posit ive Input Gain (AUI )= 100%
Pr.03-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI )= 100%

Pr.00-21=0 (D igit al keypad control and run in F WD direct ion)


F requency Pr.03-05 Analog Posit ive Volt age Input Bias (AUI ) = 10%
60Hz Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negat ive Bias Mode)
54Hz 0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal to bias
2: Great er t han or equal to bias
3: T he absolut e value of the bias volt age
while serving as t he cent er
4: Serve bias as t he cent er
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-V V Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: Negative f requency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
by digit al keypad or ext ernal t erminal.
1: Neagtive f requency is valid. Posit ive
frequency = f orward run; negat ive
frequency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
60Hz
Pr.00-13 Analog Posit ive I nput Gain (AUI )= 100%
Pr.03-14 Analog N egat ive Input Gain (AUI)= 100%

Pr.00-21=0 (Digit al keypad control and run in F WD direct ion)


F requency Pr.03-05 Analog Posit ive Volt age Input Bias (AUI ) = 10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/N egat ive Bias Mode)
60Hz
0: No bias
54Hz
1: Lower than or equal t o bias
2: Greater than or equal t o bias
3: T he absolute value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or R everse Run)


-V V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negat ive f requency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagt ive f requency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be sw itched by digit al keypad or
ext ernal t eriminal cont rol.
60Hz
Pr. 00-13 Analog Positive I nput Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr. 03-14 Analog Negat ive I nput Gain (AUI)= 100%

11-58
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

F requency Pr. 00-21=0 (Digital keypad control and run in F WD direct ion )
Pr.03-05 Analog Posit ive Volt age Input Bias (AUI ) = 10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/N egat ive Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal to bias
2: Great er t han or equal to bias
3: T he absolut e value of the bias volt age
while serving as t he cent er
4: Serve bias as t he cent er
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-V V Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negat ive frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or ext ernal terminal.
1: Neagt ive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = forw ard run; negat ive
f requency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be switched by digit al keypad or
external t eriminal control.
60Hz
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive I nput Gain (AUI )= 111.1%
(10/9) *100% = 111. 1%
Pr.00-14 Analog Negat ive Input Gain (AUI) = 100%

Pr. 00-21=0 (Digital keypad cont rol and run in F WD direction )


F requency
Pr. 03-05 Analog Positive Voltage I nput Bias (AUI) = 10%
60Hz Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal t o bias
2: Greater t han or equal t o bias
3: T he absolut e value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-V V Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negative f requency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
by digit al keypad or external t erminal.
1: Neagtive f requency is valid. Positive
frequency = f orward run; negat ive
frequency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
ext ernal teriminal control.
60Hz
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive I nput Gain (AUI )= 111.1%
(10/9) *100% = 111. 1%
Pr.00-14 Analog Negat ive Input Gain (AUI) = 100%

F requency Pr.00-21=0 (Digit al keypad cont rol and run in F WD direct ion )
Pr.03-05 Analog Posit ive Volt age Input Bias (AUI ) = 10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal t o bias
2: Greater than or equal t o bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse R un)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negat ive frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or ext ernal terminal.
1: Neagt ive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = forw ard run; negat ive
f requency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be switched by digit al keypad or
external t eriminal control.
60Hz
Pr.00-13 Analog Posit ive Input Gain (AUI)= 111. 1%
(10/ 9) *100% = 111.1%
Pr.00-14 Analog Negat ive Input Gain (AU I) = 100%

11-59
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Pr.00-21=0 (Digit al keypad control and run in F WD direct ion )


F requency Pr.03-05 Analog Posit ive Volt age Input Bias (AU I) = 10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal t o bias
2: Greater t han or equal t o bias
3: T he absolut e value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse R un)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negat ive frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagt ive frequency is valid. Positive
f requency = forward run; negative
f requency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digit al keypad or
ext ernal t eriminal cont rol.
60Hz
Pr.00-13 Analog Posit ive I nput Gain (AUI )= 111.1%
(10/9) *100% = 111. 1%
Pr.00-14 Analog Negat ive Input Gain (AUI) = 100%

Pr.00-21=0 (D igit al keypad cont rol and run in F WD direction)


F requency Pr.03-05 Analog Posit ive Volt age Input Bias (AUI ) = 10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode)
60Hz
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal t o bias
2: Greater than or equal t o bias
3: T he absolute value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or R everse Run)


-V V 0: N egat ive frequency is not valid.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or ext ernal terminal.
1: N eagt ive frequency is valid. Positive
f requency = forward run; negative
f requency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digit al keypad or
external t eriminal cont rol.
60Hz
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive I nput Gain (AUI )= 111.1%
(10/9) *100% = 111. 1%
Pr.00-14 Analog Negat ive I nput Gain (AUI) = 90. 9%
(10/11) *100% = 90. 9%

Pr.00-21=0 (D igital keypad cont rol and run in F WD direction)


F requency Pr. 03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
60Hz Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/ Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal t o bias
2: Greater than or equal t o bias
3: T he absolute value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or R everse Run)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negative f requency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
by digit al keypad or external t erminal.
1: Neagtive f requency is valid. Positive
frequency = f orward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. D irection
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
ext ernal teriminal cont rol.
60Hz
Pr. 00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI )= 111.1%
(10/9) *100% = 111. 1%
Pr. 00-14 Analog Negative I nput Gain (AUI ) = 90. 9%
(10/11) *100% = 90.9%

11-60
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Pr. 00-21=0 (D igit al keypad control and run in F WD direct ion)


F requency
Pr. 03-05 Analog Posit ive Voltage I nput Bias (AUI ) = 10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/N egat ive Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Great er than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias volt age
w hile serving as t he cent er
4: Serve bias as t he cent er
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse Run)
-V V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orw ard and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or ext ernal t erminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = f orward run; negat ive
f requency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
external t eriminal control.
60Hz
Pr. 00-13 Analog Positive I nput Gain (AUI )= 111.1%
(10/9) *100% = 111. 1%
Pr.00-14 Analog Negat ive I nput Gain (AUI) = 90. 9%
(10/11) *100% = 90. 9%

Pr.00-21=0 (D igital keypad cont rol and run in F WD direction)


F requency Pr. 03-05 Analog Positive Voltage I nput Bias (AUI) = 10%
60Hz Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/ Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal t o bias
2: Greater t han or equal t o bias
3: The absolut e value of t he bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-V V Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negative f requency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
by digit al keypad or external t erminal.
1: Neagtive f requency is valid. Posit ive
frequency = f orward run; negat ive
frequency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
60Hz
Pr.00-13 Analog Posit ive Input Gain (AUI)= 111. 1%
(10/ 9) *100% = 111.1%
Pr. 00-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AU I) = 90.9%
(10/ 11) *100% = 90.9%

Analog Frequency Command for Reverse Run


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Negative frequency is not valid. Forward and reverse run is controlled by digital
keypad or external terminal.
1: Negative frequency is valid. Positive frequency = forward run; negative frequency =
reverse run. Run direction can not be switched by digital keypad or the external
terminal control.
Parameter 03-10 is used to enable reverse run command when a negative frequency (negative
bias and gain) is input to AVI or ACI analog signal input.

Analog Input Gain (AVI)


Analog Input Gain (ACI)
Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)
Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI)

11-61
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory Setting: 100.0


Settings -500.0~500.0%
Parameters 03-03 to 03-14 are used when the source of frequency command is the analog
voltage/current signal.

Analog Input Filter Time (AVI)


Analog Input Filter Time (ACI)
Analog Input Filter Time (AUI)
Factory Setting: 0.10
Settings 0.00~2.00 sec
These input delays can be used to filter noisy analog signal.
When the setting of the time constant is too large, the control will be stable but the control response
will be slow. When the setting of time constant is too small, the control response will be faster but
the control may be unstable. To find the optimal setting, please adjust the setting according to the
control stable or response status.

Addition Function of the Analog Input


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable (AVI, ACI, AUI)
1: Enable
When Pr.03-18 is set to 0 and the analog input setting is the same, the priority for AVI, ACI and AUI
are AVI>ACI>AUI.
Frequ ency

Fco mmand= [( ay bias) *gain] * F max(01- 00)


10V or 16mA
Fcomma nd: the co rr esponding
frequen cy for 10V or 20mA
ay : 10 or 16mA
bias : Pr.03-03,Pr . 03-04, Pr .0 3-05
gain : Pr.03 -11 , Pr .03-12, Pr. 03- 13, Pr.0 3-14
Voltage

Treatment to 4-20mA Analog Input Signal Loss


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Continue operation at the last frequency
2: Decelerate to stop
3: Stop immediately and display ACE
This parameter determines the behavior when 4~20mA signal is loss, when AVI(Pr.03-28=2) or ACI
(03-29=0).
When Pr.03-28 is not set to 2, it means the voltage input to AVI terminal is 0-10V or 0-20mA. At this
moment, Pr.03-19 will be invalid.
When Pr.03-29 is set to 1, it means the voltage input to ACI terminal is for 0-10V. At this moment,
Pr.03-19 will be invalid.
When setting is 1 or 2, it will display warning code “AnL” on the keypad. It will be blinking until the

11-62
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

loss of the ACI signal is recovered or drive is stop.

Multi-function Output 1 (AFM1)


Factory Setting: 0
Multi-function Output 2 (AFM2)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~23
Function Chart
Settings Functions Descriptions
0 Output frequency (Hz) Max. frequency Pr.01-00 is regarded as 100%.
1 Frequency command (Hz) Max. frequency Pr.01-00 is regarded as 100%.
2 Motor speed (Hz) 600Hz is regarded as 100%
3 Output current (rms) (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
4 Output voltage (2 X rated voltage) is regarded as 100%
5 DC Bus Voltage 450V (900V)=100%
6 Power factor -1.000~1.000=100%
7 Power Rated power is regarded as 100%
8 Output torque Full-load torque is regarded as 100%
9 AVI 0~10V=0~100%
10 ACI 0~20mA=0~100%
11 AUI -10~10V=0~100%
12 q-axis current (Iq) (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
13 q-axis feedback value (Iq) (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
14 d-axis current (Id) (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
15 d-axis feedback value (Id) (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
16 q-axis voltage (Vq) 250V (500V) =100%
17 d-axis voltage(Vd) 250V (500V) =100%
18 Torque command Rated torque is regarded as 100%
19 Reserved
20 Output for CANopen control For CANopen analog output
For communication output (CMC-MOD01, CMC-EIP01,
21 RS485 analog output
CMC-PN01, CMC-DN01)
22 Reserved
Pr.03-32 and Pr.03-33 controls voltage/current output
23 Constant voltage/current output level
0~100% of Pr.03-32 corresponds to 0~10V of AFM1.

Gain of Analog Output 1 (AFM1)


Factory Setting: 100.0
Gain of Analog Output 2 (AFM2)
Factory Setting: 100.0
Settings 0~200.0%

11-63
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

It is used to adjust the analog voltage level (Pr.03-20) that terminal AFM outputs.
This parameter is set the corresponding voltage of the analog output 0.

Analog Output 1 when in REV Direction (AFM1)


Analog Output 2 when in REV Direction (AFM2)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Absolute value in REV direction
1: Output 0V in REV direction; output 0-10V in FWD direction
2: Output 5-0V in REV direction; output 5-10V in FWD direction
10V( 20mA) 10V( 20mA) 10V( 20mA)

03-18
03-21
0V 03-24 0V F requenc y 5V F requenc y
( 0mA) ( 0mA) ( 12mA)

03-22=0 03-22=1 03-22=2


03-25=0 03-25=1 03-25=2
Selections for the analog output dir ec ti on

Reserved
Reserved

AVI Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: 0-10V
1: 0-20mA
2: 4-20mA
ACI Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: 4-20mA
1: 0-10V
2: 0-20mA
When changing the input mode, please check if the switch of external terminal (SW3, SW4)
corresponds to the setting of Pr.03-28~03-29.

Status of PLC Output Terminal


Factory Setting: ##
Settings 0~65535
Monitor the status of PLC analog output terminals
P.03-30 shows the external multi-function output terminal that used by PLC.

11-64
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

0=ON
1=OFF
Weights 2 3 2 2 21 20
Bit 3 2 1 0 AFM 1
AFM 2
NOTE
3 2 1 0
2 =8 2 =4 2 =2 2 =1

For Example:
If the value of Pr.02-30 displays 0002h(Hex), it means AFM1and AFM2 are used by PLC.
Weig hts 2 3 2 2 21 20 0=No t used b y PL C
Bit 0 0 1 0 AFM 1 1=Used by PL C
AFM 2 Display value
2=1x21 +0x20
=bit 1x21 +bit 0x20

AFM2 0-20mA Output Selection


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: 0-20mA output
1: 4-20mA output

AFM1 DC Output Setting Level


AFM2 DC Output Setting Level
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~100.00%

~ Reserve

Keypad potentiometer Selection


Factory Setting:0
Settings 0: No Function
1: Frequency Command

Keypad potentiometer input Bias


Factory Setting:0.0
Settings -100.0~100.0%

Keypad potentiometer positive/negative Bias Mode


出廠設定值:0
Settings 0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving as the center

11-65
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

4: Serve bias as the center


Refer to Pr.03-07~03-09.

Keypad potentiometer input Gain


Factory Setting:100.0
Settings -500.0~500.0%

AFM1 DC output setting level Keypad potentiometer analog Input Filter Time
Factory Setting:0.01
Settings 0~2.00 sec.

~ Reserve

Analog Input Curve Selection


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Regular Curve
1: 3 point curve of AVI
2: 3 point curve of ACI
3: 3 point curve of AVI & ACI
4: 3 point curve of AUI
5: 3 point curve of AVI & AUI
6: 3 point curve of ACI & AUI
7: 3 point curve of AVI & ACI & AUI

AVI Low Point


Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 03-28=0, 0.00~10.00V
03-28≠0, 0.00~20.00mA
AVI Proportional Low Point
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~100.00%
AVI Mid Point
Factory Setting: 5.00
Settings 03-28=0, 0.00~10.00V
03-28≠0, 0.00~20.00mA
AVI Proportional Mid Point
Factory Setting: 50.00
Settings 0.00~100.00%
AVI High Point
Factory Setting: 10.00

11-66
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Settings 03-28=0, 0.00~10.00V


03-28≠0, 0.00~20.00mA
AVI Proportional High Point
Factory Setting: 100.00
Settings 0.00~100.00%
When Pr.03-28 = 0, AVI setting is 0-10V and the unit is in voltage (V).
When Pr.03-28 ≠ 0, AVI setting is 0-20mA or 4-20mA and the unit is in current (mA).
When setting analog input AVI to frequency command, it 100% corresponds to Fmax (Pr.01-00
Max. operation frequency).
Three of the AVI points can be set according to user’s demand on voltage(current) and proportion,
there is no setting limit for ACI points.

ACI Low Point


Factory Setting: 4.00
Settings Pr.03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V
Pr.03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA
ACI Proportional Low Point
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~100.00%
ACI Mid Point
Factory Setting: 12.00
Settings 03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V
03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA
ACI Proportional Mid Point
Factory Setting: 50.00
Settings 0.00~100.00%
ACI High Point
Factory Setting: 20.00
Settings 03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V
03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA
ACI Proportional High Point
Factory Setting: 100.00
Settings 0.00~100.00%
When Pr.03-29=1, ACI setting is 0-10V and the unit is in voltage (V).
When Pr.03-29≠1, ACI setting is 0-20mA or 4-20mA and the unit is in current (mA).
When setting analog input ACI to frequency command, it 100% corresponds to Fmax (Pr.01-00
Max. operation frequency).
Three of the ACI points can be set according to user’s demand on voltage (current) and proportion,
there is no setting limit for ACI points.

Positive AUI Voltage Low Point


Factory Setting: 0.00

11-67
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Settings 0.00~10.00V
Positive AUI Voltage Proportional Low Point
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~100.00%
Positive AUI Voltage Mid Point
Factory Setting: 5.00
Settings 0.00~10.00V
Positive AUI Voltage Proportional Mid Point
Factory Setting: 50.00
Settings 0.00~100.00%
Positive AUI Voltage High Point
Factory Setting: 10.00
Settings 0.00~10.00V
Positive AUI Voltage Proportional High Point
Factory Setting: 100.00
Settings 0.00~100.00%
When setting positive voltage AUI to frequency command, it 100% corresponds to Fmax (Pr.01-00
Max. operation frequency) and the motor runs in forward direction.
Three of the positive voltage AUI points can be set according to user’s demand on voltage and
proportion, there is no setting limit for AUI points.

Negative AUI Voltage Low Point


Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~-10.00V
Negative AUI Voltage Proportional Low Point
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~-100.00%
Negative AUI Voltage Mid Point
Factory Setting: -5.00
Settings 0.00~-10.00V
Negative AUI Voltage Proportional Mid Point
Factory Setting: -50.00
Settings 0.00~-100.00%
Negative AUI Voltage High Point
Factory Setting: -10.00
Settings 0.00~-10.00V
Negative AUI Voltage Proportional High Point
Factory Setting: -100.00
Settings 0.00~-100.00%
When setting negative voltage AUI to frequency command, it 100% corresponds to Fmax (Pr.01-00
Max. operation frequency) and the motor runs in reverse direction.

11-68
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Three of the negative voltage AUI points can be set according to user’s demand on voltage and
proportion, there is no setting limit for AUI points.

11-69
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

04 Multi-Step Speed Parameters This parameter can be set during operation.

1st Step Speed Frequency


2nd Step Speed Frequency
3rd Step Speed Frequency
4th Step Speed Frequency
5th Step Speed Frequency
6th Step Speed Frequency
7th Step Speed Frequency
8th Step Speed Frequency
9th Step Speed Frequency
10th Step Speed Frequency
11th Step Speed Frequency
12th Step Speed Frequency
13th Step Speed Frequency
14th Step Speed Frequency
15th Step Speed Frequency
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
The Multi-function Input Terminals (refer to setting 1~4 of Pr.02-01~02-08 and 02-26~02-31) are
used to select one of the AC motor drive Multi-step speeds(max. 15 speeds). The speeds
(frequencies) are determined by Pr.04-00 to 04-14 as shown in the following.
The run/stop command can be controlled by the external terminal/digital keypad/communication via
Pr.00-21.
Each one of multi-step speeds can be set within 0.0~600.0Hz during operation.
Explanation for the timing diagram for multi-step speeds and external terminals
The Related parameter settings are:
1. Pr.04-00~04-14: setting multi-step speeds (to set the frequency of each step speed)
2. Pr.02-01~02-08, 02-26~02-31: setting multi-function input terminals (multi-step speed 1~4)
„ Related parameters: 01-22 JOG Frequency, 02-01 Multi-function Input Command 1 (MI1),
02-02 Multi-function Input Command 2 (MI2), 02-03 Multi-function Input Command 3 (MI3),
02-04 Multi-function Input Command 4 (MI4)

11-70
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

04-07
F re que nc y
04-06
04-08
04-05
04-09
04-04
04-10
04-03
04-11
04-02
04-12 J OG F req.
04-01 01-22
04-13
04-00
04-14
Master Spee d

Run/ Sto p 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
PU/ ext ernal t erminals
/commu ni cat ion ON
1s t spee d
Mul ti -functi on

OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
02-0 1~02-08

2nd sp eed OFF ON ON ON ON


term inals
MI1~MI4

3rd spe ed OFF ON ON


4t h s peed OFF ON
Jog Freq. OFF ON
Mu lt i- speed via Ex te rnal Te rmin als

11-71
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

05 Motor Parameters This parameter can be set during operation.

Motor Auto Tuning


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: No function
1: Rolling test for induction motor (Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx, no-load current)
2: Rolling test for induction motor
4: Rolling test for PM motor magnetic pole
5: Rolling test for PM motor
6: Rolling test for IM motor flux curve
12: FOC Sensorless inertia estimation
13: High frequency and blocked rotor test for PM motor parameter
Induction Motor
Press [Run]to beging auto tuning. The measured value will be written into motor 1 (Pr.05-05 ~05-09,
Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx, no-load current) and motor 2 (Pr.05-17 to Pr.05-21) automatically.

To begin AUTO-Tuning in rolling test:


1. Make sure that all the parameters are set to factory settings and the motor wiring is correct.
2. Make sure the motor has no-load before executing auto-tuning and the shaft is not connected
to any belt or gear motor. It is recommended to set to 2 if the motor can’t separate from the
load.
3.
Motor 1 Parameter Motor 2 Parameter
Motor Rated Frequency 01-01 01-35
Motor Rated Voltage 01-02 01-36
Motor Full-load Current 05-01 05-13
Motor Rated Power 05-02 05-14
Motor Rated Speed 05-03 05-15
Motor Pole Numbers 05-04 05-16
4. Set Pr.05-00=1 and press [Run], the drive will begin auto-tuning. Please be aware of the motor
that it starts spinning as [Run] is pressed.
5. When auto-tuning is completed, please check if the measured values are written into motor 1
(Pr.05-05 ~05-09) and motor 2 (Pr.05-17 ~05-21) automatically.
6. Mechanical equivalent circuit
Rs
I Lx

P r.0 5- 09
P r.0 5- 06
P r.0 5- 21
P r.0 5- 18
VS Lm Rr
P r.0 5- 08 P r.0 5- 07
P r.0 5- 20 P r.0 5- 19

※ If Pr.05-00 is set to 2 (static test), user needs to input the no-load current value of motor
into Pr.05-05 for motor 1/Pr.05-17 for motor 2.

11-72
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

NOTE
; In torque/vector control mode, it is not recommended to have motors run in parallel.
; It is not recommended to use torque/vector control mode if motor rated power exceeds
the rated power of the AC motor drive.
; When auto-tuning 2 motors, it needs to set multi-function input terminals (setting 14) or
change Pr.05-22 for motor 1/motor 2 selection.
; The no-load current is usually 20~50% X rated current.
; The rated speed can not be greater than or equal to 120f/p (f = rated frequency
Pr.01-01/01-35; P: number of motor poles Pr.05-04/05-16).

Permanent Magnet Motor (PM)

Set Pr.05-00= 5 or 13 and press [Run] to begin auto tuning for PM motor. The
measured values will be written into Pr.05-39(Rs), Pr.05-40 & 41(Ld & Lq)and
Pr.05-43(PM motor’s Ke parameter).

To begin AUTO-Tuning for PM motor in rolling test:

1. Make sure all the parameters are reset to factory setting and the motor wiring installtion is
correct.
2. For PM motor, set Pr.05-33=1 and complete the following settings according to your motor
specifications, Pr.05-34 rated current, Pr.05-35 rated power, Pr.05-36 rated speed and Pr.
05-37 pole number. The acceleration time and deceleration time should be set according to
your motor capacity.
3. Set Pr.05-00 to 5 and press [Run] to begin auto tuning for PM motor. Please be aware of the
motor that it starts spinning as [Run] is pressed.
4. When auto-tuning is completed, please check if the measured values are written into
Pr.05-39~05-41 and Pr.05-43 automatically.

Set Pr.05-00=4 and press [Run] to begin auto-tuning for PM motor PG offset angle. The
measured value will be written into Pr.05-42 automatically.

; Note 1: When execute auto-tuning for PM motor PG origin, please make sure the
encoder setting are correct (Pr.10-00, 10-01, 10-02), otherwise the PG origin measure
error and motor stall may occur.

; Note 2: If PM motor runs in an opposite direction of the drive’s command, switch any
two of the UVW cable and re-connect, then execute PG origin search again. It is crucial
to execute auto-tuning after the switch otherwise PG origin measure error and motor
stall may occur.

Auto-tuning process for measuring PG offset angle of PM motor:

1. Set Pr.05-00=5 and press RUN, or manually input the values into Pr. 01-01, 05-34~-541 and
Pr.05-43.
2. It is strongly suggested to remove the motor and unload before beings auto-tuning.

11-73
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

3. Set Pr.05-00=4 and press [Run] to begin auto-tuning. Please be aware of the motor that it
starts spinning as [Run] is pressed.
4. When auto-tuning is completed, please check if the PG offset angle is written into Pr.05-42
automatically.
NOTE
When auto-tuning for PM motor is completed and the control mode setting is done, it is
recommend to turn the drive’s power off and restart again to ensure the drive operates according
to the motor parameter settings.

Full-load Current of Induction Motor 1(A)


Unit: Ampere
Factory Setting: #.##
Settings 10 to 120% of drive’s rated current
This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the motor
nameplate. The factory setting is 90% X rated current.
Example: The rated current for 7.5HP (5.5kW) is 25 and factory setting is 22.5A. The range for
setting will be 10~30A.(25*40%=10A and 25*120%=30A)

Rated Power of Induction Motor 1(kW)


Factory Setting: #.##
Settings 0~655.35 kW
It is used to set rated power of the motor 1. The factory setting is the power of the drive.

Rated Speed of Induction Motor 1 (rpm)


Factory Setting:
1710(60Hz 4 poles)
1410(50Hz 4 poles)
Settings 0~65535
It is used to set the rated speed of the motor and need to set according to the value indicated on
the motor nameplate.

Pole Number of Induction Motor 1


Factory Setting: 4
Settings 2~20
It is used to set the number of motor poles (must be an even number).

No-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (A)


Unit: Amper
Factory Setting: #.##
Settings 0 to the factory setting in Pr.05-01
The factory setting is 40% X rated current.

Stator Resistance(Rs) of Induction Motor 1


Rotor Resistance(Rr) of Induction Motor 1

11-74
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory Setting: #.###


Settings 0~65.535Ω

Magnetizing Inductance(Lm) of Induction Motor 1


Stator inductance(Lx) of Induction Motor 1
Factory Setting: #.#
Settings 0~6553.5mH

~ Reserved

Full-load Current of Induction Motor 2(A)


Unit: Ampere
Factory Setting:#.##
Settings 10~120%
This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the motor
nameplate. The factory setting is 90% X rated current.
Example: The rated current for 7.5HP (5.5kW) is 25A and factory setting is 22.5A. The range for
setting will be 10~30A.(25*40%=10A and 25*120%=30A)

Rated Power of Induction Motor 2 (kW)


Factory Setting: #.##
Settings 0~655.35 kW
It is used to set rated power of the motor 2. The factory setting is the power of the drive.

Rated Speed of Induction Motor 2 (rpm)


Factory Setting: 1710
Settings 0~65535
It is used to set the rated speed of the motor and need to set according to the value indicated on
the motor nameplate.

Pole Number of Induction Motor 2


Factory Setting: 4
Settings 2~20
It is used to set the number of motor poles (must be an even number).

No-load Current of Induction Motor 2 (A)


Unit: Ampere
Factory Setting: #.##
Settings 0 to the factory setting in Pr.05-01
The factory setting is 40% X rated current.

11-75
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Stator Resistance (Rs) of Induction Motor 2


Rotor Resistance (Rr) of Induction Motor 2
Factory Setting: #.###
Settings 0~65.535Ω

Magnetizing Inductance (Lm) of Induction Motor 2


Stator Inductance (Lx) of Induction Motor 2
Factory Setting: #.#
Settings 0~6553.5 mH

Induction Motor 1/ 2 Selection


Factory Setting: 1
Settings 1: Motor 1
2: Motor 2
It is used to set the motor that driven by the AC motor drive.

Frequency for Y-connection/△-connection Switch of Induction Motor


Factory Setting: 60.00
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz

Y-connection/△-connection Switch of Induction Motor IM


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Enable

Delay Time for Y-connection/△-connection Switch of Induction Motor


Factory Setting: 0.200
Settings 0.000~60.000 sec
P.05-23 and Pr.05-25 are applied in the wide range motors and the motor coil will execute the
switch of Y-connection/Δ-connection as required. (The wide range motors has relation with the
motor design. In general, it has higher torque at low speed and Y-connection and it has higher
speed at high speed and connection.
Pr.05-24 is used to enable/disable Y-connection/Δ-connection Switch.
When Pr.05-24 is set to 1, the drive will select by Pr.05-23 setting and current motor frequency to
switch motor to Y-connection or Δ-connection. At the same time, it will also affect motor
parameters.
Pr.05-25 is used to set the switch delay time of Y-connection/Δ-connection.
When output frequency reaches Y-connection/Δ-connection switch frequency, drive will delay by
Pr.05-25 before multi-function output terminals are active.

11-76
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

-connection is finishe d U
Pr.02-01 ~08 =30
MI1 V
W
-connecti on c ontrol W V U
Y-c onnec tion is finis hed
Pr.02-13~14=32
Pr.02-01 ~08 =29
MI2 RA
Y-c onnec tion control IM
Pr.02-11~14=31
MRA
X Y Z

Y- connection switch: can be used for wide range motor


Y -connection for low speed: higher torque can be used for rigid tapping
-connecti on fo r high spe ed: h igher torque can be u sed for hig h-speed dril ling

If switch poi nt is 60Hz,


the accel . switch point i s 62Hz
Decel. sw itch point is 58Hz
Pr.05-23
Y-△ switch
frequency In this area, motor i s i n free Bandwidth is 2Hz
run status . AC motor driv e Motor s peed w ill
Motor s peed/ stops outputti ng.
decrease
frequency by load inertia.
Pr. 05-25 Delay Time for Y-c onnection
/D -c onnec tion( Min. is 0.2 seconds)
Y-connection output ON Pr.02-13~14=31 ON

Y-conenction ON ON
Pr.02-13~14=29
confirmation input

△-connection output ON
Pr.02-13~14=32
△-connection ON
confirmation input
Pr.02-13~14=30 : mechanical bounc e time
f ree run stat us

output
frequency
Y-c onnection out put
ON
Pr.02-13~14=31
Y-c onnection
confir mat ion input ON
Pr. 02-01~08=29
△-connec ti on output
ON
Pr. 02-13~14=32
△-connect ion
confir mat ion input
Pr. 02-01~08=30
Y -△ s witch err or ON
f requency
2 seconds
delay ti me
Pr.05-25

Accumulative Watt Per Second of Motor in Low Word (W-sec)

11-77
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory Setting: #.#


Settings Read only
Accumulative Watt Per Second of Motor in High Word (W-sec)
Factory Setting: #.#
Settings Read only
Accumulative Watt-hour of Motor (W-Hour)
Factory Setting: #.#
Settings Read only
Accumulative Watt-hour of Motor in Low Word (KW-Hour)
Factory Setting: #.#
Settings Read only
Accumulative Watt-hour of Motor in High Word (KW-Hour)
Factory Setting: #.#
Settings Read only
Pr.05-26~05-29 records the amount of power consumed by motors. The accumulation begins
when the drive is activated and record is saved when the drive stops or turns OFF. The amount of
consumed watts will continue to accumulate when the drive activate again. To clear the
accumulation, set Pr.00-02 to 5 then the accumulation record will return to 0.

Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Min)


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 00~1439
Accumulative Motor Operation Time (day)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 00~65535
Pr. 05-31 and Pr.05-32 are used to record the motor operation time. To clear the operation time, set
Pr.05-31 and Pr.05-32 to 00. Operation time shorter than 60 seconds will not be recorded.

Induction Motor (IM) and Permanent Magnet Motor Selection


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Induction Motor
1: Permanent Magnet Motor

Full-load current of Permanent Magnet Motor


Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~655.35 Amps

Rated Power of Permanent Magnet Motor


Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~655.35 kW

Rated speed of Permanent Magnet Motor

11-78
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory Setting: 2000


Settings 0~65535 rpm

Pole number of Permanent Magnet Motor


Factory Setting: 10
Settings 0~65535

Inertia of Permanent Magnet Motor


Factory Setting: 0.0
2 2
Settings 0.0~6553.5 kg.cm (0.0001kg.m )
This parameter setting is defined in kg-cm2 . If this measure is not familiar to you, please refer to
the chart below. (Delta’s motor inertia chart is for reference purpose only.)
Delta Motor (Low inertia model)
Rated Power(kW) 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.75 1 2
Rotor inertia (kg.m^2) 3.70E-06 1.77E-05 2.77E-05 6.80E-05 1.13E-04 2.65E-04 4.45E-04

Delta Motor (Mid to High Inertia model)


Rated Power(kW) 0.5 1 1.5 2 2 0.3 0.6 0.9
Rotor inertia (kg.m^2) 8.17E-04 8.41E-04 1.12E-03 1.46E-03 3.47E-03 8.17E-04 8.41E-04 1.12E-03
※ For more information on motor inertia value, please refer to Pr.11-01.

Stator Resistance of PM Motor


Factory Setting: 0.000
Settings 0.000~65.535Ω

Permanent Magnet Motor Ld


Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~655.35 mH

Permanent Magnet Motor Lq


Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~655.35 mH

PG Offset angle of PM Motor


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0.0~360.0°
When Pr.05-00 is set to 4, the drive will detect offset angle and write into Pr.05-42.

Ke parameter of PM Motor
Unit: V/1000rpm
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~65535

11-79
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

06 Protection Parameters This parameter can be set during operation.

Low Voltage Level


Factory Setting:
Settings 230V Series: 150.o~ 220.0 Vdc 180.0
460V Series: 300.0~440.0V 360.0
It is used to set the Lv level. When the drive is in the low voltage, it will stop output and free to stop.

input voltage

30V(60V)

Pr. 06-00

LV

Over-voltage Stall Prevention


Factory Setting: 380.0/760.0
Settings 230V Series: 0.0~450.0V
460V Series:0.0~900.0V
0: Disabled
When Pr.06-01 is set to 0.0, the over-voltage stall prevention function is disabled.
During deceleration, the DC bus voltage may exceed its Maximum Allowable Value due to motor
regeneration. When this function is enabled, the AC motor drive will not decelerate further and
keep the output frequency constant until the voltage drops below the preset value again.
This function is used for the occasion that the load inertia is unsure. When it stops in the normal
load, the over-voltage won’t occur during deceleration and fulfill the setting of deceleration time.
Sometimes, it may not stop due to over-voltage during decelerating to stop when increasing the
load regenerative inertia. At this moment, the AC drive will auto add the deceleration time until drive
stop.
When the over-voltage stall prevention is enabled, drive deceleration time will be larger than the
setting.
When there is any problem as using deceleration time, refer to the following items to solve it.
1. Add the suitable deceleration time.
2. Add brake resistor (refer to appendix B-1 for details) to consume the electrical energy that
regenerated from the motor with heat type.
„ Related parameters: Pr.01-13, 01-15, 01-17, 01-19 (settings of decel. time 1~4), Pr.02-13~02-14
(Multi-function Output 1 RY1, RY2), Pr. 02-16~02-17 Multi-function Output (MO1, 2)

11-80
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

High-vo ltage
a t DC si de

Ov er-v ol tage
detec ti on
level

Time
Ou tpu t
frequen cy

F requenc y Held

Deceleration c har acteristic


when Ov er-Voltag e Stall
Pr ev entio n enabled

Time
pre vious deceleration time
requir ed time for d ecelerating to 0Hz when over- voltage
stall preven tion is enab led.

Selection for Over-voltage Stall Prevention


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Traditional over-voltage stall prevention
1: Smart over-voltage prevention
When Pr.06-02 is set to 1, the drive will maintain DCbus voltage when decelerating and prevent
OV.

60Hz Output Frequency

DCBUS Voltage
370Vdc
310Vdc

0 Time
230V Series

Over-current Stall Prevention during Acceleration

Settings Normal duty: 0~160% (100%: drive’s rated current) Factory Setting: 120
Heavy duty: 0~180% (100%: drive’s rated current) Factory Setting: 150
If the motor load is too large or drive acceleration time is too short, the AC drive output current may
increase abruptly during acceleration and it may cause motor damage or trigger protection
functions (OL or OC). This parameter is used to prevent this situation.

11-81
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

During acceleration, the AC drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value
specified by Pr.06-03 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor. When this function
is enabled, the AC drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant until the
current drops below the maximum value.
When the over-current stall prevention is enabled, drive deceleration time will be larger than the
setting.
When the Over-Current Stall Prevention occurs due to too small motor capacity or in the factory
setting, please decrease Pr.06-03 setting.
When there is any problem by using acceleration time, refer to the following items to solve it.
Related parameters: Pr.01-12, 01-14, 01-16, 01-18 (settings of accel. time 1~4), Pr.01-44
1. dd the suitable acceleration time.
2. Setting Pr.01-44 Optimal Acceleration/Deceleration Setting to 1, 3 or 4 (auto accel.)
Optimal Acceleration/Deceleration Setting, Pr.02-13~02-14 (Multi-function Output 1 RY1, RY2), Pr.
02-16~02-17 Multi-function Output (MO1, 2)
Output current
06-03
Setting frequency
Over-Current
Detection
Level
Output frequency
Over-Current Stall prevention during
Acceleration,frequency held

Time
Original setting of acceleration time
actual acceleration time when over-current stall
prevention is enabled

Over-current Stall Prevention during Operation

Settings Normal duty: 0~160% (100%: drive’s rated current) Factory Setting: 120
Heavy duty: 0~180% (100%: drive’s rated current) Factory Setting: 150
It is a protection for drive to auto decrease output frequency when the motor is over-load abruptly
during motor constant operation.
If the output current exceeds the setting specified in Pr.06-04 when the drive is operating, the drive
will decrease its output frequency (according to Pr.06-05) to prevent the motor stall. If the output
current is lower than the setting specified in Pr.06-04, the drive will accelerate (according to
Pr.06-05) again to catch up with the set frequency command value.

11-82
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Ov er-Curr ent
D etec tion Level
06-04 Pr . 06-04 s etting
Current

Pr . 06-04 s et ting-
rated dr ive c urrent X 5%
Ov er-C urr ent Stall P revention
during Operation, output
frequency dec reases

D ecreases by Output
deceleration t ime F requenc y

T ime
over- curr ent stall pr eventi on during oper ation

Accel./Decel. Time Selection of Stall Prevention at Constant Speed


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: by current accel/decel time
1: by the 1st accel/decel time
2: by the 2nd accel/decel time
3: by the 3rd accel/decel time
4: by the 4th accel/decel time
5: by auto accel/decel
It is used to set the accel./decel. time selection when stall prevention occurs at constant speed.

Over-torque Detection Selection (OT1)


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, continue to
operate after detection
2: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, stop operation
after detection
3: Over-torque detection during operation, continue to operate after detection
4: Over-torque detection during operation, stop operation after detection
Over-torque Detection Selection (OT2)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, continue to
operate after detection
2: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, stop operation
after detection
3: Over-torque detection during operation, continue to operation after
detection
4: Over-torque detection during operation, stop operation after detection

11-83
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

When Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09 are set to 1 or 3, it will display a warning message and won’t have an
abnormal record.
When Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09 are set to 2 or 4, it will display a warning message and will have an
abnormal record.

Over-torque Detection Level (OT1)


Factory Setting: 120
Settings 10 to 250% (100%: drive’s rated current)
Over-torque Detection Level (OT1)
Factory Setting: 0.1
Settings 0.0~60.0 sec
Over-torque Detection Level (OT2)
Factory Setting: 120
Settings 10 to 250% (100%: drive’s rated current)
Over-torque Detection Time (OT2)
Factory Setting: 0.1
Settings 0.0~60.0 sec
Over torque detection is determine by the following method: if the output current exceeds the
over-torque detection level (Pr.06-07, factory setting: 150%) and also exceeds Pr.06-08
Over-Torque Detection Time, the fault code “ot1/ot2” will appear. If a Multi-Functional Output
Terminal is to over-torque detection (setting 7 or 8), the output is on. Please refer to
Pr.02-13~02-14 for details.
current

5%
Pr.06-07,
Pr.06-10

Pr.06-08, 06-11

Current Limit
Factory Setting: 150
Settings 0~250% (100%: drive’s rated current)
Pr.06-12 sets the maximum output current of the drive. Pr.06-12 and Pr.11-17 ~ Pr.11-20 are used
to set the drive’s output current limit. When the drive is in VF, SVC or VFPG control mode, output
frequency will decreases as the output current reaches current limit. It is a current stall prevention.

Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 1)


Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 2)
Factory Setting: 2
Settings 0: Inverter motor

11-84
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

1: Standard motor
2: Disable
It is used to prevent self-cooled motor overheats under low speed. User can use electronic thermal
relay to limit driver’s output power.

Electronic Thermal Characteristic for Motor 1


Electronic Thermal Characteristic for Motor 2
Factory Setting: 60.0
Settings 30.0~600.0 sec
The parameter is set by the 150% of motor rated current and the setting of Pr.06-14 and Pr.06-28 to
prevent the motor damaged from overheating. When it reaches the setting, it will display
“EoL1/EoL2” and the motor will be in free running.

Operation
time(min)
5
60Hz or more
4
50Hz
3 10Hz
5Hz
2

1
Load
0 20 40 60 80100120140160180200 factor (%)

Heat Sink Over-heat (OH) Warning


Factory Setting: 85.0
Settings 0.0~110.0℃
Pr.06-15 sets the heat sink temperature level of the drive. The drive will output an overheating
warning when the temperature exceeds the setting of Pr.06-15. If the setting of Pr.06-15 is higher
than the default setting of the drive, the drive will use the default setting level for warning output.
Capacitor (CAP) overheating level is set by the drive’s default setting, it can not be adjusted.

Over-heating Level (℃) Over-heating Level (℃)


Model IGBT OH1 CAP OH 2 Model IGBT OH1 CAP OH 2
VFD004CB21A-20 100 95 VFD022CB23A-20 100 95
VFD007CB21A-20 100 95 VFD037CB23A-20 100 95
VFD004CB23A-20 100 95 VFD022CB43A-20 100 95
VFD007CB23A-20 100 95 VFD037CB43A-20 100 100
VFD007CB43A-20 100 95 VFD015CB21A-21M 100 95
VFD015CB43A-20 100 95 VFD022CB21A-21M 100 95
VFD015CB23A-20 100 95 VFD022CB23A-21M 100 95
VFD004CB21A-21M 100 95 VFD037CB23A-21M 100 95
VFD007CB21A-21M 100 95 VFD022CB43A-21M 100 95
VFD007CB23A-21M 100 95 VFD037CB43A-21M 100 100
VFD004CB43A-21M 100 95 VFD040CB43A-20 100 90
VFD007CB43A-21M 100 95 VFD055CB43A-20 100 90

11-85
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Over-heating Level (℃) Over-heating Level (℃)


VFD015CB43A-21M 100 95 VFD075CB43A-20 100 110
VFD015CB23A-21M 100 95 VFD040CB43A-21M 100 90
VFD015CB21A-20 100 95 VFD055CB43A-21M 100 90
VFD022CB21A-20 100 95 VFD075CB43A-21M 100 110

Stall Prevention Limit Level


Factory Setting: 50
Settings 0~100% (Refer to Pr.06-03, Pr.06-04)
When operation frequency is larger than Pr.01-01; e.g. Pr06-03=150%, Pr. 06-04=100% and Pr.
06-16=80%:
Calculate the Stall Prevention Level during acceleration: Pr.06-03 * Pr.06-16=150x80%=120%.
Calculate the Stall Prevention Level at constant speed: Pr.06-04 * Pr.06-16=100x80%=80%.

Present Fault Record


Second Most Recent Fault Record
Third Most Recent Fault Record
Fourth Most Recent Fault Record
Fifth Most Recent Fault Record
Sixth Most Recent Fault Record
Settings
0: No fault record
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
3: Over-current during constant speed(ocn)
4: Ground fault (GFF)
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
6: Over-current at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
14: Stop mid-low voltage (LvS)
15: Phase loss protection (OrP)
16: IGBT over-heat (oH1)
17: Capacitance over-heat (oH2) (for 40hp above)
18: tH1o (TH1 open: IGBT over-heat
protection error)
19: tH2o (TH2 open: capacitance over-heat
protection error)

11-86
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

20: Reserved
21: Drive over-load (oL)
22: Electronics thermal relay 1 (EoL1)
23: Electronics thermal relay 2 (EoL2)
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3) (PTC)
25: Reserved
26: Over-torque 1 (ot1)
27: Over-torque 2 (ot2)
28: Low current (uC)
29: Reserved
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
32: Reserved
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
39: occ IGBT short circuit detection error (Hd3)
40: Auto tuning error (AUE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
46: Reserved
47: Reserved
48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
50: Emergency stop (EF1)
51: External Base Block (bb)
52: Password error (PcodE)
53: Reserved
54: Communication error (CE1)
55: Communication error (CE2)
56: Communication error (CE3)
57: Communication error (CE4)
58: Communication Time-out (CE10)
59: Reserved
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection/△-connection switch error (ydc)

11-87
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb)


63: Slip error (oSL)
64: Electromagnet switch error (ryF)
65 : PG Card Error (PGF5)
66-78: Reserved
79: Uocc U phase over current (Detection begins as RUN is pressed,
software protection)
80: Vocc V phase over current (Detection begins as RUN is pressed,
software protection)
81: Wocc W phase over current (Detection begins as RUN is pressed,
software protection)
82: OPHL U phase output phase loss
83: OPHL Vphase output phase loss
84: OPHL Wphase output phase loss
85~100: Reserved
101: CGdE CANopen software disconnect1
102: CHbE CANopen software disconnect2
103: CSYE CANopen synchronous error
104: CbFE CANopen hardware disconnect
105: CIdE CANopen index setting error
106: CAdE CANopen slave station number setting error
107: CFrE CANopen index setting exceed limit
108~110: Reserved
111: InrCOM Internal communication overtime error
When the fault occurs and force stopping, it will record in this parameter.
At stop with low voltage Lv (LvS warn, no record). During operation with mid-low voltage Lv (LvA,
Lvd, Lvn error, will record).
Setting 62: when dEb function is enabled, the drive will execute dEb and record to the Pr.06-17 to
Pr.06-22 simultaneously.

Fault Output Option 1


Fault Output Option 2
Fault Output Option 3
Fault Output Option 4
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 to 65535 sec (refer to bit table for fault code)
These parameters can be used with multi-function output (set to 35-38) for the specific
requirement. When the fault occurs, the corresponding terminals will be activated (It needs
to convert binary value to decimal value to fill in Pr.06-23 to Pr.06-26).
Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6
Fault Code
current Volt. OL SYS FBK EXI CE
0: No fault
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA) ●

11-88
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6


Fault Code
current Volt. OL SYS FBK EXI CE
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd) ●
3: Over-current during constant speed(ocn) ●
4: Ground fault (GFF) ●
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ) ●
6: Over-current at stop (ocS) ●
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA) ●
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd) ●
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn) ●
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS) ●
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA) ●
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd) ●
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn) ●
14: Stop mid-low voltage (LvS ) ●
15: Phase loss protection (OrP) ●
16: IGBT over-heat (oH1) ●
17: Capacitance over-heat (oH2) ●
18: tH1o (TH1 open) ●
19: tH2o (TH2 open) ●
20: Reserved
21: Drive over-load (oL) ●
22: Electronics thermal relay 1 (EoL1) ●
23: Electronics thermal relay 2 (EoL2) ●
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3) (PTC) ●
25: Reserved
26: Over-torque 1 (ot1) ●
27: Over-torque 2 (ot2) ●
28: Low current (uC) ●
29: Reserved
30: Memory write-in error (cF1) ●
31: Memory read-out error (cF2) ●
32: Reserved
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1) ●
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2) ●
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3) ●
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0) ●
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1) ●
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2) ●
39: occ IGBT short circuit detection error (Hd3) ●

11-89
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6


Fault Code
current Volt. OL SYS FBK EXI CE
40: Auto tuning error (AUE) ●
41: PID feedback loss (AFE) ●
42: PG feedback error (PGF1) ●
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2) ●
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3) ●
45: PG slip error (PGF4) ●
46: Reserved
47: Reserved
48: Analog current input loss (ACE) ●
49: External fault input (EF) ●
50: Emergency stop (EF1) ●
51: External Base Block (bb) ●
52: Password error (PcodE) ●
53: Reserved
54: Communication error (CE1) ●
55: Communication error (CE2) ●
56: Communication error (CE3) ●
57: Communication error (CE4) ●
58: Communication Time-out (CE10) ●
59: Reserved
60: Brake transistor error (bF) ●
61: Y-connection/△-connection switch error ●
(ydc)
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb) ●
63: Slip error (oSL) ●
64: Electromagnet switch error (ryF) ●
65 : PG Card Error (PGF5) ●
66-78: Reserved
79: U phase over current (Uocc) ●
80: V phase over current (Vocc) ●
81: W phase over current (Wocc) ●
82: OPHL U phase output phase loss ●
83: OPHL Vphase output phase loss ●
84: OPHL Wphase output phase loss ●
85~100: Reserved
101: CGdE CANopen software disconnect1 ●
102: CHbE CANopen software disconnect2 ●
103: CSYE CANopen synchronous error ●

11-90
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6


Fault Code
current Volt. OL SYS FBK EXI CE
104: CbFE CANopen hardware disconnect ●
105: CIdE CANopen index setting error ●
106: CAdE CANopen slave station number ●
setting error
107: CFrE CANopen index setting exceed limit ●
108~110: Reserved
111: InrCOM Internal communication overtime ●
error

PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) Detection Selection


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Warn and keep operating
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning
Pr.06-29 setting defines how the will drive operate after PTC detection.

PTC Level
Factory Setting: 50.0
Settings 0.0~100.0%
It needs to set AVI/ACI/AUI analog input function Pr.03-00~03-02 to 6 (P.T.C. thermistor input
value).
It is used to set the PTC level, and the corresponding value for 100% is max. analog input value.

Frequency Command for Malfunction


Factory Setting: Read only
Settings 0.00~655.35Hz
When malfunction occurs, use can check the frequency command. If it happens again, it will
overwrite the previous record.

Output Frequency at Malfunction


Factory Setting: Read only
Settings 0.00~655.35Hz
When malfunction occurs, use can check the current frequency command. If it happens
again, it will overwrite the previous record.

Output Voltage at Malfunction


Factory Setting: Read only
Settings 0.0~6553.5V
When malfunction occurs, user can check current output voltage. If it happens again, it will
overwrite the previous record.

DC Voltage at Malfunction

11-91
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Factory Setting: Read only


Settings 0.0~6553.5V
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current DC voltage. If it happens again, it will
overwrite the previous record.

Output Current at Malfunction


Factory Setting: Read only
Settings 0.00~655.35Amp
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current output current. If it happens again, it will
overwrite the previous record.

IGBT Temperature at Malfunction


Factory Setting: Read only
Settings 0.0~6553.5℃
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current IGBT temperature. If it happens again, it will
overwrite the previous record.

Capacitance Temperature at Malfunction


Factory Setting: Read only
Settings 0.0~6553.5℃
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current capacitance temperature. If it happens again,
it will overwrite the previous record.

Motor Speed in rpm at Malfunction


Factory Setting: Read only
Settings 0.0~6553.5℃
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current motor speed in rpm. If it happens again, it will
overwrite the previous record.

Torque Command at Malfunction


Factory Setting: Read only
Settings 0~65535
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current torque command. If it happens again, it will
overwrite the previous record.

Status of Multi-function Input Terminal at Malfunction


Factory Setting: Read only
Settings 0000h~FFFFh
Status of Multi-function Output Terminal at Malfunction
Factory Setting: Read only
Settings 0000h~FFFFh
When malfunction occurs, user can check the status of multi-function input/output terminals. If it
happens again, it will overwrite the previous record.

11-92
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Drive Status at Malfunction


Factory Setting: Read only
Settings 0000H~FFFFh
When malfunction occurs, please check the drive status (communication address 2119H). If
malfunction happens again, the previous record will be overwritten by this parameter.

Reserved
Reserved

Treatment to Output Phase Loss Detection (OPHL)


Factory Setting: 3
Settings 0: Warn and keep operating
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning
Pr.06-45 defines how the drive will operates when output phase loss occur.

Deceleration Time of Output Phase Loss


Factory Setting:0.500
Settings 0.000~65.535 sec

Current Bandwidth
Factory Setting:1.00
Settings 0.00~100.00%

DC Brake Time of Output Phase Loss


Factory Setting:0.000
Settings 0.000~65.535 sec

Reserved

Time for Input Phase Loss Detection


Factory Setting:0.20
Settings 0.00~600.00 sec

Reserved

Ripple of Input Phase Loss


Factory Setting:30.0 / 60.0
Settings 230V Series: 0.0~160.0 Vdc
460V Series: 0.0~320.0 Vdc

11-93
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Treatment for the detected Input Phase Loss (OrP)


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: warn, ramp to stop
1: warn, coast to stop
Over ripple protection

Reserved

Derating Protection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: constant rated current and limit carrier wave by load current and
temperature
1: constant carrier frequency and limit load current by setting carrier wave
2: constant rated current(same as setting 0), but close current limit
Setting 0:
When the rated current is constant, carrier frequency (Fc) outputted by PWM will auto decrease
according to surrounding temperature, overload output current and time. If overload situation is
not frequent and only cares the carrier frequency operated with the rated current for a long time
and carrier wave changes during short overload, it is recommended to set to 0.

Refer to the following diagram for the level of carrier frequency. Take VFD007CB43A-20 in normal
duty as example, surrounding temperature 50oC with independent installation and UL open-type.
When the carrier frequency is set to 15kHz, it corresponds to 72% rated output current. When it
outputs higher than the value, it will auto decrease the carrier frequency. If the output is 83% rated
current and the carrier frequency will decrease to 12kHz. In addition, it will also decrease the
carrier frequency when overload. When the carrier frequency is 15kHz and the current is
120%*72%=86% for a minute, the carrier frequency will decrease to the factory setting.
Setting 1:
It is used for the fixed carrier frequency and prevents the carrier wave changes and motor noise
caused by the surrounding temperature and frequent overload.

Refer to the following for the derating level of rated current. Take VFD007CB43A-20 in normal
duty as example, when the carrier frequency keeps in 15kHz and the rated current is decreased to
72%, it will have OL protection when the current is 120%*72%=86% for a minute. Therefore, it
needs to operate by the curve to keep the carrier frequency.
Setting 2:
It sets the protection method and action to 0 and disables the current limit for the Ratio*160% of
output current in the normal duty and Ratio*180% of output current in the heavy duty. The
advantage is that it can provide higher output current when the setting is higher than the factory
setting of carrier frequency. The disadvantage is that it decreases carrier wave easily when
overload.

11-94
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Derating curve diagram in the heavy duty (Pr.00-16=1)


Pr.06-55 =1 Pr.06-55 =0 or 2
Pr.06-55 =0 or 2 (40℃: UL open-type)
(50℃: UL open-type) (30℃: UL type1 or open type_size by size)
(40℃: UL type1 or open type_size by size)
460V 460V
VFD007~075CB43A VFD007~075CB43A
110 110
100 100
Ratio(%)

Ratio(%)
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
Fc Fc
40 (kHz) 40
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
(kHz)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

230V 230V
Pr.06-55 =1 Pr.06-55 =0 or 2
Pr.06-55 =0 or 2 (40℃: UL open-type)
(50℃: UL open-type) (30℃: UL type1 or open type_size by size)

(40℃: UL type1 or open type_size by size)

VFD004~037CB23A
VFD004~022CB21A VFD004~037CB23A
110 VFD004~022CB21A
100 110
90 100
Ratio(%)

Ratio(%)

80 90
70 80
60 70
50 60
Fc
40 (kHz) 50
Fc
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
40
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
(kHz)

Derating curve diagram in the normal duty (Pr.00-16=0)


Pr.06-55 =1 Pr.06-55 =0 or 2
Pr.06-55 =0 or 2 (40℃: UL open-type)
(50℃: UL open-type) (30℃: UL type1 or open type_size by size)
(40℃:UL type1 or open type_size by size)
460V 460V
VFD007~075CB43A VFD007~075CB43A
110 110
100 100
Ratio(%)

Ratio(%)

90 90

80 80

70 70
Fc Fc
60 60
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 (kHz) 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
(kHz)

11-95
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

230V 230V
Pr.06-55=1 Pr.06-55=0 or 2
Pr.06-55=0 or 2 (40℃: UL open-type)
(50℃: UL open-type) (30℃: UL type1 or open type_size by size)
(40℃:UL type1 or open type_size by size)
VFD004~037CB23A VFD004~037CB23A
VFD004~022CB21A VFD004~022CB21A
110 110
100 100

Ratio(%)
90 90
Ratio(%)

80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
Fc Fc
40 (kHz) 40 (kHz)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

NOTE
※ The mounting clearances stated in the figure is for installing the drive in
an open area. To install the drive in a confined space (such as cabinet
or electric box), please follow the following three rules: (1) Keep the
minimum mounting clearances. (2) Install a ventilation equipment or an
air conditioner to keep surrounding temperature lower than operation
temperature. (3) Refer to parameter setting and set up Pr. 00-16,
Pr.00-17, and Pr. 06-55.
※ The following table shows heat dissipation and the required air volume
when installing a single drive in a confined space. When installing
multiple drives, the required air volume shall be multiplied by the
number the drives.
※ Refer to the chart (Air flow rate for cooling) for ventilation equipment
design and selection.
※ Refer to the chart (Power dissipation) for air conditioner design and
selection.
Minimum mounting clearances:
Frame A (mm) B (mm) C (mm) D (mm)
A~C 60 30 10 0

Air flow rate for cooling Power Dissipation


Flow Rate Flow Rate Loss External
Model No. Internal Total
(cfm) (m3/hr) (Heat sink)
VFD004CB21A-20/-21/-21M - - 16 20 36
VFD007CB21A-20/-21/-21M - - 32 39 72
VFD015CB21A-20/-21/-21M 15 26 60 52 112
VFD022CB21A-20/-21/-21M 15 26 85 69 154
VFD004CB23A-20/-21/-21M - - 21 17 37
VFD007CB23A-20/-21/-21M - - 35 26 61
VFD015CB23A-20/-21/-21M 15 26 56 32 89
VFD022CB23A-20/-21/-21M 15 26 82 34 116
VFD037CB23A-20/-21/-21M 15 26 118 43 161
VFD007CB43A-20/-21/-21M - - 35 24 59
VFD015CB43A-20/-21/-21M - - 47 27 74
VFD022CB43A-20/-21/-21M 15 26 75 30 105
VFD037CB43A-20/-21/-21M 15 26 110 33 143
VFD040CB43A-20/-21/-21M 15 26 126 34 160
VFD055CB43A-20/-21/-21M 15 26 145 37 181
VFD075CB43A-20/-21/-21M 24 41 212 83 295
※ The required airflow shown in chart is for installing one ※ The heat dissipation shown in the chart is for

11-96
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

drive in confined space. installing single drive in a confined space.


※ When installing the multiple drives, the required air volume ※ When installing multiple drives, volume of heat
should be the required air volume for single drive X the dissipation should be the heat dissipated for single
number of the drives. drive X the number of the drives.
※ Heat dissipation for each model is calculated by
rated voltage, current and default carrier.

~ Reserved

Software Detection GFF Current Level


Factory Setting: 60.0
Settings 0.0~6553.5 %

Software Detection GFF Filter Time


Factory Setting: 0.10
Settings 0.0~6553.5 %

Disable Level of dab


Factory Setting: 180.0/360.0
Settings 230V series: 0.0~220.0 Vic
460V series: 0.0~440.0 Vic

Fault Record 1 (min)


Fault Record 2 (min)
Fault Record 3 (min)
Fault Record 4 (min)
Fault Record 5 (min)
Fault Record 6 (min)
Factory Setting: Read only
Settings 0~64799 min
Pr.06-63 to Pr.06-68 are used to record the operation time for 6 malfunctions and it can also check
if there is any wrong with the drive according to the internal time.
When the malfunction occurs during operation, it records fault in Pr.06-17~06-22 and operation
time is recorded in Pr.06-63~06-68.
For example: When the first fault ovA occurs after operation 3000 min., second fault ovd occurs at
3482 min., third fault ovA occurs at 4051 min., fourth fault ocA at 5003 min., fifth fault ocA at 5824
min., sixth fault ocd occurs at 6402 min. and seven fault ocS at 6951 min..
It’ll be recorded as the following table:

11-97
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

It will be recorded as the following table:


First fault Pr.06-17 ovA Pr.06-63 3000 ovA occurs at the 3000 min
after operating.

Second fault Pr.06-17 ovd Pr.06-63 3482 3482-3000=482 min


ovd occurs at 482 min after
last fault (ovA)
Pr.06-18 ovA Pr.06-64 3000

Third fault Pr.06-17 ovA Pr.06-63 4051 4051-3482=569 min


ovA occurs at 569 min after
last fault (ovd)
Pr.06-18 ovd Pr.06-64 3482
Pr.06-19 ovA Pr.06-65 3000

Seven fault Pr.06-17 ocS Pr.06-63 12 (12-5824)+64800=58988 min


ocS occurs at 58988 min after
last fault (ocA)
Pr.06-18 ocA Pr.06-64 5824
Pr.06-19 ocA Pr.06-65 5003
Pr.06-20 ovA Pr.06-66 4051
Pr.06-21 ovd Pr.06-67 3482
Pr.06-22 ovA Pr.06-68 3000

Time interval between errors occur (day)


Factory Setting: Read only
Settings Read only

Time interval between errors occur (minute)


Factory Setting: Read only
Settings Read only

Low Current Setting Level


Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings 0.0 ~ 6553.5 %

Low Current Detection Time


Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00 ~ 655.35 sec

Treatment for low current


Factory Setting: 0

11-98
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Settings 0 : No function
1 : warn and coast to stop
2 : warn and ramp to stop by 2nd deceleration time
3 : warn and operation continue
The drive will operate as the setting of Pr.06-73 when output current is lower than the setting of
Pr.06-71 and when low current continues for a period longer than the setting of Pr.06-72. This
parameter can also be used with external multi-function output terminal 44 (MO44) for low current
output.

11-99
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

07 Special Parameters This parameter can be set during operation.

Software Brake Level


Factory Setting: 380.0/760.0
Settings 230V series: 350.0~450.0Vdc
460V series: 700.0~900.0Vdc
This parameter sets the DC-bus voltage at which the brake chopper is activated. Users can choose
the suitable brake resistor to have the best deceleration. Refer to Chapter 7 Accessories for the
information of the brake resistor.
It is only valid for the models below 30kW of 460 series and 22kW of 230 series.

DC Brake Current Level


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~100%
This parameter sets the level of DC Brake Current output to the motor during start-up and stopping.
When setting DC Brake Current, the Rated Current is regarded as 100%. It is recommended to
start with a low DC Brake Current Level and then increase until proper holding torque has been
attained.
When it is in FOCPG/TQCPG mode, DC brake is zero-speed operation. It can enable DC brake
function by setting to any value.

DC Brake Time at Start-up


Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings 0.0~60.0 sec
The motor may be in the rotation status due to external force or itself inertia. If the drive is used with
the motor at this moment, it may cause motor damage or drive protection due to over current. This
parameter can be used to output DC current before motor operation to stop the motor and get a
stable start. This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current after a RUN command.
When it is set to 0.0, it is invalid.

DC Brake Time at Stop


Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.0~60.00 sec
The motor may be in the rotation status after drive stop outputting due to external force or itself
inertia and can’t stop accurately. This parameter can output DC current to force the motor drive
stop after drive stops to make sure that the motor is stop.
This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current during stopping. To DC brake at
stop, this function will be valid when Pr.00-22 is set to 0 or 2. When setting to 0.0, it is invalid.
Related parameters: Pr.00-22 Stop Method, Pr.07-04 Start-point for DC Brake

Start-Point for DC Brake


Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz

11-100
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

This parameter determines the frequency when DC Brake will begin during deceleration. When
this setting is less than start frequency (Pr.01-09), the start-point for DC brake will start from the
min. frequency.
Output frequen cy

DC Br ak Time
07-04
01-09 Star t- point for during St opping
Minimum
DC br ake
out put time during
frequen cy
stopping

Run /Stop OFF


ON Time
DC Brake Time

DC Brake at Start-up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts, such as fans and
pumps. Under such circumstances, DC Brake can be used to hold the load in position before
setting it in motion.
DC Brake at stop is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load in position,
such as crane or cutting machine.
DC Brake at Start-up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts, such as fans and
pumps. Under such circumstances, DC Brake can be used to hold the load in position before
setting it in motion.
DC Brake at stop is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load in position,
such as crane or cutting machine.

Reserved

Restart after Momentary Power Loss


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Stop operation
1: Speed search for last frequency command
2: Speed search for the minimum output frequency
This parameter determines the operation mode when the AC motor drive restarts from a
momentary power loss.
The power connected to the drive may power off momentarily due to many reasons. This function
allows the drive to keep outputting after power is on again after power off and won’t cause drive
stops.
Setting 1: Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the Master
Frequency reference value after drive output frequency and motor rotator speed is synchronous.
The motor has the characteristics of big inertia and small obstruction. For example, in the
equipment with big inertia wheel, it doesn’t need to wait to execute operation command until
wheel is complete stop after re-start to save time.
Setting 2: Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the master
frequency after drive output frequency and motor rotator speed is synchronous. The motor has
the characteristics of small inertia and bigger obstruction.

11-101
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

In PG control mode, the AC motor drive will execute the speed search function automatically by
the PG speed when this setting isn’t set to 0.

Maximum Power Loss Duration


Factory Setting: 2.0
Settings 0.1~20.0 sec
If the duration of a power loss is less than this parameter setting, the AC motor drive will resume
operation. If it exceeds the Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time, the AC motor drive output is
then turned off (coast stop).
The selected operation after power loss in Pr.07-06 is only executed when the maximum
allowable power loss time is ≤5 seconds and the AC motor drive displays “LU”.
But if the AC motor drive is powered off due to overload, even if the maximum allowable power
loss time is ≤5 seconds, the operation mode as set in Pr.07-06 is not executed. In that case it
starts up normally.

Base block Time


Factory Setting: 0.5
Settings 0.1~5.0 sec
When momentary power loss is detected, the AC drive will block its output and then wait for a
specified period of time (determined by Pr.07-08, called Base-Block Time) before resuming
operation. This parameter should be set at a value to ensure that any residual regeneration
voltage from the motor on the output has disappeared before the drive is activated again.
7

Output frequency(H) Input B.B. signal


Stop output voltage
Output voltage(V) Disable B.B. signal
Waiting time Pr.07-08
Output current A Speed search
07-09 Synchronization speed detection
Current Limit for 7 Frequency command before B.B.
Speed Search Time
FWD Run

B.B.
B.B. Search with last output frequency downward timing chart

11-102
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Output frequency
(H) Input B.B. signal
Stop output voltage
Output voltage Disable B.B. signal
(V) Waiting time 08.07
output current A
07-09 Current Limit Speed Search
for Speed Search Speed Synchronization speed detection

Time

FWD Run

B.B.

B.B. Search with minimum output frequency upward timing chart

Input B.B. signal


Output frequency(H)
Stop voltage output
Disable B.B. signal
Output voltage(V)
Waiting time Pr.07-08
Output current A Speed search
Synchronization speed detection
06-03
Over-Current Stall
Prevention
during Accel. Time
FWD Run

B. B.

B.B. Search with minimum output frequency upward timing chart

Current Limit for Speed Search


Factory Setting: 50
Settings 20~200%
Following a momentary power loss, the AC motor drive will start its speed search operation only if
the output current is greater than the value set by Pr.07-09.
When executing speed search, the V/f curve is operated by group 1 setting. The maximum current
for the optimum accel./decel. and start speed search is set by Pr.07-09.
The speed search level will affect the synchronous time. It will get the synchronization faster when
this parameter is set to larger value. But too large value may active overload protection.

Treatment to Reboots After Fault


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Stop operation
1: Speed search starts with current speed
2: Speed search starts with minimum output frequency
In PG control mode, the AC motor drive will execute the speed search function automatically by
the PG speed when this setting isn’t set to 0.

11-103
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Fault includes: bb,oc,ov,occ etc. To restart after oc, ov, occ, Pr.07-11 can not be set to 0.

Auto Restart After Fault


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~10
After fault (oc, ov, ov),occurs the AC motor drive can be reset/restarted automatically up to 10
times.
Setting this parameter to 0 will disable the reset/restart operation after any fault has occurred.
When enabled, the AC motor drive will restart with speed search, which starts at the frequency
before the fault.
If the drive execute reset/restart after fault more than the numbers of time set in Pr.07-11 and the
limit is reached within the time period in Pr.07-33, the drive will stop execute reset/restart after
fault function. User will be need to input RESET manually for the drive to continue operation.

Speed Search during Start-up


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Speed search from maximum output frequency
2: Speed search from start-up motor frequency
3: Speed search from minimum output frequency
This parameter is used for starting and stopping a motor with a high inertia. A motor with high
inertia will take 2-5 minutes or longer to stop completely. By setting this parameter, the user does
not need to wait for the motor to come to a complete stop before restarting the AC motor drive. If a
PG card and encoder is used on the drive and motor, then the speed search will start from the
speed that is detected by the encoder and accelerate quickly to the commanded frequency. The
output current is set by the Pr.07-09.
In PG control mode, the AC motor drive will execute the speed search function automatically by
the PG speed when this setting isn’t set to 0.

Decel. Time at Momentary Power Loss (dEb function)


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: 1st decel. time
2: 2nd decel. time
3: 3rd decel. time
4: 4th decel. time
5: Current decel. time
6: Auto decel. time
This parameter is used for the decel. time selection for momentary power loss.

dEb Return Time


Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings 0.0~25.0 sec

11-104
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

function is the AC motor drive decelerates to stop after momentary power loss. When the
momentary power loss occurs, this function can be used for the motor to decelerate to 0 speed with
deceleration stop method. When the power is on again, motor will run again after DEB return time.
(has applied on high-speed spindle)

Status 1: Insufficient power supply due to momentary power-loss/unstable power (due to low
voltage)/sudden heavy-load
DC BUS voltage
The level for DEB return tim e it doesn't need
(Lv=+30V+58V) multi-function terminals
The level for soft start relay to be ON
(Lv+30) Lv level

Soft start relay at


power side

DEB function is activated

Output frequency
Pr.07-13 Decel. time selection for
momentary power loss

07-14
DEB return time

NOTE
When Pr.07-14 is set to 0, the AC motor drive will be stopped and won't re-start
at the power-on again.

Status 2: unexpected power off, such as momentary power loss


DC BUS voltage

The level for DEB return time


(Lv=+30V+58V)
The level for soft start relay to be ON
(Lv+30)
Lv level
Soft start relay at
power side

DE B function is activated

Output frequency

Pr.07-13 Decel. time selection for


momentary power loss

07-14
DE B return time
NOTE
For example, in textile machinery, you will hope that all the machines can be decelerated to stop to prevent broken stitching
when power loss. In this case, the host controller will send a message to the AC motor drive to use dEb function with
deceleration time via EF.

Dwell Time at Accel.


Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~600.00 sec
Dwell Frequency at Accel.
Factory Setting: 0.00

11-105
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
Dwell Time at Decel.
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~600.00 sec
Dwell Frequency at Decel.
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~600.00 Hz
In the heavy load situation, Dwell can make stable output frequency temporarily, such as crane or
elevator.
Pr.07-15 to Pr.07-18 is for heavy load to prevent OV or OC occurs.
Frequency

07-18
07-16 Dwell
07-17
Dwell Frequency
Dwell Time
Frequency at Decel.
07-15 at Decel.
at Accel.
Dwell Time
at Accel. Time
Dwell at accel./decel.

Fan Cooling Control


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Fan always ON
1: 1 minute after the AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF
2: When the AC motor drive runs, the fan is ON. When the AC motor drive
stops, the fan is OFF
3: Fan turns ON when preliminary heat sink temperature (around 60oC) is
attained.
4: Fan always OFF
This parameter is used for the fan control.
Setting 0: Fan will be ON as the drive’s power is turned ON.
Setting 1: 1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF
Setting 2: AC motor drive runs and fan will be ON. AC motor drive stops and fan will be OFF.
Setting 3: Fan run according to IGBT and capacitance temperature. Fan will be ON when
preliminary capacitance temperature is higher than 60oC. Fan will be OFF, when capacitance
temperature is lower than 40oC.
Setting 4: Fan is always OFF

Emergency Stop (EF) & Force Stop


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Coast to stop
1: Stop by 1st deceleration time
2: Stop by 2nd deceleration time
3: Stop by 3rd deceleration time

11-106
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

4: Stop by 4th deceleration time


5: System Deceleration
6: Automatic Deceleration
Pr.07-20 determines AC motor drive stop method. When the multi-function input terminal is set to
10 or 18 and is activated, the drive will stop according to the setting in Pr.07-20.

Auto Energy-saving Operation


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Enable
When Pr.07-21 is set to 1, the acceleration and deceleration will operate with full voltage. During
constant speed operation, it will auto calculate the best voltage value by the load power for the
load. This function is not suitable for the ever-changing load or near full-load during operation.
When the output frequency is constant, i.e. constant operation, the output voltage will auto
decrease by the load reduction. Therefore, the drive will operate with min. power, multiplication of
voltage and current.
Output
voltage

100 %
save up to 25%
output volt age
75%

Aut o energy- saving Fr equenc y

Energy-saving Gain
Factory Setting: 100
Settings 10~1000%
When Pr.00-19 is set to 1, this parameter can be used to adjust the gain of energy-saving. The
factory setting is 100%. If the result is not good, it can adjust by decreasing the setting. If the
motor oscillates, it should increase the setting.

Auto Voltage Regulation(AVR) Function


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Enable AVR
1: Disable AVR
2: Disable AVR during deceleration
The rated voltage of the motor is usually 220V/200VAC 60Hz/50Hz and the input voltage of the
AC motor drive may vary between 180V to 264 VAC 50Hz/60Hz. Therefore, when the AC motor
drive is used without AVR function, the output voltage will be the same as the input voltage. When
the motor runs at voltages exceeding the rated voltage with 12% - 20%, its lifetime will be shorter
and it can be damaged due to higher temperature, failing insulation and unstable torque output.
AVR function automatically regulates the AC motor drive output voltage to the motor rated voltage.

11-107
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

For instance, if V/f curve is set at 200 VAC/50Hz and the input voltage is at 200V to 264VAC, then
the motor Output Voltage will automatically be reduced to a maximum of 200VAC/50Hz. If the
input voltage is at 180V to 200VAC, output voltage to motor and input power will be in direct
proportion.
Setting 0: when AVR function is enabled, the drive will calculate the output voltage by actual
DC-bus voltage. The output voltage won’t be changed by DC bus voltage.
Setting 1: when AVR function is disabled, the drive will calculate the output voltage by DC-bus
voltage. The output voltage will be changed by DC bus voltage. It may cause insufficient/over
current.
Setting 2: the drive will disable the AVR during deceleration, such as operated from high speed to
low speed.
When the motor ramps to stop, the deceleration time is longer. When setting this parameter to 2
with auto acceleration/deceleration, the deceleration will be quicker.
When it is in FOCPG or TQCPG, it is recommended to set to 0 (enable AVR).

Filter Time of Torque Command (V/F and SVC control mode)


Factory Setting: 0.020
Settings 0.001~10.000 sec
When the setting is too long, the control will be stable but the control response will be delay. When
the setting is too short, the response will be quickly but the control may be unstable. User can
adjust the setting by the control and response situation.

Filter Time of Slip Compensation (V/F and SVC control mode)


Factory Setting: 0.100
Settings 0.001~10.000 sec
It can set Pr.05-22 and 05-23 to change the response time of compensation.
If Pr.05-22 and 05-23 are set to 10seconds, the response time of compensation is the slowest. But
the system may be unstable when the setting is too short.

Torque Compensation Gain (V/F and SVC control mode)


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~10
When the motor load is large, a part of drive output voltage is absorbed by the resistor of stator
winding and causes insufficient voltage at motor induction and result in over output current and
insufficient output torque. It can auto adjust output voltage by the load and keep the air gap
magnetic fields stable to get the optimal operation.
In the V/F control, the voltage will be decreased in direct proportion when the frequency is
decreased. It’ll cause decrease torque at low speed due to small AC resistor and the same DC
resistor. Therefore, Auto torque compensation function will increase the output voltage in the low
frequency to get higher start torque.
When Pr.07-26 is set to large, it may cause motor overflux and result in too large output current,
motor overheat or triggers protection function.

11-108
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Slip Compensation Gain (V/F and SVC control mode)


Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~10.00
The induction motor needs the constant slip to produce magnetic torque. It can be ignore in the
higher motor speed, such as rated speed or 2-3% slip.
In the operation with variable frequency, the slip and the synchronous frequency will be in reverse
proportion to produce the same magnetic torque. That is the slip will be larger with the reduction
of synchronous frequency. The motor may stop when the synchronous frequency is decreased to
a specific value. Therefore, the slip serious affects the accuracy of motor speed at low speed.
In another situation, when the drive uses with induction motor, the slip will be increased by the
increasing load. It also affects the accuracy of motor speed.
This parameter can be used to set compensation frequency and reduce the slip to close the
synchronous speed when the motor runs in the rated current to raise the drive accuracy. When
the drive output current is larger than Pr.05-05 No-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (A), the drive
will compensation the frequency by this parameter.
When the control method (Pr.00-11) is changed from V/f mode to vector mode, this parameter will
auto be set to 1.00. Otherwise, it will be set to 0.00. Please do the compensation of slip after
overload and acceleration. The compensation value should be increased from small to large
gradually. That is to add the output frequency with motor rated slip X Pr.07-27 Slip Compensation
Gain when the motor is rated load. If the actual speed ratio is slow than expectation, please
increase the setting. Otherwise, decrease the setting.

Reserved

Slip Deviation Level


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~100.0%
0: No detection
Detection Time of Slip Deviation
Factory Setting:1.0
Settings 0.0~10.0 sec
Over Slip Treatment
Factory Setting:0
Settings 0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning
Pr.07-29 to Pr.07-31 are used to set allowable slip level/time and over slip treatment when the
drive is running.

Motor Hunting Gain


Factory Setting:1000

11-109
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Settings 0~10000
0: Disable
The motor will have current wave motion in some specific area. It can improve this situation by
setting this parameter. (When it is high frequency or run with PG, it can be set to 0. when the
current wave motion happens in the low frequency, please increase Pr.05-29.)

Recovery Time to Pr.07-11 (# of automatic reboots after fault)


Factory Setting:60.0
Settings 0.0~6000.0 sec
When a reset/restart after fault occurs, the drive will regards Pr.07-33 as a time boundary and
beging counting the numbers of faults occur within this time period. Within the period, if numbers
of faults occurred did not exceed the setting in Pr.07-11, the counting will be cleared and starts
from 0 when next fault occurs. However, if the numbers of faults occurred within this time period
have exceed the setting in Pr.07-11, user will need to press RESET key manually for the drive to
operate again.

11-110
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

08 High-function PID Parameters This parameter can be set during operation.

Input Terminal for PID Feedback


Factory Setting:0
Settings 0: No function
1: Negative PID feedback: input from external terminal AVI (Pr.03-00)
2: Reserved
3: Reserved
4: Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI (Pr.03-00)
Negative feedback means: +target value – feedback. It is used for the detection value will be
increased by increasing the output frequency.
Positive feedback means: -target value + feedback. It is used for the detection value will be
decreased by increasing the output frequency.
Common applications for PID control
; Flow control: A flow sensor is used to feedback the flow data and performs accurate flow
control.
; Pressure control: A pressure sensor is used to feedback the pressure data and performs
precise pressure control.
; Air volume control: An air volume sensor is used to feedback the air volume data to have
excellent air volume regulation.
; Temperature control: A thermocouple or thermistor is used to feedback temperature data for
comfortable temperature control.
; Speed control: A speed sensor or encoder is used to feedback motor shaft speed or input
another machines speed as a target value for closed loop speed control of master-slave
operation. Pr.10.00 sets the PID set point source (target value).
; PID control operates with the feedback signal as set by Pr.10.01 either 0~+10V voltage or
4-20mA current.
PID control loop:
drive execute PID control output v alue
¨ ¿¥
Setpoint + 1
K p (1+ + Td ×S ) IM
Ti × S
-

feedback signal
sens or

K p: Proportional gain(P) Ti : Integral time(I) Td: Derivative control(D) : O perator

Concept of PID control


1. Proportional gain(P):
the output is proportional to input. With only proportional gain control, there will always be
a steady-state error.
2. Integral time(I):
the controller output is proportional to the integral of the controller input. To eliminate the

11-111
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

steady-state error, an “integral part” needs to be added to the controller. The integral time
decides the relation between integral part and error. The integral part will be increased by
time even if the error is small. It gradually increases the controller output to eliminate the
error until it is 0. In this way a system can be stable without steady-state error by proportional
gain control and integral time control.
3. Differential control(D):
the controller output is proportional to the differential of the controller input. During
elimination of the error, oscillation or instability may occur. The differential control can be
used to suppress these effects by acting before the error. That is, when the error is near 0,
the differential control should be 0. Proportional gain(P) + differential control(D) can be used
to improve the system state during PID adjustment.
When PID control is used in a constant pressure pump feedback application:
Set the application’s constant pressure value (bar) to be the set point of PID control. The pressure
sensor will send the actual value as PID feedback value. After comparing the PID set point and
PID feedback, there will be an error. Thus, the PID controller needs to calculate the output by
using proportional gain(P), integral time(I) and differential time(D) to control the pump. It controls
the drive to have different pump speed and achieves constant pressure control by using a 4-20mA
signal corresponding to 0-10 bar as feedback to the drive.
no fuse breaker
(NFB) water pump

R(L1) R(L1) U(T1)


S(L2) S(L2) V(T2) IM
T(L3) T(L3)
3~
W(T 3)

throttle
F eedback 4-20mA
cor responds pressure
0-10bar sensor
ACI/A VI
(4- 20mA /0- 10V )
DC
ACM - +
analog si gnal common

1. Pr.00-04 is set to 10 (Display PID analog feedback signal value (b) (%))
2. Pr.01-12 Acceleration Time will be set as required
3. Pr.01-13 Deceleration Time will be set as required
4. Pr.00-21=0 to operate from the digital keypad
5. Pr.00-20=0, the set point is controlled by the digital keypad
6. Pr.08-00=1 (Negative PID feedback from analog input)
7. ACI analog input Pr. 03-01 set to 5, PID feedback signal.
8. Pr.08-01-08-03 will be set as required
8.1 If there is no vibration in the system, increase Pr.08-01(Proportional Gain (P))
8.2 If there is no vibration in the system, reduce Pr.08-02(Integral Time (I))
8.3 If there is no vibration in the system, increase Pr.08-03(Differential Time(D))
Refer to Pr.08-00 to 08-21 for PID parameters settings.

Proportional Gain (P)


Factory Setting:80.0

11-112
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Settings 0.0~500.0%
„ It is used to eliminate the system error. It is usually used to decrease the error and get the faster
response speed. But if setting too large value in Pr.08-01, it may cause the system oscillation and
instability.
„ If the other two gains (I and D) are set to zero, proportional control is the only one effective.

Integral Time (I)


Factory Setting:1.00
Settings 0.00~100.00 sec
0.00: Disable
The integral controller is used to eliminate the error during stable system. The integral control
doesn’t stop working until error is 0. The integral is acted by the integral time. The smaller integral
time is set, the stronger integral action will be. It is helpful to reduce overshoot and oscillation to
make a stable system. At this moment, the decreasing error will be slow. The integral control is
often used with other two controls to become PI controller or PID controller.
This parameter is used to set the integral time of I controller. When the integral time is long, it will
have small gain of I controller, the slower response and bad external control. When the integral
time is short, it will have large gain of I controller, the faster response and rapid external control.
When the integral time is too small, it may cause system oscillation.
If the integral time is set as 0.00, Pr.08-02 will be disabled.

Derivative Control (D)


Factory Setting:0.00
Settings 0.00~1.00 sec
The differential controller is used to show the change of system error and it is helpful to preview
the change of error. So the differential controller can be used to eliminate the error to improve
system state. With the suitable differential time, it can reduce overshoot and shorten adjustment
time. However, the differential operation will increase the noise interference. Please note that
too large differential will cause big noise interference. Besides, the differential shows the change
and the output of the differential will be 0 when there is no change. Therefore, the differential
control can’t be used independently. It needs to be used with other two controllers to make a PD
controller or PID controller.
This parameter can be used to set the gain of D controller to decide the response of error change.
The suitable differential time can reduce the overshoot of P and I controller to decrease the
oscillation and have a stable system. But too long differential time may cause system oscillation.
The differential controller acts for the change of error and can’t reduce the interference. It is not
recommended to use this function in the serious interference.

Upper limit of Integral Control


Factory Setting:100.0
Settings 0.0~100.0%
This parameter defines an upper bound or limit for the integral gain (I) and therefore limits the
Master Frequency. The formula is: Integral upper bound = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00)

11-113
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

x (Pr.08-04 %).
Too large integral value will make the slow response due to sudden load change. In this way, it
may cause motor stall or machine damage.

PID Output Frequency Limit


Factory Setting:100.0
Settings 0.0~110.0%
This parameter defines the percentage of output frequency limit during the PID control. The formula
is Output Frequency Limit = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) X Pr.08-05 %.

Reserved

PID Delay Time


Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings 0.0~35.0 sec
PID Mode Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Serial connection
1: Parallel connection
Pr.08-07 determines the primary low pass filter time when in PID control. Setting a large time
constant may slow down the response rate of drive.
Output frequency of PID control will filter by primary low pass function. This function could filtering
a mix frequencies. A long primary low pass time means filter degree is high and vice versa.
Inappropriate setting of delay time may cause system error.
PI Control: controlled by the P action only, and thus, the deviation cannot be eliminated entirely. To
eliminate residual deviations, the P + I control will generally be utilized. And when the PI control is
utilized, it could eliminate the deviation incurred by the targeted value changes and the constant
external interferences. However, if the I action is excessively powerful, it will delay the responding
toward the swift variation. The P action could be used solely on the loading system that
possesses the integral components.
PD Control: when deviation occurred, the system will immediately generate some operation load
that is greater than the load generated single handedly by the D action to restrain the increment of
the deviation. If the deviation is small, the effectiveness of the P action will be decreasing as well.
The control objects include occasions with integral component loads, which are controlled by the
P action only, and sometimes, if the integral component is functioning, the whole system will be
vibrating. On such occasions, in order to make the P action’s vibration subsiding and the system
stabilizing, the PD control could be utilized. In other words, this control is good for use with
loadings of no brake functions over the processes.
PID Control: Utilize the I action to eliminate the deviation and the D action to restrain the vibration,
thereafter, combine with the P action to construct the PID control. Use of the PID method could
obtain a control process with no deviations, high accuracies and a stable system.
Serial connection

11-114
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Inp ut Selection of the PID Cancelled F requ ency


PID Targe ted Value 08-00=0 command
00-20:KPC-CC 01/ or 02-01~ 06=21( pid off)
RS485 1
03-00~0 2: UP/D own 2
ke y PG
+
PID offset
08-06

+ P D +
Pro portio n Di ffere nti al
gain Time
Display of th e PID fee dback - 08- 01 08-03 +
00-04=1 0 display o f t he PID
PID feed back Delay
Time 08-05
Inp ut Selection I 08-07 PID Fr eq.
of the PID Fee dback out put
08-00:AVI/ACI 08-02
Int egral Time 08- 04 command
AUI /PG uppe r limit
limit
for
Int egral
08-09
Treatme nt o f t he
F eedback Signal Fau lt
If Hz>08 -05
time exce eds 08- 08

Parallel connection

In pu t Se le ctio n o f the
P ID Ta rg ete d Va lu e
0 0- 20 :KP C-CC0 1/RS48 5
0 3- 00 ~0 2: UP/Do wn ke y PG
PID Can cel le d 0 8- 00 =0 Fr eq ue ncy
o r 02 -0 1~06 =21 (p id off) co mman d
1
2
P
Pro po rti on ga in
P ID offset
+

08-01 08-06

+ D
Diffe re ntial
+

Time
- 08-03 + 08-05
Displ ay o f the PID fe ed ba ck PID Delay

I
0 0- 04 =1 0 d isp la y o f the Time
P ID fee db ack
08-07
P ID Fre q.
08-02 o utp ut
Integra l Time 08-04
In pu t Se le ctio n co mman d limi t
o f the PID Fe ed ba ck u pp er li mit
0 8- 00 :AVI/A CI fo r
In teg ra l 0 8- 09
A UI/PG Tre atme nt o f the Fee db a ck Sign al Fau lt
If Hz>08 -0 5, ti me exce ed s 08 -0 8

Feedback Signal Detection Time


Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings 0.0~3600.0 sec
Pr.08-08 is valid only if the feedback signal is ACI.
This parameter sets the detection time of abnormal PID derative. If detection time is set to 0.0,
detection function is disabled.

Feedback Signal Fault Treatment


Factory Setting: 0

11-115
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Settings 0: Warn and keep operation


1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: Warn and operate at last frequency
This parameter is valid only when the feedback signal is ACI.
AC motor drive acts when the feedback signals (analog PID feedback or PG (encoder) feedback)
are abnormal.

Sleep Frequency
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings Pr.08-18=0: 0.00~600.00Hz
Pr.08-18=1: 0.00~200.00%
Wake-up Frequency
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings Pr.08-18=0: 0.00~600.00Hz
Pr.08-18=1: 0.00~200.00%
Sleep Time
Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings 0.00~6000.0 sec
If the command frequency falls below the sleep frequency, for the specified time in Pr. 08-12, then
the drive will shut off the output and wait until the command frequency rises above Pr.08-11.

Frequency command
08-11
Wake-up frequency actual output frequency

08-10
Sleep frequency

sleep time 0Hz


08-12

Sleep Function

PID Deviation Level


Factory Setting: 10.0
Settings 1.0~50.0%
PID Deviation Time
Factory Setting: 5.0
Settings 0.1~300.0 sec
Filter Time for PID Feedback
Factory Setting: 5.0
Settings 0.1~300.0 sec
When the PID control function is normal, it should calculate within a period of time and close to the
setpoint value.
Refer to the PID control diagram for details. When executing PID feedback control, if |PID
reference target value – detection value| > Pr.08-13 PID Deviation Level and exceeds Pr.08-14

11-116
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

setting, the PID control fault occurs. The treatment will be done as Pr.08-09 setting.

PID Compensation Selection


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Parameter setting
1: Reserved

PID Compensation
Factory Setting: 0
Settings -100.0~+100.0%

Setting of Sleep Mode Function

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Follow PID output command
1: Follow PID feedback signal
Wake-up Integral Limit
Factory Setting: 50.0
Settings 0.0~200.0%
The upper limit when the VFD is at sleep mode to avoid running at high speed right after being
waken up.
There are three types of Sleep mode and Wakeup mode.
01: Frequency command(Not using PID, Pr08-00=0)
Output Frequency ≦ Sleep Frequency, the drive goes to Sleep mode, 0Hz.
Frequenc y C om mand

P r. 08-11
Actual Output Frequency
Wak e up
f requenc y when functioning
P r. 08-10
S leep f requenc y

Pr.08-12 0H z
Sleep Time

S leep M ode D iagram

02: Internal PID Frequency Calculation Command (Not using PID, Pr08 ≠ 0)
When arriving at the sleep frequency, the system starts to calculating sleep time and the output
frequency starts to decrease. If it passes the preset sleep time, the system will go to seelp at 0Hz.

If the system is not yet reaching the preset sleep time, (if there is a preset) or will stay at Pr01-07,
waiting to reach the sleep time then go to sleep at 0Hz.

11-117
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Frequency

out put f req.

Pr.08-11
w ake up freq.
Deceleration
Pr.08-10 time limit
Sleep f req.

Pr.01-11 Accel eration


ti me l imit
Output freq.
lower limit
Pr.01-07/ Pr.01-41

Time
Pr.08-12
Sleep Time

03: Percentage of PID’s Target Value (Set PID, Pr08-00 ≠ 0)


When reaching the percentage of PID’s Target Value and the percentage of the feedback value,
the system.
Starts to calculate the sleep time. The output frequency decreases immediately. If the system
passes the preset sleep time, it will go to sleep at 0Hz. However, if it doesn’t reach the preset
sleep time, it will remain at Pr01-11 (if there is a preset value) or Pr01-07 waiting to reach the
sleep tiem then go to sleep at 0Hz.

Frequency

Output Freq.

PID
Feedback value

Pr . 08 - 10
Sleep freq .

Pr . 08 - 11
wake up freq.

Time
Pr. 08- 12
Sleep time

Enable or disable the Sleep and Wakeup functions depends on the setting of Pr08-10. When
Pr08-10=0, it means Disable, while Pr08-10 ≠ 0, it means Enable.

Enable PID to Change the Operation Direction


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable change of direction
1: Enable change of direction

11-118
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

09 Communication Parameters The parameter can be set during the operation.

8 1
M odbus RS- 485
When us ing communication devi ces, Pin 1~2,7, 8: Reserv ed
connects AC dr ive with P C by us ing Pin 3, 6: GND
Delt a I FD6530 or I FD6500. Pin 4: SG-
Pin 5: SG+
RS-485

COM1 Communication Address


Factory Setting: 1
Settings 1~254
If the AC motor drive is controlled by RS-485 serial communication, the communication address
for this drive must be set via this parameter. And the communication address for each AC motor
drive must be different and unique.

COM1 Transmission Speed


Factory Setting: 19.2
Settings 4.8~115.2 Kbps
This parameter is used to set the transmission speed between the RS485 master (PLC, PC, etc.)
and AC motor drive.

COM1 Transmission Fault Treatment


Factory Setting: 3
Settings 0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning and continue operation
This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur.

COM1 Time-out Detection


Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings 0.0~100.0 sec
0.0: Disable
It is used to set the transmission time between communication and keypad.

COM1 Communication Protocol


Factory Setting: 13
Settings 1: 7, N, 2 for ASCII
2: 7, E, 1 for ASCII
3: 7, O, 1 for ASCII
4: 7, E, 2 for ASCII
5: 7, O, 2 for ASCII
6: 8, N, 1 for ASCII
7: 8, N, 2 for ASCII
8: 8, E, 1 for ASCII

11-119
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

9: 8, O, 1 for ASCII
10: 8, E, 2 for ASCII
11: 8, O, 2 for ASCII
12: 8, N, 1 for RTU
13: 8, N, 2 for RTU
14: 8, E, 1 for RTU
15: 8, O, 1 for RTU
16: 8, E, 2 for RTU
17: 8, O, 2 for RTU
Control by PC or PLC (Computer Link)
A VFD-C2000 can be set up to communicate on Modbus networks using one of the following
modes: ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) or RTU (Remote Terminal
Unit).Users can select the desired mode along with the RS-485 serial port communication
protocol in Pr.09-00.
MODBUS ASCII(American Standard Code for Information Interchange): Each byte data is the
combination of two ASCII characters. For example, a 1-byte data: 64 Hex, shown as ‘64’ in ASCII,
consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex).
1. Code Description
Communication protocol is in hexadecimal, ASCII: ”0”, “9”, “A”, “F”, every 16 hexadecimal
represent ASCII code. For example:
Character ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’ ‘6’ ‘7’
ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H

Character ‘8’ ‘9’ ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘E’ ‘F’


ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H
Data Format
10-bit character frame (For ASCII):
(7, N , 2)

Start Stop Stop


bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
bit bit

7-data bits
10-bits character frame

(7 , E , 1)

Start Even Stop


bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit

7-data bits
10-bits character frame

11-120
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

(7 , O , 1)

Start Odd Stop


bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit

7-data bits
10-bits character frame

11-bit character frame (For RTU):


(8 , N , 2)
Start Stop Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 bit bit
8-data bits
11-bits character frame
(8 , E , 1)
Start Even Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits
11-bits character frame
(8 , O , 1)
Start Odd Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits
11-bits character frame

2. Communication Protocol
Communication Data Frame: ASCII mode
STX Start character = ‘:’ (3AH)
Address Hi Communication address:
8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes
Address Lo
Function Hi Command code:
8-bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes
Function Lo
DATA (n-1) Contents of data:
Nx8-bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes
…….
n<=16, maximum of 32 ASCII codes
DATA 0
LRC CHK Hi LRC check sum:
8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCII codes
LRC CHK Lo
END Hi End characters:
END1= CR (0DH), END0= LF(0AH)
END Lo

Communication Data Frame: RTU mode


START A silent interval of more than 10 ms
Address Communication address: 8-bit address
Function Command code: 8-bit command

11-121
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

DATA (n-1) Contents of data:


n×8-bit data, n<=16
…….
DATA 0
CRC CHK Low CRC check sum:
CRC CHK High 16-bit check sum consists of 2 8-bit characters
END A silent interval of more than 10 ms

Address (Communication Address)


Valid communication addresses are in the range of 0 to 254. A communication address equal to 0,
means broadcast to all AC drives (AMD). In this case, the AMD will not reply any message to the
master device.
00H: broadcast to all AC drives
01H: AC drive of address 01
0FH: AC drive of address 15
10H: AC drive of address 16
:
FEH: AC drive of address 254

Function (Function code) and DATA (data characters)


The format of data characters depends on the function code.
03H: read data from register
06H: write single register
Example: reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H, AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command Message: Response Message
STX ‘:’ STX ‘:’
‘0’ ‘0’
Address Address
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘3’ ‘3’
‘2’ Number of data ‘0’
‘1’ (count by byte) ‘4’
Starting address
‘0’ ‘1’
‘2’ Content of starting ‘7’
‘0’ address 2102H ‘7’
Number of data ‘0’ ‘0’
(count by word) ‘0’ ‘0’
‘2’ ‘0’
Content of address 2103H
‘D’ ‘0’
LRC Check
‘7’ ‘0’
CR ‘7’
END LRC Check
LF ‘1’
CR
END
LF

RTU mode:
Command Message: Response Message
Address 01H Address 01H
Function 03H Function 03H
21H Number of data
Starting data address 04H
02H (count by byte)
Number of data 00H Content of data 17H
(count by world) 02H address 2102H 70H

11-122
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

CRC CHK Low 6FH Content of data 00H


CRC CHK High F7H address 2103H 00H
CRC CHK Low FEH
CRC CHK High 5CH

06H: single write, write single data to register.


Example: writing data 6000(1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command Message: Response Message
STX ‘:’ STX ‘:’
‘0’ ‘0’
Address Address
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘6’ ‘6’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
Data address Data address
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
‘7’ ‘7’
Data content Data content
‘7’ ‘7’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘7’ ‘7’
LRC Check LRC Check
‘1’ ‘1’
CR CR
END END
LF LF

RTU mode:
Command Message: Response Message
Address 01H Address 01H
Function 06H Function 06H
01H 01H
Data address Data address
00H 00H
17H 17H
Data content Data content
70H 70H
CRC CHK Low 86H CRC CHK Low 86H
CRC CHK High 22H CRC CHK High 22H

10H: write multiple registers (write multiple data to registers)


Example: Set the multi-step speed,
Pr.04-00=50.00 (1388H), Pr.04-01=40.00 (0FA0H). AC drive address is 01H.

ASCII Mode
Command Message: Response Message
STX ‘:’ STX ‘:’
ADR 1 ‘0’ ADR 1 ‘0’
ADR 0 ‘1’ ADR 0 ‘1’
CMD 1 ‘1’ CMD 1 ‘1’
CMD 0 ‘0’ CMD 0 ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘5’ ‘5’
Starting data address Starting data address
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
Number of data ‘0’ Number of data ‘0’
(count by word) ‘0’ (count by word) ‘0’
‘2’ ‘2’

11-123
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Number of data ‘0’ ‘E’


LRC Check
(count by byte) ‘4’ ‘8’
‘1’ CR
END
‘3’ LF
The first data content
‘8’
‘8’
‘0’
‘F’
The second data content
‘A’
‘0’
‘9’
LRC Check
‘A’
CR
END
LF

RTU mode:
Command Message: Response Message
ADR 01H ADR 01H
CMD 10H CMD 1 10H
05H 05H
Starting data address Starting data address
00H 00H
Number of data 00H Number of data 00H
(count by word) 02H (count by word) 02H
Number of data 04 41H
CRC Check Low
(count by byte)
13H CRC Check High 04H
The first data content
88H
The second data content 0FH
A0H
CRC Check Low ‘9’
CRC Check High ‘A’

Check sum

ASCII mode:
LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up, module 256, and the values
of the bytes from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation of the
2’s-complement negation of the sum.
For example,
01H+03H+21H+02H+00H+02H=29H, the 2’s-complement negation of 29H is D7H.
RTU mode:
CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps:
Step 1:
Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFH.
Step 2:
Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of the 16-bit CRC
register, putting the result in the CRC register.
Step 3:
Examine the LSB of CRC register.

11-124
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Step 4:
If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling, then
repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB
zero filling, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001H, then repeat step 3.
Step 5:
Repeat step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed. When this is done, a complete 8-bit
byte will have been processed.
Step 6:
Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message. Continue doing this until all
bytes have been processed. The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC value. When
transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower bytes of the CRC value must be
swapped, i.e. the lower order byte will be transmitted first.

The following is an example of CRC generation using C language. The function takes two
arguments:
Unsigned char* data Å a pointer to the message buffer
Unsigned char length Å the quantity of bytes in the message buffer
The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer.
Unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length)
{
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0Xffff;
while(length--){
reg_crc ^= *data++;
for(j=0;j<8;j++){
if(reg_crc & 0x01){ /* LSB(b0)=1 */
reg_crc=(reg_crc>>1) ^ 0Xa001;
}else{
reg_crc=reg_crc >>1;
}
}
}

return reg_crc; // return register CRC

3. Address list
Content Address Function
GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number, for
AC drive Parameters GGnnH
example, the address of Pr 4-01 is 0401H.
0: No function
Command 1: Stop
2000H Bit 0-3
Write only 2: Run
3: Jog + Run

11-125
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Content Address Function


00B: No function
01B: FWD
Bit 4-5
10B: REV
11B: Change direction
00B: 1st accel/decel
01B: 2nd accel/decel
Bit 6-7
10B: 3rd accel/decel
11B: 4th accel/decel
Bit 8-11 000B: master speed
0001B: 1st accel/decel.
0010B: 2nd accel/decel
0011B: 3rd accel/decel
0100B: 4th accel/decel
0101B: 5th accel/decel
0110B: 6th accel/decel
0111B: 7th accel/decel
1000B: 8th accel/decel
1001B: 9th accel/decel
1010B: 10th accel/decel
1011B: 11th accel/decel
1100B: 12th accel/decel
1101B: 13th accel/decel
1110B: 14th accel/decel
1111B: 15th accel/decel
Bit 12 1: enable bit06-11 function
Bit 13~14 00B: No function
01B: operated by digital keypad
10B: operated by Pr.00-21 setting
11B: change operation source
Bit 15 Reserved
Command 2001H Frequency command
Write only Bit 0 1: EF (external fault) on
Bit 1 1: Reset
2002H
Bit 2 1: B.B. ON
Bit 3-15 Reserved
Status monitor Error code: refer to Pr.06-17 to Pr.06-22
2100H
Read only
AC Drive Operation Status
2101H Bit0 00b: Drive stops
01b: Drive decelerating
Bit1 10b: Drive standby
11b: Drive operating
Bit2 1: JOG Command
Operation Direction
Bit3 00b: FWD run
01b: from REV run to FWD run
Bit4 10b: REV run
11b: from FWD run to REV run
1: Master frequency controlled by communication
Bit8
interface
Bit9 1: Master frequency controlled by analog signal
1: Operation command controlled by
Bit10
communication interface
Bit11 1: Parameter locked
Bit12 1: Enable to copy parameters from keypad
Bit13~15 Reserved
2102H Frequency command (F)

11-126
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Content Address Function


2103H Output frequency (H)
2104H Output current (AXX.X.X)
2105H DC-BUS Voltage (UXXX.X)
2106H Output voltage (EXXX.X)
2107H Current step number of Multi-Step Speed Operation
2108H Reserved
2109H Counter value
210AH Power Factor Angle (XXX.X)
210BH Output Torque (%)
210CH Actual motor speed (rpm)
210DH Number of PG feed back pulses
210FH Power output (X.XXX)
2116H Multi-function display (Pr.00-04)
211BH Max. opeartion frequency (Pr.01-00) or Max. user defined value
(Pr.00-26)
2200H Display output current (A)
2201H Display counter value of TRG terminal (c)
2202H Display actual output frequency (H)
2203H Display DC-BUS voltage (u)
2204H Display output voltage of U, V, W (E)
2205H Display output power angle of U, V, W (n)
2206H Display actual motor speed kW of U, V, W (P)
2207H Display motor speed in rpm estimated by the drive or encoder
feedback (r00: positive speed, -00: negative speed)
2208H Display positive/negative output torque in %, estimated by the
drive (t0.0: positive torque, -0.0: negative torque)
220AH Display PID feedback value after enabling PID function in % (b)
220BH Display signal of AVI analog input terminal, 0-10V corresponds
to 0-100% (1.)
220CH Display signal of ACI analog input terminal, 4-V20mA/0-10V
corresponds to 0-100% (2.)
220DH Display signal of AUI analog input terminal, -10V~10V
corresponds to -100~100% (3.)
220EH Display the IGBT temperature of drive power module in oC (c.)
220FH Display the temperature of capacitance in oC (i.)
2210H The status of digital input (ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-12
2211H The status of digital output (ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-18
2212H Display the multi-step speed that is executing (S)
2213H The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (d.)
2214H The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output (O.)
2218H Position command tracing error (P.)
2219H Display times of counter overload (0.00~100.00%)
221AH Display GFF in % (G.)
221BH Display DCbus voltage ripples (Unit: Vdc) (r.)
221CH Display PLC register D1043 data (C)
221DH Display Pole of Permanent Magnet Motor
221EH User page displays the value in physical measure
221FH Output Value of Pr.00-05
2222H Fan speed of the drive
2223H Control mode of the drive 0: speed mode 1: torque mode
2224H Carrier frequency of the drive

4. Exception response:
The AC motor drive is expected to return a normal response after receiving command messages
from the master device. The following depicts the conditions when no normal response is replied to
the master device.

11-127
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

The AC motor drive does not receive the messages due to a communication error; thus, the AC
motor drive has no response. The master device will eventually process a timeout condition.
The AC motor drive receives the messages without a communication error, but cannot handle them.
An exception response will be returned to the master device and an error message “CExx” will be
displayed on the keypad of AC motor drive. The xx of “CExx” is a decimal code equal to the
exception code that is described below.
In the exception response, the most significant bit of the original command code is set to 1, and an
exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is returned.
Example:
ASCII mode: RTU mode:
STX ‘:’ Address 01H
‘0’ Function 86H
Address
‘1’ Exception code 02H
‘8’ CRC CHK Low C3H
Function
‘6’ CRC CHK High A1H
‘0’
Exception code
‘2’
‘7’
LRC CHK
‘7’
CR
END
LF

The explanation of exception codes:


Exception
Explanation
code
Illegal data value:
1
The data value received in the command message is not available for the AC drive.
Illegal data address:
2 The data address received in the command message is not available for the AC
motor drive.
3 Parameters are locked: parameters can’t be changed
4 Parameters can’t be changed during operation
10 Communication time-out.

~ Reserved

Response Delay Time


Factory Setting: 2.0
Settings 0.0~200.0ms
This parameter is the response delay time after AC drive receives communication command as
shown in the following.
RS-485 BUS
PC or PLC command Response Message
of the AC Drive
Handling time Response Delay Time
of the AC drive Pr.09-09

Main Frequency of the Communication


Factory Setting: 60.00

11-128
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
When Pr.00-20 is set to 1 (RS485 communication). The AC motor drive will save the last
frequency command into Pr.09-10 when abnormal turn-off or momentary power loss. After reboots
the power, it will regards the frequency set in Pr.09-10 if no new frequency command is inputted.

Block Transfer 1
Block Transfer 2
Block Transfer 3
Block Transfer 4
Block Transfer 5
Block Transfer 6
Block Transfer 7
Block Transfer 8
Block Transfer 9
Block Transfer 10
Block Transfer 11
Block Transfer 12
Block Transfer 13
Block Transfer 14
Block Transfer 15
Block Transfer 16
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~655.35
There is a group of block transfer parameter available in the AC motor drive (Pr.09-11 to Pr.09-20).
User can use them (Pr.09-11 to Pr.09-20) to save those parameters that you want to read.

~ Reserved

Communication Decoding Method


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Decoding Method 1
1: Decoding Method 2

Decoding Method 1 Decoding Method 2


Source of Digital Keypd Digital keypad controls the drive action regardless decoding method 1 or 2.
Operation External Terminal External terminal controls the drive action regardless decoding method 1 or 2.
Control RS-485 Refer to address: 2000h~20FFh Refer to address: 6000h ~ 60FFh
CANopen Refer to index: 2020-01h~2020-FFh Refer to index:2060-01h ~ 2060-FFh
Communication Refer to address: 2000h ~ 20FFh Refer to address: 6000h ~ 60FFh
Card

11-129
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

PLC PLC commands the drive action regardless decoding method 1 or 2.

Internal Communication Protocol


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Modbus 485

~ Reserved

PLC Address
Factory Setting: 2
Settings 1~254

CANopen Slave Address


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1~127

CANopen Speed
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: 1M
1: 500k
2: 250k
3: 125k
4: 100k (Delta only)
5: 50k

CANopen Frequency Gain


Factory Setting: 1.00
Settings 0.00~2.00

CANopen Warning Record


Factory Setting: 0
Settings bit 0: CANopen Guarding Time out
bit 1: CANopen Heartbeat Time out
bit 2: CANopen SYNC Time out
bit 3: CANopen SDO Time out
bit 4: CANopen SDO buffer overflow
bit 5: Can Bus Off
bit 6: Error protocol of CANOPEN

11-130
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

CANopen Decoding Method


Factory Setting: 1
Settings 0: Delta defined decoding method
1: CANopen Standard DS402 protocol

CANopen Status
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Node Reset State
1: Com Reset State
2: Boot up State
3: Pre Operation State
4: Operation State
5: Stop State

CANopen Control Status


Factory Setting: Read Only
Settings 0: Not ready for use state
1: Inhibit start state
2: Ready to switch on state
3: Switched on state
4: Enable operation state
7: Quick stop active state
13: Err reaction activation state
14: Error state

Reset CANopen Index


Factory Setting: 65535
Settings: bit0: reset address 20XX to 0.
bit1: reset address 264X to 0
bit2: reset address 26AX to 0
bit3: reset address 60XX to 0

CANopen Error state


Factory Setting: Read Only
Settings 0~65535

11-131
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

10 PID Control This parameter can be set during operation.

In this parameter group, ASR is the abbreviation for Adjust Speed Regulator and PG is the
abbreviation for Pulse Generator.
Reserved

Encoder Pulse
Factory Setting: 600
Settings 1~20000
A Pulse Generator (PG) or encoder is used as a sensor that provides a feedback signal of the
motor speed. This parameter defines the number of pulses for each cycle of the PG control, i.e.
the number of pulses for a cycle of A phase/B phase.
This setting is also the encoder resolution. With the higher resolution, the speed control will be
more accurate.
An errotic input to Pr.10-00 may result drive over current, motor stall, PM motor magnetic pole
origin detection error. If Pr.10-00 setting has changed, please trace the magnetic pole again, set
Pr.05-00=4 (static test for PM motor magnetic pole and PG origin again).

Encoder Input Type Setting MI7=A; MI8=B


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase B leads in a reverse
run command

FWD REV
A
B

2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase A leads in a reverse


run command
FWD REV
A
B
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (L =reverse
direction, H=forward direction)

FWD REV
A
B

4: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (L=forward


direction, H=reverse direction)
FWD REV
A
B

11-132
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

5: Single-phase input

Reserved

Electrical Gear at Load Side A1


Electrical Gear at Motor Side B1
Electrical Gear at Load Side A2
Electrical Gear at Motor Side B2
Factory Setting: 100
Settings 1~65535
Parameters 10-04 to 10-07 can be used with the multi-function input terminal (set to 48) to switch
to Pr.10-04~10-05 or Pr.10-06~10-07 as shown as follows

PG D riv er
car d

Gear Gear Motor


load
A1 or A2 B1 or B2
encoder is us ed
at load side gear ratio
MI=48 ON = A2: B2
OF F=A 1:B 1

Treatment for Encoder Feedback Fault


Factory Setting: 2
Settings 0: Warn and keep operating
1: Warn and RAMP to stop
2: Warn and COAST to stop

Detection Time of Encoder Feedback Fault


Factory Setting: 1.0
Settings 0.0~10.0 sec
0: No function
When encoder loss, encoder signal error, pulse signal setting error or signal error, if time exceeds
the detection time for encoder feedback fault (Pr.10-09), the encoder signal error will occur. Refer
to the Pr.10-08 for encoder feedback fault treatment.

Encoder Stall Level


Factory Setting: 115
Settings 0~120%
0: No function
This parameter determines the maximum encoder feedback signal allowed before a fault occurs.

11-133
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

(Max. output frequency Pr.01-00 =100%)

Detection Time of Encoder Stall


Factory Setting: 0.1
Settings 0.0~2.0 sec

Treatment for Encoder Stall


Factory Setting: 2
Settings 0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
When the motor frequency exceeds Pr.10-10 setting and detection time exceeds Pr.10-11, it will
operate as Pr.10-12 setting.

Encoder Slip Range


Factory Setting: 50
Settings 0~50%
0: Disable
Detection Time of Encoder Slip
Factory Setting: 0.5
Settings 0.0~10.0 sec
Treatment for Encoder Stall and Slip Error
Factory Setting: 2
Settings 0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
When the value of (rotation speed – motor frequency) exceeds Pr.10-13 setting, detection time
exceeds Pr.10-14; it will start to accumulate time. If detection time exceeds Pr.10-14, the encoder
feedback signal error will occur. Refer to Pr.10-15 encoder stall and slip error treatment.

~ Reserved

FOC&TQC Function Control


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~65535

Bit# Description
0 ASR control at sensorless torque
0:use PI as ASR; 1:use P as ASR
1~10 NA
11 Activate DC braking when executing zero torque command
0:ON , 1:OFF

11-134
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

12 FOC Sensorless mode, cross zero means speed goes from negative to
positive or positive to negative (forward to reverse direction or reverse to
forward direction). 0: determine by stator frequency , 1: determine by speed
command
13~14 NA
15 Direction control at open loop status
0: Switch ON direction control
1: Switch OFF direction control

FOC Bandwidth of Speed Observer


Factory Setting:40.0
Settings 20.0~100.0Hz
Setting speed observer to higher bandwidth could shorten the speed response time but will create
greater noise interference during the speed observation. .

FOC Minimum Stator Frequency


Factory Setting:2.0
Settings 0.0~10.0%fN
This parameter is used to set the minimum level of stator frequency at operation status. This
setting ensures the stability and accuracy of observer and avoid interferences from voltage,
current and motor parameter.

FOC Low-pass Filter Time Constant


Factory Setting:50
Settings 0~1000ms
This parameter sets the low-pass filter time constant of a flux observer at start up. If the motor can
not be activated during the high-speed operation, please lower the setting in this parameter.

FOC Gain of Excitation Current Rise Time


Factory Setting:100
Settings 0~100% Tr (Tr: rotor time constant)
This parameter sets the drive’s excitation current rise time when activates at senslorless torque
mode. When the drive’s activation time is too long at torque mode, please adjust this parameter to
a shorter time constant.

Top Limit of Frequency Deviation


Factory Setting: 20.00
Settings 0.00~100.00Hz
Pr.10-29 is for setting the maximum of frequency deviation.

Reserved

Obeserver Gain
Factory Setting: 600
Settings 0~65535

11-135
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

PM Sensorless Obeserver Bandwith for High Speed Zone


Factory Setting: 4.00
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
PM Sensorless Obeserver Bandwith for Low Speed Zone
Factory Setting: 0.50
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz

PM Sensorless Observer Low-pass Filter Gain


Factory Setting: 1.00
Settings 0.00~655.35Hz

Speed bandwidth switching


Factory Setting: 10.00
Settings 0.00~655.35Hz

High/Low speed OBS bandwidth


Factory Setting: 0.50
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz

PM Sensorless Control Word


Factory Setting: 0000
Settings 0000~FFFFh

Required Time for PM Sensorless d-axis Current Command Return to 0


Factory Setting: 1.0
Settings 0.0~655.35 sec

Frequency Point when switch from I/F mode to PM Sensorless mode


Factory Setting: 20.00
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz

Frequency Point when switch from PM Sensorless Observation mde to I/F mode
Factory Setting: 20.00
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
I/F mode, low pass-filter time
Factory Setting: 0.2
Settings 0.0~6.0 sec
Initial Angle Detection Time
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~10ms
PM Sensorless Adjustment Procedure

11-136
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

1. When using high frequency standstill VFD parameter tuning, use VFD software v1.45 to
monitor adjustment procedure. To download VFD Sotware v1.45. go to:
http://www.delta.com.tw/product/em/drive/ac_motor/download/software/VFDSoft%20v1.45.zip

2. Testing PM High Frequency Standstill VFD (calculation of Rs, Ld, Lg)


Procedures:
A. Set control mode as VF mode (Pr00-10=0, Pr00-11=0
B. Output Frequency of Motor 1 (Pr01-01)
C. Output Voltage of Motor 1 (Pr01-02)
D. Induction Motor and Permanent Magnet Motor Selection (Pr05-33=1)
E. Full-load current of Permanent Magnet Motor(Pr05-34
F. Set Moto Auto Tuning Pr 05-00 =13; High frequency and blocked rotor test for PM motor.
Then run the drive.
3. Set control mode as PM sensorless Mode (Parameters 00-10=0, 00-11=6)
4. Set VFD Prameters
; Pr05-35 Rated Power of Permanent Magnet Motor
; Pr05-36 Rated speed of Permanent Magnet Motor
; Pr05-37 Pole number of Permanent Magnet Motor
; Pr05-38 Inertia of Permanent Magnet Motor
5. Set ASR Parameters
; Pr11-00 bit0=1: Auto tuning for ASR and APR
; Pr11-02:ASR1/ASR2 Switch Frequency, it is recommended to set Pr10-39 higher than
10Hz.
; Pr11-03: ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth and Pr11-03, ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth. Do not set
Low-speed Bandwith too high to avoid dissipation of the estimator.
6. Set speed estimator and speed control’s parameter.
; Pr10-39 Frequency when switch from I/F Mode to PM sensorless mode.
; Pr10-32 PM Sensorless Obeserver Bandwith for High Speed Zone
7. Zero-load test
; Refer to switch point prodcedure of I/F and FOC as shown in the image below.

11-137
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Set frequency com man d


(Hig her th an switch ing comm and)

Big variation of curre nt or


OC wh ile switch ing
Perfo rm RUN co mm and
Lower Per Unit of System
Inertia (Pr.11-01)/
Lower ASR1 Low-speed
Ban dwid th (Pr.11-03 )

Can the d rive run


NO
no rm ally until switching
to higher freque ncy?
Big variation of output
frequ ency or dissipa tion Observe output current/
fequen cy via
IncreasePM Sensorless Yes co mm nucation intreface
Observer Band width for
Hig h Spee d Zone (Pr.10-32)/
Decrease Pe r Unit of
System Inertia (Pr.11 -01)

NO Whe n running at high


frequency, is the freq uency
stable?
Obse rve o utput current/
Yes fequency via
com mnucation in treface

Increase load an d Test


Proced ure for switching between I/
F mo de and FOC mo de

11-138
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

11 Advanced Parameters This parameter can be set during operation.

In this parameter group, ASR is the abbreviation for Adjust Speed Regulator

System Control
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Auto tuning for ASR and APR
1: Inertia estimate (only in FOCPG mode)
2: Zero servo
3: Dead time compensation closed
7: Selection to save or not save the freqeuncy
Bit 0=0: Pr.11-06 to 11-11 will be valid and Pr.11-03~11-05 are invalid.
Bit 0=1: system will generate an ASR setting. At this moment, Pr.11-06~11-11 will be invalid and
Pr.11-03~11-05 are valid.
Bit 1=0: no function.
Bit 1=1: Inertia estimate function is enabled. (Bit 1 setting would not activate the estimation
process, please set Pr.05-00=12 to begin FOC/TQC Sensorless inertia estimating)
Bit 2=0: no function.
Bit 2=1: when frequency command is less than Fmin (Pr.01-07), it will use zero servo function.
NO
Estimate i ner tia value

YES

Setting auto gain adjustment


Pr.11-00=1 Adjust gai n value by manual
Pr.11-00=0 ( factor y setting)
Adjust Pr.11- 03, 11-04 and 11-05
separately by speed response Adjust Pr.11- 06, 11-07, 11- 08,
11-09, 11- 10 and 11- 11
Adjust by r equi rement separately by speed response
Pr.11-13 ( PD FF function)
Adjust by r equi rement
Pr.11-14 ( for general,
no need to adj us t)

Adjust by r equi rement


Pr.11-02
(A SR1/ASR 2 switch frequency)

Adjust by r equi rement


Pr.11-17~20 ( tor que limit)

11-139
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

PI PI

Pr.11-05
11-06 us e to adjust the
11-07 1. Pr. 11-01 valu e
stren gth o f ze ro -
se rvo lo ck 2. set Pr.11 -0 0 to bit 0=1
11-08
11-04
11-09

11-10 11-05
11-11 5Hz 5Hz 5Hz 5Hz

Hz Hz
0Hz 11-02 0Hz 11-02
PI ad justment-ma nual gain PI ad justment-auto gai n

Bit 7=0: frequency is saved before power turns off. When power turns on again, the display
frequency will be the memorized frequency.
Bit 7=1: frequency is not saved before power turns off. When power turns ON again, the display
frequency will be 0.00Hz.

Per Unit of System Inertia


Factory Setting: 400
Settings 1~65535(256=1PU)
To get the system inertia from Pr.11-01, user needs to set Pr.11-00 to bit1=1 and execute
continuous forward/reverse running.
Unit of induction motor system inertia is 0.001kg-m^2:
Power Setting
1HP 2.3
2HP 4.3
3HP 8.3
5HP 14.8
7.5HP 26.0
10HP 35.8
The base value for induction motor system inertia is set by Pr.05-38 and the unit is in 0.001kg-m^2.

ASR1/ASR2 Switch Frequency


Factory Setting: 7.00
Settings 5.00~600.00Hz
0: no function

ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth


Factory Setting: 10
Settings 1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth
Factory Setting: 10
Settings 1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
Zero-speed Bandwidth
Factory Setting: 10

11-140
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Settings 1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)


After estimating inertia and set Pr.11-00 to bit 0=1 (auto tuning), user can adjust parameters
Pr.11-03, 11-04 and 11-05 separately by speed response. The larger number you set, the faster
response you will get. Pr.11-02 is the switch frequency for low-speed/high-speed bandwidth.

ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (P) 1


Factory Setting: 10
Settings 0~40 Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (I) 1
Factory Setting: 0.100
Settings 0.000~10.000 sec

ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (PI) 2


Factory Setting: 10
Settings 0~40 Hz (IM)/ 0~100Hz (PM)
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (I) 2
Factory Setting: 0.100
Settings 0.000~10.000 sec
ASR(Auto Speed Regulation) Control (P) of Zero Speed
Factory Setting: 10
Settings 0~40 Hz (IM)/ 0~100Hz (PM)
ASR(Auto Speed Regulation) Control (I) of Zero Speed
Factory Setting: 0.100
Settings 0.000~10.000 sec

Gain for ASR Speed Feed Forward


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~100%
This parameter is used to improve speed response.

11- 12
G ain for ASR
speed feed for war d

+
+
00- 20 ASR + Tor que
command
- +
Tor que limit 11- 14
11- 17~11- 20
Speed feedback
T q B ias

PDFF Gain Value


Factory Setting: 30
Settings 0~200%
After finishing estimating and set Pr.11-00 to bit 0=1 (auto tuning), using Pr.11-13 to reduce

11-141
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

overshoot. Please adjust PDFF gain value by actual situation.


This parameter will be invalid when Pr.05-24 is set to 1.
frequency

PI
PD FF

T ime

Low-pass Filter Time of ASR Output


Factory Setting: 0.008
Settings 0.000~0.350 sec
It is used to set the filter time of ASR command.

Notch Filter Depth


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~20db
Notch Filter Frequency
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings 0.00~200.00Hz
This parameter is used to set resonance frequency of mechanical system. It can be used to
suppress the resonance of mechanical system.
The larger number you set Pr.11-15, the better suppression resonance function you will get.
The notch filter frequency is the resonance of mechanical frequency.

Forward Motor Torque Limit


Forward Regenerative Torque Limit
Reverse Motor Torque Limit
Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit
Factory Setting: 500
Settings 0~500%
The motor rated torque is 100%. The settings for Pr.11-17 to Pr.11-20 will compare with
Pr.03-00=7, 8, 9, 10. The minimum of the comparison result will be torque limit.
Calculation equation for motor rated torque:
P(W )
T ( N .M ) =
Motor rated torque= ω (rad / s) ; P(W) value= Pr.05-02;
RPM × 2π
= rad / s
ω(rad/s) value= Pr.05-03。 60

11-142
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Po sitiv e
to rque
Rev ers e mot or mode Forward mo tor mo de
06-1 2 current limit 06-1 2 current limit

Exte rnal ana lo g t ermin als E xt ernal an alog t erminals


Pr. 03-00~02 P r. 03-00 ~02
7: positive to rque limit 7: po sitiv e t orque limit The level o f t orque limit will b e
10: pos itiv e/n egat iv e torque limit 10: pos itiv e/ne gativ e t orque limit th e min. va lu e of fo llowing thre e v alues
9: regen erativ e t orque limit

Pr. 11-19 Pr. 11-17


Reverse rege nerat ive Fo rwa rd moto r
to rque limit t orque limit
s peed Q uadr ant II Q uadr ant I speed
Q uadr an t III Q ua dr an t IV

Pr. 11-20 Pr. 11-18


Reverse mot or Forward re genera tive
to rque limit t orque limit

Ex te rnal ana lo g t ermin als E xt ernal an alog t erminals


Pr. 03-00~ 03-0 2 Pr. 03-00~03-02
8: nega tiv e to rque limit 8 : ne gativ e t orque limit
10: positive/n egat ive torque limit 10: pos itive/ne gativ e t orque limit

06-1 2 current limit 06-1 2 c urrent limit


Reverse mot or mode Nega tive Forward mo tor mo de
to rque

Gain Value of Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 1


Factory Setting: 90
Settings 0~200%

Gain Value of Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 2


Factory Setting: 90
Settings 0~200%
Pr.11-21 and 11-22 are used to adjust the output voltage of flux weakening curve.
For the spindle application, the adjustment method is
1. It is used to adjust the output voltage when exceeding rated frequency.
2. Monitor the output voltage
3. Adjust Pr.11-21 (motor 1) or Pr.11-22 (motor 2) setting to make the output voltage reach motor
rated voltage.
4. The larger number it is set, the larger output voltage you will get.

11-143
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

output tor que


Fl ux weakening cur ve
11-21
or
11-22

100%
90%

01-01 frequency
or
01-35

Speed Response of Flux Weakening Area


Factory Setting: 65
Settings 0: Disable
0~150%
It is used to control the speed in the flux weakening area. The larger value is set in Pr.11-23, the
faster acceleration/deceleration will generate. In general, it is not necessary to adjust this
parameter.

Reserved
Reserved
Reserved

Max. Torque Command


Factory Setting: 100
Settings 0~500%
The upper limit of torque command is 100%.
Calculation equation for motor rated torque:
P(W )
motor rated torque: T ( N .M ) = ; P(W) value= Pr.05-02;
ω (rad / s)
RPM × 2π
ω(rad/s) value= Pr.05-03。 = rad / s
60

Source of Torque Offset


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Analog input (Pr.03-00)
2: Torque offset setting (Pr.11-29)
3: Control by external terminal (by Pr.11-30 to Pr.11-32)
This parameter is the source of torque offset.
When it is set to 3, source of torque offset would determine Pr.11-30 to Pr.11-32 by
When it is set to 3, the source of torque offset will regard Pr.11-30~11-32 by the multi-function
input terminals (MI) setting (31, 32 or 33).

11-144
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

N.O. switch status: ON= contact closed, OFF= contact open


Pr. 11-32 Pr. 11-31 Pr. 11-30
MI=33(High) MI=32(Mid) MI=31(Low) Torque Offset
OFF OFF OFF None
OFF OFF ON 11-30
OFF ON OFF 11-31
OFF ON ON 11-30+11-31
ON OFF OFF 11-32
ON OFF ON 11-30+11-32
ON ON OFF 11-31+11-32
ON ON ON 11-30+11-31+11-32

Torque Offset Setting


Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings 0.0~100.0%
This parameter is torque offset. The motor rated torque is 100%.

Calculation equation for motor rated torque:


P(W )
motor rated torque: T ( N .M ) = ; P(W) value= Pr.05-02;
ω (rad / s)
RPM × 2π
ω(rad/s) value= Pr.05-03。 = rad / s
60

High Torque Offset


Factory Setting: 30.0
Settings 0.0~100.0%
Middle Torque Offset
Factory Setting: 20.0
Settings 0.0~100.0%
Low Torque Offset
Factory Setting: 10.0
Settings 0.0~100.0%
When it is set to 3, the source of torque offset will regard Pr.11-30, Pr.11-31 and Pr.11-32 by the
multi-function input terminals setting (31, 32 or 33). The motor rated torque is 100%.
Calculation equation for motor rated torque:
P(W )
motor rated torque: T ( N .M ) = ; P(W) value= Pr.05-02;
ω (rad / s)
RPM × 2π
ω(rad/s) value= Pr.05-03。 = rad / s
60

Source of Torque Command


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Digital Keypad (Pr.11-34)
1: RS485 serial communication
2: Analog signal (Pr.03-00)

11-145
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

3: CANopen
When Pr.11-33 is set to 0, torque command can be set in Pr.11-34.
When Pr.11-33 is set to 1 or 2, Pr.11-34 would only display the torque command

Torque Command
Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings -100.0~100.0%(Pr.11-27=100%)
This parameter is for the torque command. When Pr.11-27 is set to 250% and Pr.11-34 is set to
100%, actual torque command=250X100%=250% motor rated torque.
The drive will save the setting to the record before power turns off.

Low-pass Filter Time of Torque Command


Factory Setting: 0.000
Settings 0.000~1.000 sec
When the setting is too long, the control will be stable but the control response will be delay. When
the setting is too short, the response will be quickly but the control maybe unstable. User can
adjust the setting by the control and response situation.

Speed Limit Selection


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Set by Pr.11-37 (Forward speed limit) and Pr.11-38 (Reverse speed limit)
1: Set by Pr.11-37,11-38 and Pr.00-20 (Source of Master Frequency
Command)
2: Set by Pr.00-20 (Source of Master Frequency Command).
Speed limit function: in TQCPG, when the motor speed is accelerated to speed limit value
(Pr.11-36, 11-37 and 11-38), it will switch to speed control mode to stop acceleration.
When the torque is positive direction, speed limit is positive direction. When the torque is negative
direction, speed limit is negative direction.
Pr. 11-36= 1 Pr. 11-36= 1
Pr. 11-36= 0 Whe n it is reverse runn in g,
Whe n it is f orward runn in g,
Forward/re vers e ru nning runn in g direc tion is limited
runn in g direc tion is limited
direc tion are by Pr. 11-37
by Pr. 00-20
limit ed b y Pr.11 -37 rev ers e runn in g direc tion
rev ers e runn in g direc tion
and Pr.1 1-38. is limit ed by P r.00-20 .
is limit ed by P r.11-38 .
to rque to rque to rque

mot or mot or mot or


speed speed speed
11-37 00-20 11-37

11-38 11-38 00-20

Forward Speed Limit (torque mode)


Factory Setting: 10
Settings 0~120%
Reverse Speed Limit (torque mode)
Factory Setting: 10

11-146
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 11 Description of Parameter Settings|C200 Series

Settings 0~120%
These parameters are used in the torque mode to limit the running direction and opposite
direction. (Pr.01-00 max. output frequency=100%)

Zero Torque Command Mode


Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Torque mode
1: Speed mode
This parameter defines the torque command mode at 0% of torque output. When Pr.11-39 is set
as 0 (the torque mode), if torque command is 0%, the motor will produce excitation current but no
torque current. When Pr.11-39 is set as 1 (the speed mode), if torque command is 0%, the AC
motor drive can still produce torque current through speed controller to prevent motor race and
the drive will also atomatically adjust the speed to 0 when the speed command is not equal to 0.

11-147
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 12 Warning Codes|C200 Series

Chapter 12 Warning Codes

2 Warning Dis p la y e rro r s ig n a l


CE01 A b b re v ia te erro r c o d e .
T h e c o d e is dis p la y e d a s s ho wn o n K P C-CE 0 1
Comm. Error 1
Dis p la y e rro r d e s c rip tio n

Display on Display on Descriptions


KPE-LE02 KPC-CC01

Warning
Keypad COPY error 1
SE1
Save Error 1

Warning
Keypad COPY error 2
SE2
Save Err or 2

Warning
Keypad COPY error 3
SE3
Copy M odel Err 3

Warning
PID feedback error
PID
PID FBK Error

Warning ACI signal error


ANL When Pr03-19 is set to 1 and 2.
Analog loss

Warning
Low current
uC
Under Current

Warning
PG feedback error
PGFb
PG FBK Warn

Warning
PG feedback loss
PGL
PG Loss Warn

Warning
Over-speed warning
oSPd
Over Speed Warn

12-1
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 12 Warning Codes|C200 Series

Display on Display on Descriptions


KPE-LE02 KPC-CC01

Warning
Over speed deviation warning
dAvE
Deviation Warn

Warning
Auto tuning processing
tUn
Auto tuning

Warning
CAN guarding time-out 1
CGdn
Guarding T-out

Warning
CAN heartbeat time-out 2
CHbn
Heartbeat T-out

Warning
CAN synchrony time-out
CSyn
SYNC T-out

Warning
CAN bus off
CbFn
Can Bus Off

Warning
CAN SDO transmission time-out
CSdn
SDO T-out

Warning
CAN SDO received register overflow
CSbn
Buf Overflow

Warning
CAN boot up error
Cbtn
Boot up fault

Warning
CAN format error
CPtn
Error Protocol

Warning
CAN index error
CLdn
CAN/S Idx exceed

Warning
CAN station address error
CAdn
CAN/S Addres set

12-2
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 12 Warning Codes|C200 Series

Display on Display on Descriptions


KPE-LE02 KPC-CC01

Warning
CAN memory error
CFrn
CAN/S FRAM fail

Warning
PLC download error
PLod
Opposite Defect

Warning
Save error of PLC download
PLSv
Save mem defect

Warning
Data error during PLC operation
PLdA
Data defect

Warning
Function code of PLC download error
PLFn
Function defect

Warning
PLC register overflow
PLor
Buf overflow

Warning
Function code of PLC operation error
PLFF
Function defect

Warning
PLC checksum error
PLSn
Check sum error

Warning
PLC end command is missing
PLEd
No end command

Warning
PLC MCR command error
PLCr
PLC MCR error

Warning
PLC download fail
PLdF
Download fail

Warning
PLC scan time exceed
PLSF
Scane time fail

12-3
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 12 Warning Codes|C200 Series

Display on Display on Descriptions


KPE-LE02 KPC-CC01

Warning
CAN Master guarding error
PCGd
CAN/M G uard err

Warning
PCbF CAN Master bus off
CAN/M bus off

Warning
PCnL CAN Master node error
CAN/M Node Lack

Warning
CAN/M cycle time-out
PCCt

Warning
CAN/M SDOover
PCSF
CAN/M SDO over

Warning
CAN/M SDO time-out
PCSd
CAN/M Sdo Tout

Warning
CAN/M station address error
PCAd
CAN/M Addres set
Over-current during acceleration
Fault (Output current exceeds triple rated current during acceleration.)
ocA
Corrective Actions:
Oc at accel 1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible poor insulation at the
output lines.
2. Acceleration Time too short: Increase the Acceleration Time.
3. AC motor drive output power is too small: Replace the AC motor
drive with the next higher power model.
Over-current during deceleration
Fault (Output current exceeds triple rated current during deceleration.)
ocd
Corrective Actions:
Oc at decel 1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible poor insulation at the
output line.
2. Deceleration Time too short: Increase the Deceleration Time.
AC motor drive output power is too small: Replace the AC motor drive with
the next higher power model.
Over-current during steady state operation
Fault (Output current exceeds triple rated current during constant speed.)
ocn
Corrective Actions:
Oc at normal SPD 1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible poor insulation at the
output line.
2. Sudden increase in motor loading: Check for possible motor stall.
AC motor drive output power is too small: Replace the AC motor drive with
the next higher power model.

12-4
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 12 Warning Codes|C200 Series

Display on Display on Descriptions


KPE-LE02 KPC-CC01
Over-current at stop
Fault
ocS Corrective Actions:
Oc at stop Return to the factory
Corrective Actions:
Fault When (one of) the output terminal(s) is grounded, short circuit current is
GFF more than 75% of AC motor drive rated current, the AC motor drive power
module may be damaged.
Ground fault NOTE: The short circuit protection is provided for AC motor drive
protection, not for protection of the user.
1. Check the wiring connections between the AC motor drive and motor
for possible short circuits, also to ground.
2. Check whether the IGBT power module is damaged.
3. Check for possible poor insulation at the output line.
Short-circuit is detected between upper bridge and lower bridge of
Fault the IGBT module.
occ
Corrective Actions:
Short Circuit Return to the factory
DC BUS over-voltage during acceleration
Fault (230V: DC 450V; 460V: DC 900V)
ovA
Corrective Actions:
Ov at accel 1. Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC motor drive input
voltage range.
2. Check for possible voltage transients.
3. If DC BUS over-voltage due to regenerative voltage, please increase
the Deceleration Time or add an optional brake resistor.
DC BUS over-voltage during deceleration (230V: DC 450V; 460V: DC
Fault 900V)
ovd
Corrective Actions:
Ov at decel 1. Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC motor drive input
voltage range.
2. Check for possible voltage transients.
3. If DC BUS over-voltage due to regenerative voltage, please increase
the Deceleration Time or add an optional brake resistor.
DC BUS over-voltage during constant speed (230V: DC 450V; 460V:
Fault DC 900V)
ovn
Corrective Actions:
Ov at nor mal SPD 1. Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC motor drive input
voltage range.
2. Check for possible voltage transients.
3. If DC BUS over-voltage due to regenerative voltage, please increase
the Deceleration Time or add an optional brake resistor.
DC BUS over-voltage at stop
Fault
ovS Corrective Actions:
1. Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC motor drive input
Ov at stop voltage range.
2. Check for possible voltage transients.
DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06-00 during acceleration.
Fault
LvA Corrective Actions:
1. Check if the input voltage is normal
Lv at accel 2. Check for possible sudden load
DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06-00 during deceleration.
Fault
Lvd Corrective Actions:
1. Check if the input voltage is normal
Lv at decel 2. Check for possible sudden load

12-5
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 12 Warning Codes|C200 Series

Display on Display on Descriptions


KPE-LE02 KPC-CC01
DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06-00 during constant speed.
Fault
Lvn Corrective Actions:
1. Check if the input voltage is normal
Lv at normal SPD 2. Check for possible sudden load
Low voltage at stop
Fault
LvS Corrective Actions:
1. Check if the input voltage is normal
Lv at stop 2. Check for possible sudden load
Phase Loss
Fault
orP Corrective Actions:
Check Power Source Input if all 3 input phases are connected without
Phase lacked loose contacts.
IGBT overheating
Fault IGBT temperature exceeds protection level
o
oH1 40 to100HP: 100 C
IGBT over heat Corrective Actions:
1. Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within the specified
temperature range.
2. Make sure that the ventilation holes are not obstructed.
3. Remove any foreign objects from the heatsinks and check for
possible dirty heat sink fins.
4. Check the fan and clean it.
5. Provide enough spacing for adequate ventilation.
Heatsink overheating
Fault Capacitance temperature exceeds cause heatsink overheating.
oH2
Corrective Actions:
CAP over heat 1. Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within the specified
temperature range.
2. Make sure heat sink is not obstructed. Check if the fan is operating
3. Check if there is enough ventilation clearance for AC motor drive.
Motor overheating
Fault The AC motor drive detecting internal temperature exceeds the setting of
oH3 Pr.06-30 (PTC level)
Motor over heat Corrective Actions:
1. Make sure that the motor is not obstructed.
2. Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within the specified
temperature range.
3. Take the next higher power AC motor drive model.
Motor 1 overload
Fault
tH1o Corrective Actions:
1. Check whether the motor is overloaded.
Thermo 1 open 2. Check whether the rated current of motor (Pr.05-01) is suitable
3. Take the next higher power AC motor drive model.
Motor overheating
Fault The AC motor drive detects that the internal temperature exceeds
tH2o Pr.06-30 (PTC level)
Thermo 2 open Corrective Actions:
1. Make sure that the motor is not obstructed.
2. Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within the specified
temperature range.
3. Take the next higher power AC motor drive model.

12-6
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 12 Warning Codes|C200 Series

Display on Display on Descriptions


KPE-LE02 KPC-CC01
Overload
Fault The AC motor drive detects excessive drive output current.
oL NOTE: The AC motor drive can withstand up to 150% of the rated
current for a maximum of 60 seconds.
Over load
Corrective Actions:
1. Check whether the motor is overloaded.
2. Take the next higher power AC motor drive model.
Electronic Thermal Relay 1 Protection
Fault
EoL1 Corrective Actions:
1. Check whether the motor is overloaded.
Thermal relay 1 2. Check whether motor rated current setting (Pr.05-01) is suitable
3. Check electronic thermal relay function
4. Take the next higher power AC motor drive model.
Electronic Thermal Relay 2 Protection
Fault
EoL2 Corrective Actions:
1. Check whether the motor is overloaded.
Thermal relay 2 2. Check whether motor rated current setting (Pr.05-01) is suitable
3. Check electronic thermal relay function
4. Take the next higher power AC motor drive model.
These two fault codes will be displayed when output current exceeds
Fault
the over-torque detection level (Pr.06-07 or Pr.06-10) and exceeds
ot1 over-torque detection (Pr.06-08 or Pr.06-11) and it is set to 2 or 4 in
Over torque 1 Pr.06-06 or Pr.06-09.

Corrective Actions:
Fault 1. Check whether the motor is overloaded.
ot2 2. Check whether motor rated current setting (Pr.05-01) is suitable
Over torque 2 3. Take the next higher power AC motor drive model.
Internal EEPROM can not be programmed.
Fault
cF1 Corrective Actions:
1. Press “RESET” key to the factory setting.
EEPROM write err 2. Return to the factory.
Internal EEPROM can not be read.
Fault
Corrective Actions:
cF2
1. Press “RESET” key to the factory setting.
EEPROM read err 2. Return to the factory.
U-phase error
Fault
cd1 Corrective Actions:
Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still displayed on the keypad, please
Ias sensor err return to the factory.
V-phase error
Fault
cd2 Corrective Actions:
Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still displayed on the keypad, please
Ibs sensor err return to the factory.
W-phase error
Fault
cd3 Corrective Actions:
Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still displayed on the keypad, please
Ics sensor err return to the factory.
CC (current clamp)
Fault
Hd0 Corrective Actions:
Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still displayed on the keypad, please
cc HW error return to the factory.

12-7
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 12 Warning Codes|C200 Series

Display on Display on Descriptions


KPE-LE02 KPC-CC01
OC hardware error
Fault
Hd1 Corrective Actions:
Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still displayed on the keypad, please
Oc HW error return to the factory.
OV hardware error
Fault
Hd2 Corrective Actions:
Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still displayed on the keypad, please
Ov HW error return to the factory.
Occ hardware error
Fault
Hd3 Corrective Actions:
Reboots the power. If fault code is still displayed on the keypad please
occ HW error return to the factory
Auto tuning error
Fault
AUE Corrective Actions:
1. Check cabling between drive and motor
Auto tuning err 2. Check the motor capacity and parameters settings
3. Retry again
PID loss (ACI)
Fault
AFE Corrective Actions:
1. Check the wiring of the PID feedback
PID Fbk error 2. Check the PID parameters settings
PG feedback error
Fault
PGF1 Corrective Actions:
PG Fbk error Check if Pr.10-01 is not set to 0 when it is PG feedback control

PG feedback loss
Fault
PGF2 Corrective Actions:
PG Fbk loss Check the wiring of the PG feedback
PG feedback stall
Fault
PGF3 Corrective Actions:
1. Check the wiring of the PG feedback
PG Fbk over SPD 2. Check if the setting of PI gain and deceleration is suitable
3. Return to the factory
PG slip error
Fault
PGF4 Corrective Actions:
1. Check the wiring of the PG feedback
PG Fbk deviate 2. Check if the setting of PI gain and deceleration is suitable
3. Return to the factory
Pulse input error
Fault
PGr1 Corrective Actions:
1. Check the pulse wiring
PG Ref error 2. Return to the factory
Pulse input loss
Fault
PGr2 Corrective Actions:
1. Check the pulse wiring
PG Ref loss 2. Return to the factory

12-8
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 12 Warning Codes|C200 Series

Display on Display on Descriptions


KPE-LE02 KPC-CC01
ACI loss
Fault
ACE Corrective Actions:
1. Check the ACI wiring
ACI loss Check if the ACI signal is less than 4mA
External Fault
Fault
EF Corrective Actions:
1. Input EF (N.O.) on external terminal is closed to GND. Output U, V,
External fault W will be turned off.
2. Give RESET command after fault has been cleared.
Emergency stop
Fault
EF1 Corrective Actions:
1. When the multi-function input terminals MI1 to MI8 are set to
Emergency stop emergency stop and the AC motor drive stops output.
2. Press RESET after fault has been cleared.
Base Block
Fault
Corrective Actions:
bb
1. When the multi-function input terminals MI1 to MI8 are set to base
Base block block and the AC motor drive stops output.
2. Press RESET after fault has been cleared.
Password is locked
Fault
Pcod Corrective Actions:
Keypad will be locked. Turn the power ON after power OFF to re-enter the
Password error correct password. See Pr.00-07 and 00-08.
Illegal function code
Fault
CE01 Corrective Actions:
PC err command Check if the function code is correct (function code must be 03, 06, 10, 63)

Illegal data length


Fault
CE02 Corrective Actions:
PC err address Check if the communication data length is correct.

Illegal data value


Fault
CE03 Corrective Actions:
PC err data Check if the data value exceeds max./min. value.

illegal communication address


Fault
CE04 Corrective Actions:
PC slave fault Check if the communication address is correct.

Communication time-out
Fault
CE10 Corrective Actions:
PC time out Check if the wiring for the communication is correct.
Keypad (KPVL-CC01) communication time-out
Fault
CP10 Corrective Actions:
1. Check if the wiring for the communication is correct
PU time out 2. Check if there is any wrong with the keypad
Brake chopper fail
Fault
bF Corrective Actions:
Press RESET key to correct it. If fault code is still displayed on the keypad,
Braking fault please return to the factory.

12-9
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 12 Warning Codes|C200 Series

Display on Display on Descriptions


KPE-LE02 KPC-CC01
Y-connection/Δ-connection switch error
Fault
ydc Corrective Actions:
1. Check the wiring of the Y-connection/Δ-connection
Y-delta connect
2. Check the parameters settings
When Pr.07-13 is not set to 0 and momentary power off or power cut, it
Fault will display dEb during accel./decel. stop.
dEb
Corrective Actions:
Dec. Energy back
1. Set Pr.07-13 to 0
2. Check if input power is stable
It will be displayed when slip exceeds Pr.05-26 setting and time
Fault exceeds Pr.05-27 setting.
oSL
Corrective Actions:
Over slip error 1. Check if motor parameter is correct (please decrease the load if
overload
2. Check the settings of Pr.05-26 and Pr.05-27

Fault
oPL1 Output phase loss (Phase U)
U phase lacked

Fault
oPL2 Output phase loss (Phase V)
V phase lacked

Fault
oPL3 Output phase loss (Phase W)
W phase lacked

Fault
CGdE CPU trap error
Guarding T-out

Fault
CHbE CANopen guarding error
Heartbeat T-out

Fault
CSYE CANopen heartbeat error
SYNC T-out

Fault
CbFE CANopen synchronous error
Can bus off

Fault
CIdE CANopen bus off error
Can bus Index Err

12-10
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 12 Warning Codes|C200 Series

Display on Display on Descriptions


KPE-LE02 KPC-CC01

Fault
CAdE CANopen index error
Can bus Add. Err

Fault
CFrE CANopen station address error
Can bus off

12-11
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

Chapter 13 CANopen Overview


Newest version is available at http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/

13.1 CANopen Overview


13.2 Wiring for CANopen
13.3 How to control by CANopen
13.3.1 CANopen Control Mode Selection
13.3.2 DS402 Standard Control Mode
13.3.3 Delta Defined Control Mode (There are two modes available)
13.4 CANopen Supporting Index
13.5 CANopen Fault Code
13.6 CANopen LED Function

The built-in CANopen function is a kind of remote control. Master can control the AC motor drive by using CANopen
protocol. CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol. It provides standardized communication objects, including
real-time data (Process Data Objects, PDO), configuration data (Service Data Objects, SDO), and special functions
(Time Stamp, Sync message, and Emergency message). And it also has network management data, including
Boot-up message, NMT message, and Error Control message. Refer to CiA website http://www.can-cia.org/ for
details. The content of this instruction sheet may be revised without prior notice. Please consult our distributors or
download the most updated version at http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/

Delta CANopen supporting functions:


„ Support CAN2.0A Protocol;
„ Support CANopen DS301 V4.02;
„ Support DSP-402 V2.0.
Delta CANopen supporting services:
„ PDO (Process Data Objects): PDO1~ PDO2
„ SDO (Service Data Object):
Initiate SDO Download;
Initiate SDO Upload;
Abort SDO;
SDO message can be used to configure the slave node and access the Object Dictionary in every node.
„ SOP (Special Object Protocol):
Support default COB-ID in Predefined Master/Slave Connection Set in DS301 V4.02;
Support SYNC service;
Support Emergency service.
„ NMT (Network Management):
Support NMT module control;
Support NMT Error control;
Support Boot-up.
Delta CANopen not supporting service:
„ Time Stamp service

13-1
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

13.1 CANopen Overview


CANopen Protocol
CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol, and was designed for motion-oriented machine
control networks, such as handling systems. Version 4 of CANopen (CiA DS301) is standardized as
EN50325-4. The CANopen specifications cover application layer and communication profile (CiA
DS301), as well as a framework for programmable devices (CiA 302), recommendations for cables
and connectors (CiA 303-1) and SI units and prefix representations (CiA 303-2).

Device Profile CiA Device Profile CiA Device Profile CiA


DSP-401 DSP-404 DSP-XXX

OSI Layer 7
Application Communication Profile CiA DS-301

OSI Layer 2
CAN Controller CAN 2.0A
Data Link Layer

+ -
OSI Layer 1
Physical Layer + - ISO 11898

CAN bus

RJ-45 Pin Definition

8~1
plug

PIN Signal Description


1 CAN_H CAN_H bus line (dominant high)
2 CAN_L CAN_L bus line (dominant low)
3 CAN_GND Ground / 0V /V-
7 CAN_GND Ground / 0V /V-

13-2
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

Pre-Defined Connection Set


To reduce configuration effort for simple networks, CANopen define a mandatory default identifier
allocation scheme. The 11-bit identifier structure in predefined connection is set as follows:

COB Identifier (CAN Identifier)


10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Function Code Node Number

Object Function Code Node Number COB-ID Object Dictionary Index


Broadcast messages
NMT 0000 - 0 -
SYNC 0001 - 80H 1005H, 1006H, 1007H
TIME STAMP 0010 - 100H 1012H, 1013H
Point-to-point messages
Emergency 0001 1-127 81H-FFH 1014H, 1015H
TPDO1 0011 1-127 181H-1FFH 1800H
RPDO1 0100 1-127 201H-27FH 1400H
TPDO2 0101 1-127 281H-2FFH 1801H
RPDO2 0110 1-127 301H-37FH 1401H
TPDO3 0111 1-127 381H-3FFH 1802H
RPDO3 1000 1-127 401H-47FH 1402H
TPDO4 1001 1-127 481H-4FFH 1803H
RPDO4 1010 1-127 501H-57FH 1403H
Default SDO (tx) 1011 1-127 581H-5FFH 1200H
Default SDO (rx) 1100 1-127 601H-67FH 1200H
NMT Error Control 1110 1-127 701H-77FH 1016H, 1017H

CANopen Communication Protocol


It has services as follows:
„ NMT (Network Management Object)
„ SDO (Service Data Objects)
„ PDO (Process Data Object)
„ EMCY (Emergency Object)
NMT (Network Management Object)

The Network Management (NMT) follows a Master/Slave structure for executing NMT service. Only
one NMT master is in a network, and other nodes are regarded as slaves. All CANopen nodes have
a present NMT state, and NMT master can control the state of the slave nodes. The state diagram
of a node is shown as follows:

13-3
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

(1)
Initializing

(15)

Reset Application (9)


(10)
(11)
(16)

Reset Communication

(2)F
(14)
Pre-Operation ABCD
(3) (4) (5) (7)
(13)
Stopped AB
(6) (8)
(12)
Operation ABCD

(1) After power is applied, it is auto in initialization state A: NMT


(2) Enter pre-operational state automatically B: Node Guard
(3) (6) Start remote node
C: SDO
(4) (7) Enter pre-operational state
D: Emergency
(5) (8) Stop remote node
(9) (10) (11) Reset node E: PDO
(12) (13) (14) Reset communication F: Boot-up
(15) Enter reset application state automatically
(16) Enter reset communication state automatically

Initializing Pre-Operational Operational Stopped


PDO ○
SDO ○ ○
SYNC ○ ○
Time Stamp ○ ○
EMCY ○ ○
Boot-up ○
NMT ○ ○ ○

NMT Protocol is shown as follows:


CS
NMT Master Start Remote Node NMT Slave(s) Value Definition
Request byte 0 byte 1 Indication(s) 1 Start
CS Node-ID
request
Indication 2 Stop
COB-ID=0 Indication
Indication
128 Enter Pre-Operational
129 Reset Node
130 Reset Communication

13-4
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

SDO (Service Data Objects)

SDO is used to access the Object Dictionary in every CANopen node by Client/Server model. One
SDO has two COB-ID (request SDO and response SDO) to upload or download data between two
nodes. No data limit for SDOs to transfer data. But it needs to transfer by segment when data
exceeds 4 bytes with an end signal in the last segment.

The Object Dictionary (OD) is a group of objects in CANopen node. Every node has an OD in the
system, and OD contains all parameters describing the device and its network behavior. The access
path of OD is the index and sub-index, each object has a unique index in OD, and has sub-index if
necessary. The request and response frame structure of SDO communication is shown as follows:

Data 0 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7


Type 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Index Index Index Data Data Data Data
command L H Sub LL LH HL HH
Initiate Client 0 0 1 - N E S
Domain Server 0 1 1 -
- - - -
Download
Initiate Client 0 1 0 - - - - -
Domain Server 0 1 0 - N E S
Upload
Abort Domain Client 1 0 0 - - - - -
Transfer Server 1 0 0 - - - - -
N: Bytes not use
E: normal(0)/expedited(1)
S: size indicated
PDO (Process Data Object)
PDO communication can be described by the producer/consumer model. Each node of the network
will listen to the messages of the transmission node and distinguish if the message has to be
processed or not after receiving the message. PDO can be transmitted from one device to one
another device or to many other devices. Every PDO has two PDO services: a TxPDO and a
RxPDO. PDOs are transmitted in a non-confirmed mode.
PDO Transmission type is defined in the PDO communication parameter index (1400h for the 1st
RxPDO or 1800h for the 1st TxPDO), and all transmission types are listed in the following table:
PDO
Type Number
Cyclic Acyclic Synchronous Asynchronous RTR only
0 ○ ○
1-240 ○ ○
241-251 Reserved
252 ○ ○
253 ○ ○
254 ○
255 ○
Type number 1-240 indicates the number of SYNC message between two PDO transmissions.
Type number 252 indicates the data is updated (but not sent) immediately after receiving SYNC.
Type number 253 indicates the data is updated immediately after receiving RTR.
Type number 254: Delta CANopen doesn’t support this transmission format.
Type number 255 indicates the data is asynchronous transmission.

13-5
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

All PDO transmission data must be mapped to index via Object Dictionary.
Example:
Master transmits PDO data to Slave
PDO1
CAN(H)
CAN(L)

Master Slave

PDO1 data value Data 0, Data 1, Data 2, Data 3, Data 4, Data 5, Data 6, Data 7,
0x11, 0x22, 0x33, 0x44, 0x55, 0x66, 0x77, 0x88,
Index Sub Definition Value R/W Size

0x1600 0 0. Number 1 R/W U8


0x1600 1 1. Mapped Object 0x60400010 R/W U32
PDO1 Map 0x1600 2 2. Mapped Object 0 R/W U32
0x1600 3 3. Mapped Object 0 R/W U32
0x1600 4 4. Mapped Object 0 R/W U32

U16
0x60400010 0x6040 0 0. Control word 0x2211 R/W (2 Bytes)

Slave returns message to Master


PDO1
CAN(H)
CAN(L)

Master Slave

PDO1 data value Data 0, Data 1, Data 2, Data 3, Data 4, Data 5, Data 6, Data 7,
0xF3, 0x00,

Index Sub Definition Value R/W Size

0x1A00 0 0. Number 1 R/W U8


0x1A00 1 1. Mapped Object 0x60410010 R/W U32
PDO1 Map 0x1A00 2 2. Mapped Object 0 R/W U32
0x1A00 3 3. Mapped Object 0 R/W U32
0x1A00 4 4. Mapped Object 0 R/W U32

0x6041 0 Status Word 0xF3 R/W U16

EMCY (Emergency Object)


Emergency objects are triggered when hardware failure occurs for a warning interrupt. The data
format of a emergency object is a 8 bytes data as shown in the following:
Byte 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Content Emergency Error Code Error register
Manufacturer specific Error Field
(Object 1001H)
Please refer to Chapter 13.5 CANopen error codes for emergency definition of C200.

13-6
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

Example:

Master send NM message to slave 1 for RESET request.


Slave 1 responds no error
Slave 1 responds a boot up message
Master enter Index6040 = 7EH in slave 1
Slave 1 responds OK
Master enter Index6040= 7FH in slave 1
Slave 1 responds OK
Master enter value for Index6041 to slave 1
Slave 1 responds 0640H
Master enter SYNC
Master enter PD01=2211H to slave 1

13-7
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

13.2 Wiring for CANopen


An external adapter card: EKCB-HUB01 is used for CANopen wiring; establish CANopen to VFD
C200 connection. The link is enabled by using RJ45 cable. The two farthest ends must be terminated
with 120Ω terminating resistors.

13-8
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

13.3 How to Control by CANopen


13.3.1 CANopen Control Mode Selection
There are two control modes for CANopen; Pr.09-40 set to 1 is the factory setting mode DS402
standard and Pr.09.40 set to 0 is Delta’s standard setting mode.

13.3.2 DS402 Standard Control Mode


To control the AC motor drive by CANopen, please set the parameters by the following steps:
1. Wiring for hardware (refer to Chapter 2 Wiring for CANopen)
2. Operation source setting: set Pr.00.21 to 3 (CANopen communication. Keypad STOP/RESET
disabled.)
3. Frequency source setting: set Pr.02.00 to 6 for CANopen communication card control. For
CANopen to do torque control, set Pr.11-33 to 3; to do position control, set Pr.11-40 to 3. Also
set Pr.09-30 to 1 (decoding method 2), use new address 60XX to control torque and position.
The old address 20XX does not support torque and position control.
4. Source of torque setting is set by Pr.11-33.

5. CANopen station setting: set Pr.09-36 (Range of setting is 1~127. When Pr.09-36=0, CANopen
slave function is disabled. ) (Note: If error occurred (CAdE or CANopen memory error) as station
setting is completed, press Pr.00-02=7 for reset.)
6. CANopen baud rate setting: set Pr.09.37 (CANBUS Baud Rate: 1M(0), 500K(1), 250K(2),
125K(3), 100K(4) and50K(5))
7. Set multiple input functions to Quick Stop (it can also be enable or disable, default setting is
disable). If it is necessary to enable the function, set MI terminal to 53 in one of the following
parameter: Pr.02.01 ~Pr.02.08 or Pr.02.26 ~ Pr.02.31. (Note: This function is available in DS402
only.)
8. Switch to C2000 operation mode via the NMT string; control word 0x6040 (bit 0, bit 1, bit 2, bit 3
and bit 7) and status word 0x6041.

For example:

1. If the multi-function input terminal MI set Quick Stop to disable, enable the responsive
terminal of such MI terminal.
2. Set index 6040H to 7EH.
3. Set index 6040H to 7FH, the drive is now in operation mode.
4. Set index 6042H to 1500 (rpm), the default setting for pole is 4 (50Hz). Set the pole in
Pr.05.04 (Motor1) and Pr.05.16 (Motor 2).

120
Calculation for motor speed: n = f × where n = ramp per minute (rpm/min);
p
P = poles
f = frequency (Hz)

Example 1: set motor running in forward direction, f = 30Hz, P = 4.


(120*30)/4 = 900rpm

Example 2: set motor running in reverse direction, f = 20Hz, P = 6.


(120*15)/6 = 300rpm; 300rpm = 0x012C
Also,

13-9
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

Bit15 defines the positive and negative sign.


i.e. Index 6042 = -300 = ( 300’ + 1) = 012CH’ + 1 = FED3H +1 = FED4H

Switching mode:

Power
Start Fault Reaction Active
Disable
X0XX1111

Not Ready to Switch On


X0XX0000 Fault
X0XX1000
XXXXXXX
Switch On Disable
0XXXXX0X X1XX0000

0XXXXX0X
0XXXX110 or
and 0XXXX01X
Disable QStop=1 or
Disable QStop=0
Ready to Switch On
0XXXXX0X
X01X0001 or
0XXXX01X Fault
0XXXX111 0XXXX110 or
Disable QStop=0 Power
Switch On
Enable
X01X0011
0XXXXX0X
or
0XXX1111 0XXX0110 0XXXX01X Fout=0
or
0XXX1111 Disable QStop=0
Operation Enable Quick Stop Active
X01X0111 0XXX1111 X00X0111
and
Disable QStop=1

< Status Switching Graph>

9. The operation of AC motor drive in DS402 standard is controlled by the Control Word 0x6040
(bit4~bit6), as shown in the following chart:
Index 6040
END
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
Other Decelerate to 0Hz
Speed 1 0 1 LOCK 在當前頻率
(Index 6060=2)
1 1 1 運轉到目標頻率
Index 6040
END
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
Torque X X X 運轉到目標扭力
(Index 6060=4)

10. Follow the same steps, refer to status switching process for status word 0x6041(bit 0 to bit 6), bit
7= warn, bit 9 = 1 (permanently), bit 10= target frequency reached, bit 11= output exceeds
maximum frequency.

13-10
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

13.3.3 Delta Defined Control Mode


There are two control modes.
1. Wiring for hardware (refer to chapter 13-2 Wiring for CANopen)
2. Operation source setting: set Pr.00-21 to 3 for CANopen communication control.
3. Frequency source setting: set Pr.00.20 to 6 (CANopen setting. If torque control or position
control is required, set Pr.0.02 to 2. Also set Pr.09.30 to 1(default setting) to allow new address
60XX to function, the old address 20XX can not support the control function for position and
torque.
4. Source of torque setting is set by Pr.11-33.
5. CANopen station setting: set Pr.09-36 (Range of setting is 1~127. When Pr.09-36=0, CANopen
slave function is disabled. ) (Note: If error occurred (CAdE or CANopen memory error) as station
setting is completed, press Pr.00-02=7 for reset.)
6. CANopen baud rate setting: set Pr.09.37 (CANopen Baud Rate: 1M(0), 500K(1), 250K(2),
125K(3), 100K(4) and 50K(5))
7. CANopen decode method setting: set Pr.09.40 to 0 (Delta decoding method). It provides two
decoding method by using Pr.09-30 and the default setting of the drive is in decoding method 2
(Pr.09-30=1).
8. Decoding method 1. In index 2020.01 enter 0002H for motor run; 0001H for motor stop. In index
2020.02 enter 1000, frequency will be 10.00Hz. Refer to Index 2020 and 2021 for more detail.
9. Decoding method 2. In index 2060.01 enter 0080H for motor switch on; enter 0x81 for motor run
to the target frequency. Various control mode options are available in Pr.00-40, select your
control mode.

13-11
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

13.4 CANopen Supporting Index


Basic Index Support by C200:
Index Sub Definition Factory Setting R/W Size Note

1000H 0 Device type 00010192H R U32

1001H 0 Error register 0 R U8

1005H 0 COB-ID SYNC message 80H R U32


Unit: us
The setting value should be in a
1006H 0 Communication cycle period 0 RW U32
multiple of 500us (integer)
within the range 500us to 16ms
1008H 0 Manufacturer device name 0 R U32

1009H 0 Manufacturer hardware version 0 R U32

100AH 0 Manufacturer software version 0 R U32

100CH 0 Guarding time 0 RW U16 Unit: ms

100DH 0 Guarding factor 0 RW U8

0 Store Parameter 2 R U8

1010H 1 Save all parameters 0 RW U32

2 Save communication parameter 1 RW U32

0 Restore Parameter 2 R U8

1011H 1 Restore all parameters 0 RW U32


Restore communication
2 1 RW U32
parameter
1014H 0 COB-ID emergency 0000080H+Node-ID R U32
Unit:100us
1015H 0 Inhibit time EMCY 0 RW U16 The setting value should be in a
multiple of 10 (integer)
0 Consumer heartbeat time 1 R U8
1016H Unit: 1ms
1 Consumer 1 0 RW U32 Disable Guarding time to function
properly
Unit: 1ms
1017H 0 Producer heartbeat time 0 RW U16 Disable Guarding time to function
properly
0 Number 0 R U8

1 Vender ID 000001DDH R U32


1018H
2 Product code 2A00+machine code R U32

3 Revision 00010000H R U32

0 Server SDO Parameter 2 R U8

1200H 1 COB-ID Client -> Server 0000600H+Node-ID R U32

2 COB-ID Client <- Server 0000580H+Node-ID R U32

0 Number 2 R U8

1 COB-ID used by PDO 00000200H+Node-ID RW U32


1400H 00:Acyclic& Synchronous
2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 01~240:Cyclic & Synchronous
255:Asynchronous

13-12
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

Index Sub Definition Factory Setting R/W Size Note

0 Number 2 R U8

1 COB-ID used by PDO 80000300H+Node-ID RW U32


1401H 00: Acyclic & Synchronous
2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 01~240:Cyclic & Synchronous
255:Asynchronous
0 Number 2 R U8

1 COB-ID used by PDO 80000400H+Node-ID RW U32


1402H 00: Acyclic & Synchronous
2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 01~240:Cyclic & Synchronous
255:Asynchronous
0 Number 2 R U8

1 COB-ID used by PDO 80000500H+Node-ID RW U32


1403H 00: Acyclic & Synchronous
2 Transmission Type 5H RW U8 01~240:Cyclic & Synchronous
255:Asynchronous
0 Number 2 RW U8

1 1.Mapped Object 60400010H RW U32

1600H 2 2.Mapped Object 60420010H RW U32

3 3.Mapped Object 0 RW U32

4 4.Mapped Object 0 RW U32

0 Number 3 RW U8

1 1.Mapped Object 20264110H RW U32

1601H 2 2.Mapped Object 2026A110H RW U32

3 3.Mapped Object 2026A210H RW U32

4 4.Mapped Object 0 RW U32

0 Number 3 RW U8

1 1.Mapped Object 60400010H RW U32


1602H 2 2.Mapped Object 607A0020H RW U32

3 3.Mapped Object 60600008H RW U32

4 4.Mapped Object 0 RW U32

0 Number 3 RW U8

1 1.Mapped Object 60400010H RW U32


1603H 2 2.Mapped Object 60710010H RW U32

3 3.Mapped Object 60600008H RW U32

4 4.Mapped Object 0 RW U32

1800H 0 Number 5 R U8

1 COB-ID used by PDO 00000180H+Node-ID RW U32


00: Acyclic & Synchronous
2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 01~240:Cyclic & Synchronous
255:Asynchronous

13-13
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

Index Sub Definition Factory Setting R/W Size Note


Unit: 100us
3 Inhibit time 0 RW U16 The setting value should be in a
multiple of 10 (integer)
4 CMS-Priority Group 3 RW U8

5 Event timer 0 RW U16 Unit: 1ms

0 Number 5 R U8

1 COB-ID used by PDO 80000280H+Node-ID RW U32


00: Acyclic & Synchronous
2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 01~240:Cyclic & Synchronous
1801H 255:Asynchronous
Unit: 100us
3 Inhibit time 0 RW U16 The setting value should be in a
multiple of 10 (integer)
4 CMS-Priority Group 3 RW U8

5 Event timer 0 RW U16 Unit: 1ms

0 Number 5 R U8

1 COB-ID used by PDO 80000380H+Node-ID RW U32


00: Acyclic & Synchronous
2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 01~240:Cyclic & Synchronous
1802H 255:Asynchronous
Unit: 100us
3 Inhibit time 0 RW U16 The setting value should be in a
multiple of 10 (integer)
4 CMS-Priority Group 3 RW U8

5 Event timer 0 RW U16 Unit: 1ms

0 Number 5 R U8

1 COB-ID used by PDO 80000480H+Node-ID RW U32


00: Acyclic & Synchronous
2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 01~240:Cyclic & Synchronous
1803H 255:Asynchronous
Unit: 100us
3 Inhibit time 0 RW U16 The setting value should be in a
multiple of 10 (integer)
4 CMS-Priority Group 3 RW U8

5 Event timer 0 RW U16 Unit: 1ms

0 Number 2 RW U8

1 1.Mapped Object 60410010H RW U32

1A00H 2 2.Mapped Object 60430010H RW U32

3 3.Mapped Object 0 RW U32

4 4.Mapped Object 0 RW U32

1A01H 0 Number 4 RW U8

1 1.Mapped Object 20260110H RW U32

2 2.Mapped Object 20266110H RW U32

3 3.Mapped Object 20266210H RW U32

13-14
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

Index Sub Definition Factory Setting R/W Size Note

4 4.Mapped Object 20266310H RW U32

0 Number 3 RW U8

1 1.Mapped Object 60410010H RW U32

1A02H 2 2.Mapped Object 60640020H RW U32

3 3.Mapped Object 60610008H RW U32

4 4.Mapped Object 0 RW U32

0 Number 3 RW U8

1 1.Mapped Object 60410010H RW U32

1A03H 2 2.Mapped Object 60770010H RW U32

3 3.Mapped Object 60610008H RW U32

4 4.Mapped Object 0 RW U32

C200 Index:
Parameter index corresponds to each other as following:
Index sub-Index
2000H + Group member+1

For example:
Pr.10.15 (Encoder Slip Error Treatment)
Group member
10(0 A H) - 15(0FH)

Index = 2000H + 0AH = 200A


Sub Index = 0FH + 1H = 10H

C200 Control Index:

Delta Standard Mode (Old definition)


Factory
Index Sub Definition R/W Size Note
Setting
2020H 0 Number 3 R U8
Bit 0~1 00B:disable
01B:stop
10B:disable
11B: JOG Enable
Bit2~3 Reserved
Bit4~5 00B:disable
01B: Direction forward
1 Control word 0 RW U16
10B: Reverse
11B: Switch Direction
Bit6~7 00B: 1st step
acceleration/deceleration
nd
01B: 2 step
acceleration/deceleration
Bit8~15 Reserved
2 vl target velocity(Hz) 0 RW U16
3 Other trigger 0 RW U16 Bit0 1: E.F. ON

13-15
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

Factory
Index Sub Definition R/W Size Note
Setting
Bit1 1: Reset
Bit2~15 Reserved
2021H 0 Number DH R U8
1 Error code 0 R U16
2 AC motor drive status 0 R U16 Bit 0~1 00B: stop
01B: decelerate to stop
10B: waiting for operation
command
11B: in operation
Bit 2 1: JOG command
Bit 3~4 00B: forward running
01B: switch from reverse
running to forward running
10B: switch from forward
running to reverse running
11B: reverse running
Bit 5~7 reserved
Bit 8 1: master frequency command
controlled by communication
interface
Bit 9 1: master frequency command
controlled by analog signal
input
Bit 10 1: operation command
controlled by communication
interface
Bit
Reserved
11~15
3 Frequency command(F) 0 R U16
4 Output frequency(H) 0 R U16
5 Output current(AXX.X) 0 R U16
6 DC-BUS voltage 0 R U16
7 output voltage 0 R U16
The segment currently
8 executed by multi-segment 0 R U16
speed command
9 Display output current(A) 0 R U16
A Display counter value(c) 0 R U16
Display actual output
B 0 R U16
frequency (H)
C Display DC-BUS voltage (u) 0 R U16
D Display output voltage (E) 0 R U16
Display output power angle
E 0 R U16
(n)
Display output power in kW
F 0 R U16
(P)
Display actual motor speed
10 0 R U16
in rpm (r)
Display estimate output
11 0 R U16
torque % (t)
12 Reserved 0 R U16
Display PID feedback in %
13 0 R U16
(b)
14 Display AVI in % (1.) 0 R U16
15 Display ACI in % (2.) 0 R U16
16 Display AUI in % (3.) 0 R U16
Display the temperature of
17 0 R U16
IGBT in oC (i.)

13-16
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

Factory
Index Sub Definition R/W Size Note
Setting
Display the temperature of
18 0 R U16
capacitance in oC (c.)
The status of digital input
19 0 R U16
(ON/OFF) (i)
The status of digital output
1A 0 R U16
(ON/OFF) (o)
1B Multi-step speed (S) 0 R U16
The corresponding CPU
1C pin status of digital input 0 R U16
(d.)
The corresponding CPU pin
1D 0 R U16
status of digital output (0.)
1E Reserved 0 R U16
1F Reserved 0 R U16
20 Reserved 0 R U16
21 Reserved 0 R U16
22 Reserved 0 R U16
23 Reserved 0 R U16
24 Reserved 0 R U16
Display PLC data D1043
25 0 R U16
(C)

Delta Standard Mode (Old definition)


Factory
Index sub R/W bit
Setting
bit Priority Speed Mode Torque Mode
2060h 00h R
0 fcmd =0 Tcmd = 0
Pulse 0
0 CMD_ACT 4
1 fcmd = Fset(Fpid) Tcmd =Tset
Pulse 1
Pulse 00 None
1 Dir 4
Pulse 01 FWD run command
Pulse 10 REV run command
2 Switch current direction
Pulse 11
command
Drive run till target speed is Free(Keep running to reach
0
attained targeting torque)
3 HALT 3
Drive stop by declaration Lock(Torque stops at current
1
setting speed)
Drive run till target speed is
0
attained
4 LOCK 4
Frequency stop at current
1
frequency
01h RW 0 JOG OFF JOG OFF
5 1 JOG 4
Pulse 1 JOG RUN JOG RUN
0 None None
6 QSTOP 2
1 Quick Stop Quick Stop
0 Servo OFF Servo OFF
7 SERVO_ON 1
1 Servo ON Servo ON
0000 Master Speed Master Torque
st th
11~8 GEAR 4 1 ~15 speed switching
0001~1111
frequency.
00 1st accel/decel.
01 2nd accel/decel
13~12 ACC/DEC 4
10 3rd accel/decel
11 4th accel/decel
Multi-command and Accel/Decel Multi-command and Accel/Decel
0
time switching NOT allowed time switching NOT allowed
14 EN_SW 4
Multi-command and Accel/Decel Multi-command and Accel/Decel
1
time switching ALLOWED time switching ALLOWED
15 Pulse 1 RST 4 Clear fault codes Clear fault codes
02h RW

13-17
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

Factory
Index sub R/W bit
Setting
bit Priority Speed Mode Torque Mode
Speed command
03h RW
(unsigned decimal)
04h RW -
05h RW -
Torque command
06h RW
(signed decimal)
Speed limit
07h RW
(unsigned decimal)
Frequency command not
0 ARRIVE Torque command not reached
0 reached
1 Frequency attained Torque attained
00 DIR FWD FWD
01 REV run switches to FWD run REV run switches to FWD run
2~1
10 FWD run switches to REV run FWD run switches to REV run
11 REV REV
0 JOG None None
5
1 On JOG On JOG
0 QSTOP None None
6
1 On Quick Stop On Quick Stop
01h R
0 SERVO_ON PWM OFF PWM OFF
7
1 PWM ON PWM ON
0 PRLOCK Parameters NOT locked Parameters NOT locked
2061h 8
1 Parameter Lock Parameter Lock
0 WARN NO warning NO warning
9
1 Warning Warning
0 ERROR No error No error
10
1 Error detected Error detected
0 IGBT_OK IGBT OFF IGBT OFF
11
1 IGBT ON IGBT ON
15~11 - - - -
02h R Velocity cmd Actual output frequency Actual output frequency
03h R -
04h R - - -
05h R Actual position (absolute)
Actual position (absolute)
06h R Torq Cmd
07h R Actual torque Actual torque

DS402 Standard

Factory PDO
Index Sub Definition R/W Size Unit Mode Note
Setting Map
0: No action
6007h 0 Abort connection option code 2 RW S16 Yes 2: Disable Voltage,
3: quick stop
603Fh 0 Error code 0 R0 U16 Yes
6040h 0 Control word 0 RW U16 Yes
6041h 0 Status word 0 R0 U16 Yes
6042h 0 vl target velocity 0 RW S16 rpm Yes vl
6043h 0 vl velocity demand 0 RO S16 rpm Yes vl
6044h 0 vl control effort 0 RO S16 rpm Yes vl
604Fh 0 vl ramp function time 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes vl Unit must be: 100ms, and
6050h 0 vl slow down time 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes vl check if the setting is set to
6051h 0 vl quick stop time 1000 RW U32 1ms Yes vl 0.
605Ah 0 Quick stop option code 2 RW S16 No 0 : disable drive function
1 :slow down on slow down
ramp
2: slow down on quick stop
ramp
5 slow down on slow down
ramp and stay in QUICK
STOP

13-18
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

Factory PDO
Index Sub Definition R/W Size Unit Mode Note
Setting Map
6 slow down on quick stop
ramp and stay in QUICK
STOP
0: Disable drive function
Disable operation option 1: Slow down with slow
605Ch 0 1 RW S16 No
code down ramp; disable of the
drive function
1: Profile Position Mode
2: Velocity Mode
6060h 0 Mode of operation 2 RW S8 Yes
4: Torque Profile Mode
6: Homing Mode
6061h 0 Mode of operation display 2 RO S8 Yes Same as above
0.1
6071h 0 tq Target torque 0 RW S16 Yes tq Valid unit: 1%
%
0.1
6072h 0 tq Max torque 150 RW U16 No tq Valid unit: 1%
%
6075h 0 tq Motor rated current 0 RO U32 mA No tq
0.1
6077h 0 tq torque actual value 0 RO S16 Yes tq
%
0.1
6078h 0 tq current actual value 0 RO S16 Yes tq
%
6079h 0 tq DC link circuit voltage 0 RO U32 mV Yes tq

13-19
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

13.5 CANopen Fault Code


CANopen
CANopen fault
Display Fault code Description
fault code register
(bit 0~7)

Fault
ocA 0001H Over-current during acceleration 2213 H 1
Oc at accel

ocd 0002H Over-current during deceleration 2213 H 1


Oc at decel

Fault Over-current during steady status


ocn 0003H 2214H 1
operation
Oc at normal SPD

Ground fault. When (one of) the output


terminal(s) is grounded, short
circuit current is more than 50% of AC
Fault
GFF 0004H motor drive rated current. 2240H 1
Ground fault NOTE: The short circuit protection is
provided for AC motor drive
Protection, not for protection of the user.
Short-circuit is detected between upper
Fault
occ 0005H bridge and lower bridge of the 2250H 1
Short Circuit IGBT module.

Fault Over-current at stop. Hardware failure in


ocS 0006H 2314H 1
current detection
Oc at stop

Over-current during acceleration.


ovA 0007H 3210H 2
Hardware failure in current detection
Ov at accel

Fault Over-current during deceleration.


ovd 0008H 3210H 2
Hardware failure in current detection.
Ov at decel

Over-current during steady speed.


Fault
ovn 0009H Hardware failure in current detection. 3210H 2
Ov at normal SPD 230V: 450Vdc; 460V: 900Vdc

13-20
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

CANopen
CANopen fault
Display Fault code Description
fault code register
(bit 0~7)

Fault Over-voltage at stop. Hardware failure in


ovS 000AH 3210H 2
current detection
Ov at stop

Fault DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06.00


LvA 000BH 3220H 2
during acceleration.
Lv at accel

Fault DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06.00


Lvd 000CH 3220H 2
during deceleration.
Lv at decel

Fault DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06.00 in


Lvn 000DH 3220H 2
constant speed.
Lv at normal SPD

Fault DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06-00 at


LvS 000EH 3220H 2
stop
Lv at stop

Fault
OrP 000FH Phase Loss Protection 3130H 2
Phase La cked

IGBT overheat
IGBT temperature exceeds protection
Fault
oH1 0010H level. 4310H 3
IGBT over heat 1~15HP: 90℃
20~100HP: 100℃

Fault Heatsink overheat


oH2 0011H 4310H 3
Heat sink temperature exceeds 90oC
Hear Sink oH

Temperature detection circuit error


Fault
tH1o 0012H (IGBT) FF00H 3
Thermo 1 open IGBT NTC

Temperature detection circuit error


Fault
tH2o 0013H (capacity module) FF01H 3
Thermo 2 open CAP NTC

Fault
PWR 0014H Power RST off FF02H 2
Power RST OFF

13-21
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

CANopen
CANopen fault
Display Fault code Description
fault code register
(bit 0~7)
Overload. The AC motor drive detects
excessive drive output current.
Fault NOTE: The AC motor drive can
oL 0015H 2310H 1
withstand up to 150% of the rated
Inverter oL
current
for a maximum of 60 seconds.

Fault
EoL2
EoL1 0016H Electronics thermal relay 1 protection 2310H 1
Thermal relay 1
2

Fault
EoL2 0017H Electronics thermal relay 2 protection 2310H 1
Thermal relay 2

Motor overheating
Fault The AC motor drive detects that the
EoL2
oH3 0018H FF20H 1
internal temperature exceeds
Thermal
Motor over
relay
heat
2
Pr.06-30 (PTC level)
These two fault codes will be displayed
Fault
001AH when output current exceeds 8311H 3
EoL2
ot1
Thermal
Over torqrelay
ue 1 2 the over-torque detection level (Pr.06.07
or Pr.06.10) and exceeds
Fault over-torque detection(Pr.06.08 or
EoL2
ot2 001BH Pr.06.11) and it is set 2 or 4 in 8311H 3
Thermal
Over torqrelay
ue 2 2 Pr.06-06 or Pr.06-09.

Fault
EoL2
uC 001CH Low current 8321H 1
Thermal
Under to rque
relay12

Fault Internal EEPROM can not be


EoL2
cF1 001EH 5530H 5
programmed.
Thermal relay
EEPROM write2Err

Fault
EoL2
cF2 001FH Internal EEPROM can not be read. 5530H 5
Thermal relay
EEPROM read2Err

Fault
EoL2
cd1 0021H U-phase error FF04H 1
Thermal
Ias sensor
relay
Err 2

13-22
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

CANopen
CANopen fault
Display Fault code Description
fault code register
(bit 0~7)

Fault
EoL2
cd2 0022H V-phase error FF05H 1
Thermal
Ibs sensor
relay
Err 2

Fault
EoL2
cd3 0023H W-phase error FF06H 1
Thermal
Ics sensor
relay
Err 2

Fault
EoL2
Hd0 0024H cc (current clamp) hardware error FF07H 5
Thermal
cc HW Error
relay 2

Fault
EoL2
Hd1 0025H oc hardware error FF08H 5
Thermal
oc HW Error
relay 2

Fault
EoL2
Hd2 0026H ov hardware error FF09H 5
Thermal
ov HW Error
relay 2

Fault
EoL2
Hd3 0027H GFF hardware error FF0AH 5
Thermal
GFF HW relay
Error 2

Fault
EoL2
AUE 0028H Auto tuning error FF21H 1
Thermal
Auto tuning
relay
Err2

Fault
EoL2
AFE 0029H PID loss (ACI) FF22H 7
Thermal
PID Fbk Error
relay 2

Fault
EoL2
PGF1 002AH PG feedback error 7301H 7
Thermal
PG Fbk Error
relay 2

Fault
EoL2
PGF2 002BH PG feedback loss 7301H 7
Thermal
PG Fbk Loss
relay 2

Fault
EoL2
PGF3 002CH PG feedback stall 7301H 7
Thermal
PG Fbk Over
relaySPD
2

13-23
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

CANopen
CANopen fault
Display Fault code Description
fault code register
(bit 0~7)

Fault
EoL2
PGF4 002DH PG slip error 7301H 7
Thermal
PG Fbk deviate
relay 2

Fault
EoL2
PGF5 0041H PG hardware error 7301H 5
Thermal
PG HW erelay
rror 2

Fault
EoL2
PGr1 002EH Pulse input error 7300H 7
Thermal
PG ref Error
relay 2

Fault
EoL2
PGr2 002FH Pulse input loss 7300H 7
Thermal
PG ref loss
relay 2

Fault
EoL2
ACE 0030H ACI loss FF00H 1
Thermal
ACI loss relay 2

External Fault
Fault When input EF (N.O.) on external
EoL2
EF 0031H 9000H 5
terminal is closed to GND, AC motor
Thermal relay
External Fault 2
drive stops output U, V, and W.
Emergency stop
When the multi-function input terminals
Fault MI1 to MI6 are set to
EoL2
EF1 0032H 9000H 5
emergency stop, the AC motor drive
Thermal relay
Emergency stop
2
stops output U, V, W and
the motor coasts to stop
External Base Block
Fault When the external input terminals MI1 to
EoL2
bb 0033H 9000H 5
MI16 are set as bb and active, the AC
Thermal
Base block
relay 2
motor drive output will be turned off

Fault Password will be locked if three fault


EoL2
Pcod 0034H 6320H 5
passwords are entered
Thermal relay
Password Error
2

Fault
EoL2
ccod 0035H Software error 6320H 5
Thermal
SW code relay
Error2

13-24
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

CANopen
CANopen fault
Display Fault code Description
fault code register
(bit 0~7)

Fault
EoL2
cE1 0036H Illegal function code 7500H 4
Thermal CMD
Modbus relay err
2

Fault
cE2 0037H Illegal data address (00H to 254H) 7500H 4
Thermal ADDR
Modbus relay 2err

Fault
cE3 0038H Illegal data value 7500H 4
Thermal DATA
Modbus relay 2err

Fault
cE4 0039H Data is written to read-only address 7500H 4
Thermal slave
Modbus relay FLT
2

Fault
cE10 003AH Modbus transmission timeout. 7500H 4
Thermal time
Modbus relayout
2

Fault
cP10 003BH Keypad transmission timeout. 7500H 4
Thermaltime
Keypad relayout
2

Fault
bF 003CH Brake resistor fault 7110H 4
Thermalfault
Braking relay 2

Fault
ydc 003DH Motor Y-Δ switch error 3330H 2
Thermalconnect
Y-delta relay 2

Fault
dEb 003EH Energy regeneration when decelerating 3320H 2
Thermal
Dec. Energy
relayback
2

Overslip error. Slip exceeds Pr.05.26


Fault
oSL 003FH limit and slip duration exceeds Pr.05.27 FF00H 7
Thermal
Over slip relay
Error2 setting.

Fault
ovU
ocU 0042H Over current caused by unknown reason 2310H 1
Over volt.
Thermal
Unknow Over
relay
Unknow
Apm
2

13-25
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

CANopen
CANopen fault
Display Fault code Description
fault code register
(bit 0~7)

Fault
ovU 0043H Over voltage caused by unknown reason 3210H 2
Thermal Over
Unknow relay volt.
2

Fault
S1 0049H External emergency stop 9000H 5
Thermal relay
S1-Emergy stop
2

Fault
OPHL 0052H U phase output phase loss 3131H 2
Thermal
U phase lacked
relay 2

Fault
OPHL 0053H V phase output phase loss 3132H 2
Thermal
U phase lacked
relay 2

Fault
OPHL 0054H W phase output phase loss 3133H 2
Thermal
U phase lacked
relay 2

Fault
aocc 004FH A-phase short 2240H 1
Thermal
A phase short
relay 2

Fault
bocc 0050H B-phase short 2240H 1
Thermal
B phase short
relay 2

Fault
cocc 0051H C-phase short 2240H 1
Thermal
C phase short
relay 2

Fault
CGdE 0065H Guarding time-out 1 8130H 4
Thermal relay
Guarding T-out2

Fault
CHbE 0066H Heartbeat time-out 8130H 4
Thermal relay
Heartbea t T-out
2

Fault
CSyE 0067H CAN synchrony error 8700H 4
Thermal
SYNC T-out
relay 2

13-26
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

CANopen
CANopen fault
Display Fault code Description
fault code register
(bit 0~7)

Fault
CbFE 0068H CAN bus off 8140H 4
Thermalb us
CAN/S relay
off 2

Fault
CIdE 0069H Can index exceed 8110H 4
Thermal relay 2

Fault
CAdE 006AH CAN address error 0x8100 4
Thermal relay 2

Fault
CFdE 006BH CAN frame fail 0x8100 4
Thermal relay 2

13-27
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 13 CANopen Overview |C200 Series

13.6 CANopen LED Function


There are two CANopen flash signs: RUN and ERR.

RUN LED:
LED status Condition CANopen State
OFF Initial
Blinking Pre-Operation

Single flash Stopped

ON Operation

ERR LED:
LED status Condition/ State
OFF No Error
Single One Message fail
flash

Double Guarding fail or heartbeat fail


flash

Triple flash SYNC fail

ON Bus off

13-28
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

Chapter 14 PLC Function


14.1 PLC Overview
14.2 Precautions for Using PLC
14.3 Start-up
14.4 PLC Ladder Diagram
14.5 PLC Devices
14.6 Commands
14.7 Error Code and Troubleshoot

14-1

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

14.1 PLC Overview


14.1.1 Introduction

The built in PLC function in C2000 allows following commands: WPLSoft, basic commands and
application commands; the operation methods are the same as Delta DVPPLC series. Other than
that, CANopen master provides 8 stations for synchronous control and 126 asynchronous controls.
NOTE

In C2000, CANopen master synchronous control complies with DS402 standard and supports homing mode, speed mode,
torque mode and point to point control mode; CANopen slave supports two control modes, speed mode and torque mode.

14.1.2 Ladder Diagram Editor – WPLSoft


WPLSoft is a program editor of Delta DVP-PLC series and C200 series for WINDOWS. Besides
general PLC program planning and general WINDOWS editing functions, such as cut, paste, copy,
multi-windows, WPLSoft also provides various Chinese/English comment editing and other special
functions (e.g. register editing, settings, the data readout, the file saving, and contacts monitor and
set, etc.).
Following is the system requirement for WPLSoft:
Item System Requirement
Operation System Windows 95/98/2000/NT/ME/XP
CPU Pentium 90 and above
Memory 16MB and above (32MB and above is recommended)
Capacity: 50MB and above
Hard Disk
CD-ROM (for installing WPLSoft)
Resolution: 640×480, 16 colors and above,
Monitor
It is recommended to set display setting of Windows to 800×600.
Mouse General mouse or the device compatible with Windows
Printer Printer with Windows driver
RS-232 port At least one of COM1 to COM8 can be connected to PLC
Applicable Models All Delta DVP-PLC series and C200 series

14-2
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

14.2 Precautions for Using PLC Functions


1. Default setting of PLC communication protocol is 8,N,2 ,19200, station number 2.
2. Host controller can read/write data from/to both the AC motor drive and the internal PLC
program by setting the drive and internal PLC program to two different station numbers. For
example, if user wants to set AC motor drive as station 1 and PLC as station 2, please write
following setting to the host controller:
When setting 01(Station) 03(Read) 0400(Address) 0001(1 data), the host controller can read the
Pr.04-00 from the AC motor drive.
When setting 02(Station) 03(Read) 0400(Address) 0001(1 data), host controller will read X0
data from the internal PLC program.
3. The internal PLC program will stop operation when upload/download programs.
4. When using WPR command to write parameters, parameters can be changed for a maximum of
109 times. It is crucial not to exceed this limit to prevent occurrence of serious error.
5. When Pr.00-04 is set to 28, D1043 value of PLC register will be displayed on the digital keypad:

0 ~ 999 display:

1000 ~ 9999 display: It will only display the first 3 digits. The
LED at the bottom-right corner will light to indicate 10 times of
the display value. For example, the actual value for the
following figure is 100X10=1000.

10000~65535 display: It will only display the first 3 digits. The


LED at the bottom-right corner and the single decimal point
between the middle and the right-most numbers will light to
indicate 100 times of the display value. For example, the
actual value for the following figure is 100X100=10000.
6. When PLC Stop mode, 通訊 RS-485 被 PLC 使用。
7. When PLC is in PLC Run or PLC Stop mode, Pr.00-02 (settings 9 and 10) are disabled.
8. When Pr.00-02 is set to 6, PLC function settings will return to factory settings.
9. When the Input Terminal X of PLC is programmed, the corresponding MI will be disabled (no
function).
10. 當 PLC 有寫到輸入接點 Y0、Y1、Y3、Y4 時,所對應的 RY1、RY2、DFM1、DFM2 功能會無
作用。
11. 當 PLC 有寫到類比輸出 D1040 、D1045 時,所對應的 AFM1 、AFM2 功能會無作用。
12. When PLC function is programmed with FREQ command, AC motor drive frequency is now
under PLC function control. The setting of Pr.00-20 and Hand ON/OFF are disabled and has no
control over AC motor drive frequency.

14-3

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

13. When PLC is programmed with TORQ command, AC motor drive torque is now under PLC
function control. The setting of Pr.11-33 and Hand ON/OFF function are disabled and has no
control over AC motor drive torque.

14-4
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

14.3 Start-up
14.3.1 The Steps for PLC Execution
Please operate PLC functions by following the steps indicate below:
When using KPC-CE01 series digital keypad, switch the mode to PLC2 for program
download/upload:
A. Press MODE key and select ‘PLC’.
B. Press ‘UP’ key and look for ‘PLC2’ then press ‘ENTER’.
C. If succeed, display ‘END’ for one to two seconds and return to ‘PLC2’ page.
The PLC warning that is displayed before program downloaded to C2000 can be ignored, please
continue the operation.

Disable Run PLC PLC Stop


i AC d i
1. Connection: Connect RJ-45 of AC motor drive to the computer by using RS485.

RS485

C200
2. Run the program.
„ PLC function, select function 2 (PLC Run).
PLC
1: Disable (PLC0)
1.Disable
2: PLC Run (PLC1)
2.PLC Run
3.PLC Stop 3: PLC Stop (PLC2)
Optional accessories: Digital keypad KPC-CE01, display
PLC function as shown in the ( ).
When external input terminals (MI1~MI8) are set to PLC Mode select bit0 (51) or PLC Mode
select bit1 (52), it will force to switch to PLC mode regardless the terminal is ON or OFF.
Meanwhile, switching via keypad is disabled. Please refer to the chart below:
PLC Mode PLC Mode select bit1(52) PLC Mode select bit0 (51)
Disable (PLC 0) OFF OFF
PLC Run (PLC 1) OFF ON
PLC Stop (PLC 2) ON OFF
Previous state ON ON

When KPE-LE02 execute PLC function:


1. When switching the page from PLC to PLC1, it will execute PLC. The motion of PLC

14-5

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

(Execute/Stop) is controlled by WPL editor.


2. When switching the page from PLC to PLC2, it will stop PLC. Again the motion of PLC
(Execute/Stop) is controlled by WPL editor.
3. The control of external terminals follows the same method.
NOTE
When input/output terminals (FWD REV MI1~MI8 MI10~15, Relay1, Relay2 RY10~RY15, MO1~MO2 MO10~MO11,)
are used in PLC program, they cannot be used in other places. Fro example, when PLC program (PLC1 or PLC2) is
activated, such as when it controls Y0, the corresponding output terminals Relay (RA/RB/RC) will be used. At this
moment, Pr.03.00 setting will be invalid since the terminal has been used by PLC. Refer to Pr.02-52, 02-53, 03-30 to
check which DI DO AO are occupied by PLC.

14.3.2 I/O Device Reference Table


Input device:
Device X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17

1 FWD REV MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8
1: I/O extension card

Output device:
Device Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17
1 RY1 RY2 MO1 MO2
1: I/O extension card

14-6
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

14.3.3 WPLSoft Installation


Download PLC program toC200: Refer to D.3 to D.7 for program coding and download the
editor (WPLSoft V2.09) at DELTA website http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/

14.3.4 Program Input

14.3.5 Program Download


Please download the program by following steps:

Step 1. Press button for compiler after inputting program in WPLSoft.

Step 2. After compiler is finished, choose the item “Write to PLC” in the communication items.

14-7

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

After finishing Step 2, the program will be downloaded from WPLSoft to the AC motor drive by
the communication format.

14.3.6 Program Monitor


If you execute “start monitor” in the communication item during executing PLC, the ladder
diagram will be shown as follows.

14-8
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

14.4 Ladder Diagram


14.4.1 Program Scan Chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram

Read input state from outside

X0 X1
Calculate the result by Start Y0
Y0
ladder diagram
algorithm (it doesn’t M100 X3 X10 Repeats the
sent to the outer output Y1 execution in
:
point but the inner : cycle.
equipment will output X100 M505
immediately.) Y126
End

Send the result to the output point

14.4.2 Ladder Diagram


Ladder diagram is a diagram language that applied on the automatic control and it is also a
diagram that made up of the symbols of electric control circuit. PLC procedures are finished
after ladder diagram editor edits the ladder diagram. It is easy to understand the control flow
that indicated with diagram and also accept by technical staff of electric control circuit. Many
basic symbols and motions of ladder diagram are the same as mechanical and electrical
equipments of traditional automatic power panel, such as button, switch, relay, timer, counter
and etc.

The kinds and amounts of PLC internal equipment will be different with brands. Although
internal equipment has the name of traditional electric control circuit, such as relay, coil and
contact. It doesn’t have the real components in it. In PLC, it just has a basic unit of internal
memory. If this bit is 1, it means the coil is ON and if this bit is 0, it means the coil is OFF. You
should read the corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally Open, NO or
contact a). Otherwise, you should read the opposite sate of corresponding value of that bit
when using contact (Normally Closed, NC or contact b). Many relays will need many bits, such
as 8-bits makes up a byte. 2 bytes can make up a word. 2 words make up double word. When
using many relays to do calculation, such as add/subtraction or shift, you could use byte, word

14-9

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

or double word. Furthermore, the two equipments, timer and counter, in PLC not only have coil
but also value of counting time and times.

In conclusion, each internal storage unit occupies fixed storage unit. When using these
equipments, the corresponding content will be read by bit, byte or word.

Brief introduction to the internal devices of PLC:

Internal Device Function


Input relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to
external input point (it is the terminal that used to connect to external input switch
and receive external input signal). Input signal from external will decide it to
display 0 or 1. You couldn’t change the state of input relay by program design or
Input Relay forced ON/OFF via WPLSoft. The contacts (contact a, b) can be used unlimitedly.
If there is no input signal, the corresponding input relay could be empty and can’t
be used with other functions.
; Equipment indication method: X0, X1…X7, X10, X11… The symbol of
equipment is X and numbering in octal.
Output relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to
external output point (it is used to connect to external load). It can be driven by
input relay contact, the contact of other internal equipment and itself contact. It
uses a normally open contact to connect to external load and other contacts can
Output Relay
be used unlimitedly as input contacts. It doesn’t have the corresponding output
relay, if need, it can be used as internal relay.
; Equipment indication: Y0, Y1…Y7, Y10, Y11… The symbol of equipment is
Y and numbering in octal.

The internal relay doesn’t connect directly to outside. It is an auxiliary relay in


PLC. Its function is the same as the auxiliary relay in electric control circuit. Each
auxiliary relay has the corresponding basic unit. It can be driven by the contact of
input relay, output relay or other internal equipment. Its contacts can be used
Internal Relay
unlimitedly. Internal auxiliary relay can’t output directly, it should output with
output point.
; Equipment indication: M0, M1…M799. The symbol of equipment is M and
numbering in decimal system.
Counter is used to count. It needs to set counter before using counter (i.e. the
pulse of counter). There are coil, contacts and storage unit of counter in counter.
When coil is from OFF to ON, that means input a pulse in counter and the counter
Counter should add 1. There are 16-bit, 32-bit and high-speed counter for user to use.
; Equipment indication: C0, C1… C79. The symbol of equipment is C and
numbering in decimal system.
Timer is used to control time. There are coil, contact and timer storage. When coil
is ON, its contact will act (contact a is close, contact b is open) when attaining
desired time. The time value of timer is set by settings and each timer has its
Timer regular period. User sets the timer value and each timer has its timing period.
Once the coil is OFF, the contact won’t act (contact a is open and contact b is
close) and the timer will be set to zero.
; Equipment indication: T0, T1…T159. The symbol of equipment is T and

14-10
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

numbering in decimal system. The different number range corresponds with


the different timing period.
PLC needs to handle data and operation when controlling each order, timer value
and counter value. The data register is used to store data or parameters. It stores
16-bit binary number, i.e. a word, in each register. It uses two continuous number
Data register
of data register to store double words.
; Equipment indication: D0, D1,…,D399. The symbol of equipment is D and
numbering in decimal system.

The structure of ladder diagram and information:


Ladder Diagram Explanation Command Device
Structure

Normally open, contact a LD X, Y, M, T, C

Normally closed, contact b LDI X, Y, M, T, C

Serial normally open AND X, Y, M, T, C

Parallel normally open OR X, Y, M, T, C

Parallel normally closed ORI X, Y, M, T, C

Rising-edge trigger switch LDP X, Y, M, T, C

Falling-edge trigger switch LDF X, Y, M, T, C

Rising-edge trigger in serial ANDP X, Y, M, T, C

Falling-edge trigger in
ANDF X, Y, M, T, C
serial

Rising-edge trigger in
ORP X, Y, M, T, C
parallel

Falling-edge trigger in
ORF X, Y, M, T, C
parallel

Block in serial ANB none

14-11

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

Block in parallel ORB none

MPS
Multiple output MRD none
MPP
Output command of coil
OUT Y, M
drive
Basic command/
Basic command,
Application
Application command
command
Inverse logic INV none

14.4.3 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram


The program edited method is from left power line to right power line. (The right power line will
be omitted during the edited of WPLSoft.) After editing a row, go to editing the next row. The
maximum contacts in a row are 11 contacts. If you need more than 11 contacts, you could have
the new row and start with continuous line to continue more input devices. The continuous
number will be produced automatically and the same input point can be used repeatedly. The
drawing is shown as follows.

X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 C0 C1
00000
X11 X12 X13
00000 Y0

Row Number
The operation of ladder diagram is to scan from left upper corner to right lower corner. The
output handling, including the operation frame of coil and application command, at the most
right side in ladder diagram.

Take the following diagram for example; we analyze the process step by step. The number at
the right corner is the explanation order.

X0 X1 Y1 X4
Y1
M0 T0 M3
TMR T0 K10
X3 M1

The explanation of command order:


1 LD X0
2 OR M0
3 AND X1
4 LD X3

14-12
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

AND M1
ORB
5 LD Y1
AND X4
The explanation of command order:
6 LD T0
AND M3
ORB
7 ANB
8 OUT Y1
TMR T0 K10
The detail explanation of basic structure of ladder diagram

1. LD (LDI) command: give the command LD or LDI in the start of a block.


LD command LD command

AND Block OR Block


The structures of command LDP and LDF are similar to the command LD. The difference is that
command LDP and LDF will act in the rising-edge or falling-edge when contact is ON as shown
in the following.
Rising-edge
Falling-edge
X0 X0
Time Time
OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF

2. AND (ANI) command: single device connects to a device or a block in series.


AND command AND command

The structures of ANDP and ANDF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge.

3. OR (ORI) command: single device connects to a device or a block.

OR command OR command OR command


The structures of ORP and ORF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge.

4. ANB command: a block connects to a device or a block in series.

14-13

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

ANB command

5. ORB command: a block connects to a device or a block in parallel.

ORB command

If there are several blocks when operate ANB or ORB, they should be combined to blocks or
network from up to down or from left to right.

6. MPS, MRD, MPP commands: Divergent memory of multi-output. It can produce many various
outputs.
7. The command MPS is the start of divergent point. The divergent point means the connection place
between horizontal line and vertical line. We should determine to have contact memory command
or not according to the contacts status in the same vertical line. Basically, each contact could have
memory command but in some places of ladder diagram conversion will be omitted due to the
PLC operation convenience and capacity limit. MPS command can be used for 8 continuous times
and you can recognize this command by the symbol “┬”.
8. MRD command is used to read memory of divergent point. Because the logical status is the same
in the same horizontal line, it needs to read the status of original contact to keep on analyzing
other ladder diagram. You can recognize the command MRD by the symbol “├”.
9. MPP command is used to read the start status of the top level and pop it out from stack. Because
it is the last item of the horizontal line, it means the status of this horizontal line is ending.

MPS

( )
( )
( )
( )
MRD
( )
MPP ( )

( )

14-14
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

14.4.4 The Example for Designing Basic Program

Start, Stop and Latching


In the same occasions, it needs transient close button and transient open button to be start and stop
switch. Therefore, if you want to keep the action, you should design latching circuit. There are
several latching circuits in the following:

Example 1: the latching circuit for priority of stop

When start normally open contact X1=On, Y1 X2


stop normally contact X2=Off, and Y1=On Y1
are set at the same time, if X2=On, the coil
Y1 will stop acting. Therefore, it calls STOP
X1
priority of stop.

START

Example 2: the latching circuit for priority of start


When start normally open contact X1=On,
stop normally contact X2=Off and Y1=On X1 X2
(coil Y1 will be active and latching) are valid Y1
at the same time, if X2=On, coil Y1 will be
active due to latched contact. Therefore, it
calls priority of start. Y1

Example 3: the latching circuit of SET and RST commands


The figure at the right side is latching circuit
that made up of RST and SET command. Top priority of stop
It is top priority of stop when RST command X1
is set behind SET command. When
SET Y1
executing PLC from up to down, The coil Y1
is ON and coil Y1 will be OFF when X1 and X2
X2 act at the same time, therefore it calls RST Y1
priority of stop.
It is top priority of start when SET command
is set after RST command. When X1 and
X2 act at the same time, Y1 is ON so it calls
Top priority of start
top priority of start.
X2
RST Y1
X1
SET Y1

The common control circuit


Example 4: condition control
X1 and X3 can start/stop Y1 separately, X2 and X4 can start/stop Y2 separately and they are all self
latched circuit. Y1 is an element for Y2 to do AND function due to the normally open contact
connects to Y2 in series. Therefore, Y1 is the input of Y2 and Y2 is also the input of Y1.

14-15

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

X1 X3
Y1 X1

Y1 X3

X2
X2 X4 Y1
Y2 X4
Y2
Y1

Y2

Example 5: Interlock control


The figure above is the circuit of interlock control. Y1 and Y2 will act according to the start
contact X1 and X2. Y1 and Y2 will act not at the same time, once one of them acts and the other
won’t act. (This is called interlock.) Even if X1 and X2 are valid at the same time, Y1 and Y2
won’t act at the same time due to up-to-down scan of ladder diagram. For this ladder diagram,
Y1 has higher priority than Y2.
X1 X3 Y2
X1
Y1
Y1 X3

X2

X2 X4 Y1 X4
Y2
Y1
Y2
Y2

Example 6: Sequential Control


X1 X3 Y2 If add normally close contact Y2 into Y1 circuit to
Y1 be an input for Y1 to do AND function. (as shown in
Y1 the left side) Y1 is an input of Y2 and Y2 can stop
Y1 after acting. In this way, Y1 and Y2 can execute
in sequential.
X2 X4 Y1
Y2
Y2

Example 7: Oscillating Circuit


The period of oscillating circuit is ΔT+ΔT
Y1 Y1
Y1
T T
The figure above is a very simple ladder step diagram. When starting to scan Y1 normally close
contact, Y1 normally close contact is close due to the coil Y1 is OFF. Then it will scan Y1 and
the coil Y1 will be ON and output 1. In the next scan period to scan normally close contact Y1,
Y1 normally close contact will be open due to Y1 is ON. Finally, coil Y1 will be OFF. The result
of repeated scan, coil Y will output the vibrating pulse with cycle time ΔT (On) +ΔT (Off).

14-16
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

The vibrating circuitry of cycle time ΔT (On) +ΔT (Off):

X0 Y1
TMR T0 Kn X0
T0
Y1
Y1

nT T
The figure above uses timer T0 to control coil Y1 to be ON. After Y1 is ON, timer T0 will be
closed at the next scan period and output Y1. The oscillating circuit will be shown as above. (n is
the setting of timer and it is decimal number. T is the base of timer. (clock period))

Example 8: Blinking Circuit


X0 T2
X0
TMR T1 Kn1
n2 *T
T1
TMR T2 Kn2
Y1
X0 T1
Y1
n1* T
The figure above is common used oscillating circuit for indication light blinks or buzzer alarms. It
uses two timers to control On/OFF time of Y1 coil. If figure, n1 and n2 are timer setting of T1 and T2.
T is the base of timer (clock period)

Example 9: Triggered Circuit


X0
M0 X0

M0 Y1 T
Y1 M0
M0 Y1
Y1

In figure above, the rising-edge differential command of X0 will make coil M0 to have a single
pulse of ΔT (a scan time). Y1 will be ON during this scan time. In the next scan time, coil M0 will be
OFF, normally close M0 and normally close Y1 are all closed. However, coil Y1 will keep on being
ON and it will make coil Y1 to be OFF once a rising-edge comes after input X0 and coil M0 is ON
for a scan time. The timing chart is as shown above. This circuit usually executes alternate two
actions with an input. From above timing: when input X0 is a square wave of a period T, output coil
Y1 is square wave of a period 2T.

Example 10: Delay Circuit


X0
TMR T10 K1000
X0
T10
Y1
Y1
TB = 0.1 sec
100 seconds
When input X0 is ON, output coil Y1 will be ON at the same time due to the corresponding
normally close contact OFF makes timer T10 to be OFF. Output coil Y1 will be OFF after delaying
100 seconds (K1000*0.1 seconds =100 seconds) once input X0 is OFF and T10 is ON. Please
refer to timing chart above.

14-17

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

Example 11: Output delay circuit, in the following example, the circuit is made up of two
timers.
No matter input X0 is ON or OFF, output Y4 will be delay.

X0
TMR T5 K50 X0
T5 T6 5 seconds
Y4 T5
Y4
Y0
Y4 X0
TMR T6 K30
T6
3 seconds

Example12: Extend Timer Circuit


In this circuit, the total delay time from input X0 is close and output Y1 is ON= (n1+n2)* T. where T is
clock period. Timer: T11, T12; Timer cycle: T.

X0
X0
TMR T11 Kn1 n1* T
T11
T11
TMR T12 Kn2
n2* T
T12
Y1 T12

Y1
(n1+n2)* T

14-18
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

14.5 PLC Devices Function


Items Specifications Remarks
Stored program, cyclic scan
Control Method
system
Batch processing (when END I/O refresh instruction is
I/O Processing Method
instruction is executed) available
Basic commands (minimum 0.24 Application commands (1 ~
Execution Speed
us) dozens us)
Program Language Instruction, Ladder Logic, SFC
Program Capacity 5000 STEPS
30 basic commands
Commands 80 commands
50 application commands
Input/Output Contact Input (X): 10, output (Y): 4

Device Item Range Function


X0~X17, 16 points, Correspond to external
X External Input Relay Total is
octal number system input point
32
Y0~Y17, 16 points, Correspond to external
Y External Output Relay points
octal number system output point
For general M0~M799, 800 points Total is
Contacts can switch to
M Auxiliary M1000~M1079, 80 192
Relay bit mode

For special On/Off in program


points points
When the timer
indicated by TMR
Total is
command attains the
T Timer 100ms timer T0~T159, 160 points 16
setting, the T contact
points
with the same number
will be On.
When the counter
indicated by CNT
Total is
16-bit count up command attains the
C Counter C0~C79, 80 points 80
for general setting, the C contact
points
with the same number
will be On.
When timer attains, the
T Present value of timer T0~T15, 160 points contact of timer will be
On.
Register WORD data

When timer attains, the


C0~C79, 16-bit counter, 80
C Present value of counter contact of timer will be
points
On.
For latched D0~D399, 400 points
D1000~D1099, 100 Total is
Data For general It can be memory area
D points 1300
register for storing data.
D2000~D2799, 800 points
For special
points
K Decimal K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)
Constant

H Hexadecimal H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation)

Communication port (program read/write) RS485 (slave)


Analog input/output Built-in 2 analog inputs and 1 analog output
Function extension module (optional) EMC-D42A; EMC-R6AA; EMCD611A

14-19

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

14.5.1 Devices Functions


The Function of Input/output Contacts
The function of input contact X: input contact X reads input signal and enter PLC by connecting with
input equipment. It is unlimited usage times for contact A or contact B of each input contact X in
program. The On/Off of input contact X can be changed with the On/Off of input equipment but can’t
be changed by using peripheral equipment (WPLSoft).

The Function of Output Contact Y


The mission of output contact Y is to drive the load that connects to output contact Y by sending
On/Off signal. There are two kinds of output contact: one is relay and the other is transistor. It is
unlimited usage times for A or B contact of each output contact Y in program. But there is number for
output coil Y and it is recommended to use one time in program. Otherwise, the output result will be
decided by the circuit of last output Y with PLC program scan method.
X0 The output of Y0 will be decided by
Y0 1 2 , i.e. decided by On/Off of
circuit ○
X10.
Y0 is repeated

X10
Y0 2

Value, Constant [K] / [H]


K Decimal K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)
Constant
H Hexadecimal H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation)
There are five value types for DVP-PLC to use by the different control destination. The following is
the explanation of value types.
Binary Number (BIN)
It uses binary system for the PLC internal operation or storage. The relative information of binary
system is in the following.
Bit Bit is the basic unit of binary system, the status are 1 or 0.
Nibble It is made up of continuous 4 bits, such as b3~b0. It can be used to
represent number 0~9 of decimal or 0~F of hexadecimal.
Byte It is made up of continuous 2 nibbles, i.e. 8 bits, b7~b0. It can used to
represent 00~FF of hexadecimal system.
Word It is made up of continuous 2 bytes, i.e. 16-bit, b15~b0. It can used to
represent 0000~FFFF of hexadecimal system.
Double Word It is made up of continuous 2 words, i.e. 32-bit, b31~b0. It can used to
represent 00000000~FFFFFFFF of hexadecimal system.
The relations among bit, nibble, byte, word, and double word of binary number are shown as follows.

14-20
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

DW Double Word

W1 W0 Word

BY3 BY2 BY1 BY0 Byte

NB7 NB6 NB5 NB4 NB3 NB2 NB1 NB0 Nibble

Bit

¾ Octal Number (OCT)


The numbers of external input and output terminal of DVP-PLC use octal number.
Example:
External input: X0~X7, X10~X17… (device number)
External output: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17… (device number)

¾ Decimal Number, DEC


The suitable time for decimal number to be used in DVP-PLC system.
; To be the setting value of timer T or counter C, such as TMR C0 K50. (K constant)
; To be the device number of M, T, C and D. For example: M10, T30. (device number)
; To be operand in application command, such as MOV K123 D0. (K constant)

¾ Binary Code Decimal (BCD)


It shows a decimal number by a unit number or four bits so continuous 16-bit can use to represent the
four numbers of decimal number. BCD code is usually used to read the input value of DIP switch or
output value to 7-segment display to be display.

¾ Hexadecimal Number (HEX)


The suitable time for hexadecimal number to be used in DVP-PLC system.
; To be operand in application command. For example: MOV H1A2B D0. (constant H)

¾ Constant K:
In PLC, it is usually have K before constant to mean decimal number. For example, K100 means 100
in decimal number.
Exception: The value that is made up of K and bit equipment X, Y, M, S will be bit, byte, word or
double word. For example, K2Y10, K4M100. K1 means a 4-bit data and K2~K4 can be 8, 12
and 16-bit data separately.

¾ Constant H:
In PLC, it is usually have H before constant to mean hexadecimal number. For example, H100
means 100 in hexadecimal number.

The Function of Auxiliary Relay


There are output coil and A, B contacts in auxiliary relay M and output relay Y. It is unlimited usage
times in program. User can control loop by using auxiliary relay, but can’t drive external load directly.
There are two types divided by its characteristics.

14-21

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

1.Auxiliary relay for general : It will reset to Off when power loss during running. Its
state will be Off when power on after power loss.
2.Auxiliary relay for special : Each special auxiliary relay has its special function.
Please don’t use undefined auxiliary relay.
The Function of Timer
The unit of timer is 1ms, 10ms and 100ms. The count method is count up. The output coil will be On
when the present value of timer equals to the settings. The setting is K in decimal number. Data
register D can be also used as settings.
• The real setting time of timer = unit of timer * settings

The Features and Functions of Counter


Item 16-bit counters 32-bit counters
Type General General High speed
Count direction Count up Count up/down
Settings 0~32,767 -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647
Designate for
Constant K or data register D Constant K or data register D (2 for designated)
constant
Present value Counter will stop when attaining Counter will keep on counting when attaining
change settings settings
When count up attains settings, contact will be
When count attains the settings
On and latched.
Output contact value, contact will be On and
When count down attains settings, contact will
latched.
reset to Off.
The present value will reset to 0 when RST command is executed and contact will
Reset action
reset to Off.
Present register 16-bit 32-bit
After scanning, act together.
Contact action After scanning, act together. Act immediately when count attains. It has no
relation with scan period.

Functions:

When pulse input signal of counter is from Off to On, the present value of counter equals to settings
and output coil is On. Settings are decimal system and data register D can also be used as settings.
16-bit counters C0~C79:

; Setting range of 16-bit counter is K0~K32, 767. (K0 is the same as K1. output contact will be
On immediately at the first count.
; General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss. If counter is latched, it will remember the
value before power loss and keep on counting when power on after power loss.
; If using MOV command, WPLSoft to send a value, which is large than setting to C0, register, at
the next time that X1 is from Off to On, C0 counter contact will be On and present value will be
set to the same as settings.
; The setting of counter can use constant K or register D (not includes special data register
D1000~D1044) to be indirect setting.
; If using constant K to be setting, it can only be positive number but if setting is data register D, it
can be positive/negative number. The next number that counter counts up from 32,767 is
-32,768.

14-22
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

Example:
LD X0 X0
RST C0 RST C0
LD X1 X1
CNT C0 K5 CNT C0 K5
LD C0 C0
OUT Y0 Y0

1. When X0=On, RST command is executed, X0


C0 reset to 0 and output contact reset to
Off. X1
2. When X1 is from Off to On, counter will
5
count up (add 1). 4
C0 settings
3. When counter C0 attains settings K5, C0 3
present 2
contact is On and C0 = setting =K5. C0 value 1
won’t accept X1 trigger signal and C0 0 0

remains K5. Contacts Y0, C0

14.5.2 Special Auxiliary Relays


Special Read(R)/
Function
M Write(W)
M1000 Normally open contact (a contact). This contact is On when running and it is On when
Read only
the status is set to RUN.
M1001 Normally closed contact (b contact). This contact is Off when running and it is Off Read only
when the status is set to RUN.

M1002 On only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get positive pulse in the Read only
RUN moment. Pulse width=scan period.
M1003 Off only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get negative pulse in Read only
the RUN moment. Pulse width=scan period.
M1004 Reserved -
M1005 Fault indication of the AC motor drives Read only
M1006 Output frequency is 0, M1006 On Read only
M1007 Operation direction of AC motor drives (FWD: M1007 Off, REV: M1007On) Read only
M1008 -
~ Reserved
M1010
M1011 10ms clock pulse, 5ms On/5ms Off Read only
M1012 100ms clock pulse, 50ms On / 50ms Off Read only
M1013 1s clock pulse, 0.5s On / 0.5s Off Read only
M1014 1min clock pulse, 30s On / 30s Off Read only
M1015 Frequency attained, M1015=On Read only
M1016 Parameter read/write error, M1016=On Read only
M1017 Succeed to write parameter, M1017 =On Read only

M1018 Reserved
M1019 Reserved
M1020 Zero flag Read only
M1021 Borrow flag Read only
M1022 Carry flag Read only

14-23

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

Special Read(R)/
Function
M Write(W)
M1023 Divisor is 0 Read only
M1024 Reserved -
M1025 RUN(ON) / STOP(OFF) the AC motor drive Read/Write
M1026 The operation direction of the AC motor drive (FWD: OFF, REV: ON) Read/Write
M1027 AC motor drive reset Read/Write
M1028 -
~ Reserved
M1039
M1040 Power On Read/Write
M1041 Reserved -
M1042 Quick stop Read/Write
M1043 Reserved -
M1044 Halt Read/Write
M1045 -
~ Reserved
M1051
M1052 Freuqency Lock Read/Write
M1053 -
~ Reserved
M1055
M1056 Power on ready Read only
M1057 Reserved -
M1058 On quick stopping Read only
M1059 -
~ Reserved
M1062
M1063 Target torque attained Read only
M1064 Read only
~ Reserved
M1071
M1072 Read/Write
~ Reserved
M1079
M1073 Read only
~ Reserved
M1079

14.5.3 Special Registers


Special D Read(R)/
Function
Write(W)
D1000 Reserved -
D1001 PLC firmware version Read only
D1002 Program capacity Read only
D1003 Checksum Read only
D1004
~ Reserved -
D1009
D1010 Present scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) Read only

14-24
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

Special D Read(R)/
Function
Write(W)
D1011 Minimum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) Read only
D1012 Maximum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) Read only
D1013
~ Reserved -
D1019
D1020 Output frequency (0.000~600.00Hz) Read only
D1021 Output current (####.#A) Read only
D1022
~ Reserved -
D1026
D1027 Frequency command of the PID control Read only
D1028 The responsive value of AUI AVI (analog voltage input) (0.00~100.00%) Read only
D1029 The responsive value of AUI ACI (analog current input) (0.0~100.00%) Read only
D1030 The corresponding value for AUI (-100.0~100.00%) Read only
D1031
~ Reserved -
D1035
D1036 AC motor drive error code Read only
D1037 AC motor drive output frequency Read only
D1038 DC Bus voltage Read only
D1039 Output voltage Read only
D1040 Analog output value AFM1 (-100.00~100.00%) Read/Write
D1041
~ Reserved -
D1042
User defined (When Pr.00.04 is set to 28, the register data will be
D1043 Read/Write
displayed as C xxx)
D1044 Reserved -
D1045 Analog output value AFM2 (-100.00~100.00%) Read/Write
D1046
~ Reserved -
D1049
Actual mode
0: Velocity mode
D1050 Read only
1: Position mode
2: Torque mode
+D1051
~ Reserved -
D1052
D1053 Actual torque Read only
D1054 Read only
~ Reserved
D1059
Mode setting
D1060 0: Speed Mode Read/Write
2: Torque Mode
D1061
~ Reserved Read/Write
D1069

14-25

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

14.5.4 Communication Address for PLC Devices


Device Range Type Address (Hex)
X 00~17 (Octal) bit 0400~040F
Y 00~17 (Octal) bit 0500~050F
T 00~159 bit/word 0600~069F
M 000~799 bit 0800~0B1F
M 1000~1079 bit 0BE8~0C37
C 0~79 bit/word 0E00~0E47
D 00~399 word 1000~118F
D 1000~1099 word 13E8~144B

Function Code

Function Code Description Supported Devices

01 Read coil status Y, M, T, C


02 Read input status X,Y,M,T,C
03 Read one data T,C,D
05 Force changing one coil status Y,M,T,C
06 Write in one data T,C,D
0F Force changing multiple coil Y,M,T,C
status
10 Write in multiple data T,C,D
Only when PLC is at Stop status, PLC data can be read/write via communication device. When PLC
is at Run status, the communication address should be the mapping address, e.g. for Pr.04-00 it
maps to 0400H.

NOTE
When PLC function is activated, C2000 can Read/Write the PLC and drive’s parameter by different addresses (pre-defined
station number for the AC motor drive is 1, for PLC station number is 2)

14-26
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

14.6 Commands
14.6.1 Basic Commands

Commands
Commands Function Operands
LD Load contact A X, Y, M, T, C
LDI Load contact B X, Y, M, T, C
AND Series connection with A contact X, Y, M, T, C
ANI Series connection with B contact X, Y, M, T, C
OR Parallel connection with A contact X, Y, M, T, C
ORI Parallel connection with B contact X, Y, M, T, C
ANB Series connects the circuit block --
ORB Parallel connects the circuit block --
MPS Save the operation result --
Read the operation result (the pointer is
MRD --
not moving)
MPP Read the result --

Output Command
Commands Function Operands
OUT Drive coil Y, M
SET Action latched (ON) Y, M
RST Clear the contacts or the registers Y, M, T, C, D

Timer and Counter


Commands Function Operands
TMR 16-bit timer T-K or T-D
CNT 16-bit counter C-K or C-D(16 bit)

Main Control Command


Commands Function Operands
Connect the common series connection
MC N0~N7
contacts
Disconnect the common series connection
MCR N0~N7
contacts

Rising-edge/falling-edge Detection Commands of Contact


Commands Function Operands
LDP Rising-edge detection operation starts X, Y, M, T, C
LDF Falling-edge detection operation starts X, Y, M, T, C
ANDP Rising-edge detection series connection X, Y, M, T, C
ANDF Falling-edge detection series connection X, Y, M, T, C
ORP Rising-edge detection parallel connection X, Y, M, T, C
ORF Falling-edge detection parallel connection X, Y, M, T, C

Rising-edge/falling-edge Output Commands


Commands Function Operands
PLS Rising-edge output Y, M
PLF Falling-edge output Y, M

14-27

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

End Command
Commands Function Operands
END Program end --

Other Command
Commands Function Operands
NOP No function --
INV Inverse operation result --
P Indicator P

14.6.2 Explanation for the Command

Mnemonic Function
LD Load A contact
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 -

L The LD command is used on the A contact that has its start from the left BUS or
the A contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to
save present contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status
into the accumulative register.

Ladder diagram Command code Operation


Example
X0 X1 LD X0 Load contact A of X0
Y1
Connect to contact A of
AND X1
X1 in series
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Mnemonic Function
LDI Load B contact
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 -

The LDI command is used on the B contact that has its start from the left BUS or
the B contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to
save present contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status
into the accumulative register.

Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation:


Example
LDI X0 Load contact B of X0
X0 X1
Y1 AND X1 Connect to contact A of
X1 in series
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

14-28
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

Mnemonic Function
AND Series connection- A contact
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 -
The AND command is used in the series connection of A contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first,
and then to perform the “AND” calculation with the logic calculation result before the
contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.
Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation:
Example
Load contact B of
X1 X0 LDI X1
Y1 X1
Connect to contact
AND X0
A of X0 in series
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Mnemonic Function
ANI Series connection- B contact
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 -
The ANI command is used in the series connection of B contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first,
and then to perform the “AND” calculation with the logic calculation result before the
contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.

Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation:

X1
Load contact A of
Example X0 LD X1
Y1 X1
Connect to contact
ANI X0
B of X0 in series
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Mnemonic Function
OR Parallel connection- A contact
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 -
The OR command is used in the parallel connection of A contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and
then to perform the “OR” calculations with the logic calculation result before the
contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.

14-29

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation:


X0 Load contact A of
Example Y1 LD X0
X0
X1 Connect to contact
OR X1
A of X1 in parallel
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Mnemonic Function
ORI Parallel connection- B contact
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 -

The ORI command is used in the parallel connection of B contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and
then to perform the “OR” calculations with the logic calculation result before the
contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.
Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation:
Example
X0 LD X0 Load contact A of X0
Y1 Connect to contact B of
ORI X1
X1 X1 in parallel
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Mnemonic Function
ANB Series connection (Multiple Circuits)
Operand None
To perform the “ANB” calculation between the previous reserved logic results and
contents of the accumulative register.
Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation:
Example
X0 X1
LD X0 Load contact A of X0
ANB
Y1 Connect to contact B of
ORI X2
X2 in parallel
X2 X3 LDI X1 Load contact B of X1
Connect to contact A of
Block A Block B OR X3
X3 in parallel
Connect circuit block in
ANB
series
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Mnemonic Function
ORB Parallel connection (Multiple circuits)
Operand None

ORB is to perform the “OR” calculation between the previous reserved logic results
and contents of the accumulative register.

14-30
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation:


Example
LD X0 Load contact A of X0
X0 X1 Block A
Y1 Connect to contact B of
ANI X1
X1 in series
X2 X3 LDI X2 Load contact B of X2
ORB
Connect to contact A of
Block B AND X3
X3 in series
Connect circuit block in
ORB
parallel
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Mnemonic Function
MPS Store the current result of the internal PLC operations
Operand None
To save contents of the accumulative register into the operation result. (the result
operation pointer pluses 1)

Mnemonic Function
MRD Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations
Operand None
Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register. (the pointer of
operation result doesn’t move)

Mnemonic Function
MPP Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations
Operand None
Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register. (the stack pointer
will decrease 1)
Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation:
Example
LD X0 Load contact A of X0
MPS
X0 X1 MPS Save in stack
Y1 Connect to contact A of
X2 AND X1
X1 in series
MRD M0 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil
Read from the stack
Y2 MRD (without moving
MPP pointer)
END Connect to contact A of
AND X2
X2 in series
OUT M0 Drive M0 coil
MPP Read from the stack
OUT Y2 Drive Y2 coil
END End program

14-31

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

Mnemonic Function
OUT Output coil
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
- 9 9 - - -
Output the logic calculation result before the OUT command to specific device.

Motion of coil contact:


OUT command
Operation Contact
result Coil A contact B contact
(normally open) (normally closed)
FALSE Off Non-continuity Continuity
TRUE On Continuity Non-continuity
Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation:
Example
X0 X1 LD X0 Load contact B of X0
Y1
Connect to contact A of
AND X1
X1 in series
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Mnemonic Function
SET Latch (ON)
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
- 9 9 - - -
When the SET command is driven, its specific device is set to be “ON,” which will
keep “ON” whether the SET command is still driven. You can use the RST command
to set the device to “OFF”.
Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation:
Example X0 Y0 LD X0 Load contact A of X0
SET Y1
Connect to contact B of
AN Y0
Y0 in series
SET Y1 Y1 latch (ON)

Mnemonic Function
RST Clear the contacts or the registers
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
- 9 9 9 9 9
When the RST command is driven, motion of its specific device is as follows:
Device Status
Y, M Coil and contact will be set to “OFF”.
Present values of the timer or counter will be set to 0, and the coil
T, C
and contact will be set to “OFF.”
D The content value will be set to 0.
When the RST command is not driven, motion of its specific device is unchanged.
Command code: Operation:
Example Ladder diagram
LD X0 Load contact A of X0

14-32
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

X0
RST Y5 RST Y5 Clear contact Y5

Mnemonic Function
TMR 16-bit timer
T-K T0~T159, K0~K32,767
Operand
T-D T0~T159, D0~D399
When TMR command is executed, the specific coil of timer is ON and timer will start to
count. When the setting value of timer is attained (counting value >= setting value),
the contact will be as following
Open
NO(Normally Open) contact
collector
Close
NC(Normally Closed) contact
collector
When the RST command is not driven, motion of its specific device remains
unchanged.

Example Ladder Diagram: Command code: Operation:


X0 LD X0 Load contact A of X0
TMR T5 K1000
T5 Setting of T5 counter
TMR
K1000 is K1000.

Mnemonic Function
CNT Clear contact or register
C-K C0~C79, K0~K32,767
Operand
C-D C0~C79, D0~D399
When the CNT command is executed from OFFÆON, which means that the counter
coil is driven, and 1 should thus be added to the counter’s value; when the counter
achieved specific set value (value of counter = the setting value), motion of the
contact is as follows:
Open
NO(Normally Open) contact
collector
Close
NC(Normally Close) contact
collector
If there is counting pulse input after counting is attained, the contacts and the counting
values will be unchanged. To re-count or to conduct the CLEAR motion, please use
the RST command.
Command code: Operation
Example Ladder diagram:
LD X0 Load contact A of
X0
CNT C2 K100 Setting of C2 counter is
CNT C2 K100
K100.

14-33

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

Mnemonic Function
MC/MCR Master control Start/Reset
Operand N0~N7
1. MC is the main-control start command. When the MC command is executed, the
execution of commands between MC and MCR will not be interrupted. When MC
command is OFF, the motion of the commands that between MC and MCR is
described as follows:
Command Description
Timer The counting value is set back to zero, the coil and
the contact are both turned OFF
Accumulative timer The coil is OFF, and the timer value and the
contact stay at their present condition
Subroutine timer The counting value is back to zero. Both coil and
contact are turned OFF.
The coil is OFF, and the counting value and the
Counter
contact stay at their present condition
Coils driven up by the OUT
All turned OFF
command
Devices driven up by the SET
Stay at present condition
and RST commands
All of them are not acted , but the nest loop
FOR-NEXT command will still be executed for
Application commands
times defined by users even though the MC-MCR
commands is OFF.
2. MCR is the main-control ending command that is placed at the end of the
main-control program and there should not be any contact commands prior to the
MCR command.
3. Commands of the MC-MCR main-control program support the nest program
structure, with 8 layers as its greatest. Please use the commands in order from N0~
N7, and refer to the following:
Command code: Operation:
Ladder Diagram:
Example LD X0 Load A contact of X0
X0
MC N0
Enable N0 common
MC N0 series connection
X1
Y0
contact
LD X1 Load A contact of X1
X2
MC N1 OUT Y0 Drive Y0 coil
X3
Y1 :
LD X2 Load A contact of X2
MCR N1 Enable N1 common
MC
N1 series connection
MCR N0 contact
X10
MC N0 LD X3 Load A contact of X3
X11
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil
Y10
:
MCR N0 Disable N1 common
MCR N1 series connection
contact

14-34
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

:
Disable N0 common
MCR N0 series connection
contact
:
LD X10 Load A contact of X10
Enable N0 common
MC N0 series connection
contact
LD X11 Load A contact of X0
Enable N0 common
OUT Y10 series connection
contact
: Load A contact of X1
MCR N0 Drive Y0 coil

Mnemonic Function
LDP Rising-edge detection operation
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 -
Usage of the LDP command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is
different. It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the
detection status of the acquired contact rising-edge into the accumulative register.
Command code: Operation:
Example Ladder diagram:
Start X0 rising-edge
LDP X0
X0 X1 detection
Y1 Series connection A
AND X1
contact of X1
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil
Please refer to the specification of each model series for the applicable range of
Remarks
operands.
If rising-edge status is ON when PLC power is off, then the rising-edge status will be
TRUE when PLC power is on.

Mnemonic Function
LDF Falling-edge detection operation
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 -

Usage of the LDF command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is different. It is
used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the detection status of the
acquired contact falling-edge into the accumulative register.
Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation:
Example X0 X1 Start X0 falling-edge
LDF X0
Y1 detection
Series connection A
AND X1
contact of X1
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

14-35

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

Mnemonic Function
ANDP Rising-edge series connection
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 -

ANDP command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ rising-edge detection.

Ladder diagram: Command code:


Operation:
Example X0 X1 Load A contact of X0
Y1 LD X0
X1 rising-edge
ANDP X1 detection in series
connection
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Mnemonic Function
ANDF Falling-edge series connection
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 -

ANDF command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ falling-edge detection.

Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation:


Example X0 X1 LD X0 Load A contact of X0
Y1
X1 falling-edge
ANDF X1 detection in series
connection
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Mnemonic Function
ORP Rising-edge parallel connection
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 -

The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s
rising-edge detection.

Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation:


Example X0 LD X0 Load A contact of X0
Y1 X1 rising-edge
X1 ORP X1 detection in parallel
connection
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

14-36
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

Mnemonic Function
ORF Falling-edge parallel connection
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 -
The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s falling-edge
detection.
Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation:
Example X0 LD X0 Load A contact of X0
Y1 X1 falling-edge
X1 ORF X1 detection in parallel
connection
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

Mnemonic Function
PLS Rising-edge output
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
- 9 9 - - -

When X0=OFF→ON (rising-edge trigger), PLS command will be executed and M0 will
send the pulse of one time which the length is the time needed for one scan cycle.
Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation:
Example X0 LD X0 Load A contact of X0
PLS M0 PLS M0 M0 rising-edge output
M0
Load the contact A of
SET Y0 LD M0
M0
SET Y0 Y0 latched (ON)
Timing diagram:
X0

M0 Time for one scan cycle

Y0

Mnemonic Function
PLF Falling-edge output
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
- 9 9 - - -
When X0= ON→OFF (falling-edge trigger), PLF command will be executed and M0
will send the pulse of one time which the length is the time for scan one time.

14-37

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation:


Example X0 LD X0 Load contact A of X0
PLS M0 PLF M0 M0 falling-edge output
M0
LD M0 Load contact A of M0
SET Y0
SET Y0 Y0 latched (ON)
Timing Diagram:
X0

M0 Time for one scan cycle

Y0

Mnemonic Function
END Program End
Operand None

It needs to add the END command at the end of ladder diagram program or
command program. PLC will scan from address o to END command, after the
execution it will return to address 0 and scan again.

Mnemonic Function
NOP No action
Operand None
NOP command does no operation in the program; the result of executing this
command will remain the logic operation. Use NOP command if user wants to delete
certain command without changing the length of the program.
Command code: Operation:
Ladder diagram:
Example LD X0 Load contact B of X0
NOP command will be simplified and not
displayed when the ladder diagram is NOP No function
displayed.
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil
X0
NOP Y1

Mnemonic Function
INV Inverse operation result
Operand None
The operation result (before executing INV command) will be saved inversely into
cumulative register.
Command code: Operation:
Ladder diagram:
Example LD X0 Load contact A of X0
X0
Y1 Operation result
INV
inversed
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

14-38
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

Mnemonic Function
P Indicator
Operand P0~P255
Indicator P allows API 00 CJ command and API 01 CALL command to skip from 0.
Though it is not necessary to start from number 0, same number can not be used
twice or serious error would occur.
Command code: Operation:
Ladder diagram:
Example LD X0 Load contact A of X0
X0
CJ P10
CJ P10 Skip command CJ to
P10
X1 :
P10 Y1
P10 Indicator P10
LD X1 Load contact A of X1
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

14.6.3 Description of the Application Commands


Mnemonic Codes P STEPS
API Function
16-bit 32-bit Command 16bit 32bit
01 CALL - 9 CALL subroutine 3 -
Loop control
06 FEND - - The end of main program 1 -
10 CMP – 9 Compare 7 13
Transmission 11 ZCP – 9 Zone compare 9 17
Comparison 12 MOV – 9 Data Move 5 9
15 BMOV – 9 Block move 7 –
– Perform the addition of BIN 13
20 ADD 9 7
data
– Perform the subtraction of 13
21 SUB 9 7
Four BIN data
Fundamental – Perform the multiplication 13
22 MUL 9 7
Operations of of BIN data
Arithmetic – Perform the division of BIN 13
23 DIV 9 7
data
24 INC – 9 Perform the addition of 1 3 5
25 DEC – 9 Perform the subtraction of 1 3 5
30 ROR – 9 Rotate to the right 5 –
Rotation and –
Displacement 31 ROL 9 Rotate to the left 5 –
Data
40 ZRST – 9 Zero Reset 5 -
Processing
Contact type Contact Logical Operation
215 LD& DLD& - 5 9
LD#
logic Contact type logic
216 LD| DLD| - 5 9
operation operation LD#
Contact Logical Operation
217 LD^ DLD^ - 5 9
LD#
Contact Logical Operation
218 AND& DAND& - 5 9
AND#

14-39

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

Mnemonic Codes P STEPS


API Function
16-bit 32-bit Command 16bit 32bit
Contact Logical Operation
219 ANDl DANDl - 5 9
AND#
Contact Logical Operation
220 AND^ DAND^ - 5 9
AND#
Contact Logical Operation
221 OR& DOR& - 5 9
OR#
Contact Logical Operation
222 OR| DOR| - 5 9
OR#
Contact Logical Operation
223 OR^ DOR^ - 5 9
OR#
224 LD= DLD= - Load Compare LD※ 5 9
225 LD> DLD> - Load Compare LD※ 5 9
226 LD< DLD< - Load Compare LD※ 5 9
228 LD<> DLD<> - Load Compare LD※ 5 9
229 LD<= DLD<= - Load Compare LD※ 5 9
230 LD>= DLD>= - Load Compare LD※ 5 9
232 AND= DAND= - AND Compare※ 5 9
233 AND> DAND> - AND Compare※ 5 9
234 AND< DAND< - AND Compare※ 5 9
Contact Type
DAND< AND Compare※
Comparison 236 AND<> - 5 9

DAND< AND Compare※
237 AND<= - 5 9

DAND> AND Compare※
238 AND>= - 5 9

240 OR= DOR= - OR compare ※ 5 9
241 OR> DOR> - OR compare ※ 5 9
242 OR< DOR< - OR compare ※ 5 9
244 OR<> DOR<> - OR compare ※ 5 9
245 OR<= DOR<= - OR compare ※ 5 9
246 OR>= DOR>= - OR compare ※ 5 9
139 RPR – 9 Read the parameters 5 –
140 WPR – 9 Write the parameters 5 –

Special 141 FPID – 9 Drive PID control 9 –

command for 142 FREQ – 9 Control the drive frequency 7 –


AC motor 261 CANRX – 9 Read CANopen Slave data 9 -
drive 263 TORQ – 9 Set target torque 5 -
264 CANTX – 9 Write CANopen Slave data 9 -
9 Update the mapping
265 CANFLS – 3 -
special D of CANopen

14-40
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

14.6.4 Explanation for the Application Commands

API
CALL S Call Subroutine
01 P

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (3 STEPS)


CALL CALLP
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D
Operands: 32-bit command
S: Operand S can designate P. - - - -
Flag signal: None
Operand S of C2000 series can designate P0~P63.
1. S: The pointer of call subroutine.
Explanation
2. Edit the subroutine designated by the pointer after FEND instruction.
3. If only CALL instruction is in use, it can call subroutines of the same pointer
number with no limit of times.
4. Subroutine can be nested for 5 levels including the initial CALL instruction. (If
entering the sixth level, the subroutine won’t be executed.)

14-41

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
FEND - The end of the main program (First End)
06

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (1 STEP)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FEND - -

Operands: 32-bit command


No operand - - - -
No contact to drive the instruction is required. Flag signal: None

1. This instruction denotes the end of the main program. It has the same function
Explanation
as that of END instruction when being executed by PLC.
2. CALL must be written after FEND instruction and add SRET instruction in the
end of its subroutine. Interruption program has to be written after FEND
instruction and IRET must be added in the end of the service program.
3. If several FEND instructions are in use, place the subroutine and interruption
service programs between the final FEND and END instruction.
4. After CALL instruction is executed, executing FEND before SRET will result in
errors in the program.
When X1=ON,
CALL operation
Command procedure
Main Program
When X1=OFF, X1
operation
CALL P63
procedure

Main Program

Main Program

P63 CALL Sub command


program

Main Program

14-42
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
CMP S1 S2 D Compare
10 D P

Bit Devices Word Devices


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D 16-bit command ( 7 STEPS)
S1 * * * * * * * * CMP CMPP
S2 * * * * * * * *
D * * 32bits command (13 STEPS)
- - - -
Operand
Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices.
Flag signal: None

Explanation 1. S1: value comparsion 1, S2: value comparison 2 , D: result comparison


2. The contents in S1 and S2 are compared and result is stored in D.
3. The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values
are signed binary values. When b15 = 1 in 16-bit instruction, the comparison
will regard the value as negative binary values.
1. Designate device Y0, and operand D automatically occupies Y0, Y1, and Y2.
Example 2. When X10 = On, CMP instruction will be executed and one of Y0, Y1, and Y2
will be On. When X10 = Off, CMP instruction will not be executed and Y0,
Y1, and Y2 remain their status before X10 = Off.
3. If the user need to obtain a comparison result with ≥ ≤, and ≠, make a series
parallel connection between Y0 ~ Y2.
X10
CMP K10 D10 Y0
Y0
If K10>D10, Y0 = On
Y1
If K10=D10, Y1 = On

Y2
If K10<D10, Y2= On

4. To clear the comparison result, use RST or ZRST instruction.


X10
RST M0

RST M1

RST M2

14-43

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
ZCP S1 S2 S D Zone Compare
11 D P

Bit Devices Word Devices


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D 16-bit command (9 STEPS)
S1 * * * * * * * * ZCP ZCPP
S2 * * * * * * * *
S * * * * * * * * 32-bit command (17 STEPS)
D * * - - - -
Operands:
Flag signal: none
S1: Lower bound of zone comparison S2: Upper
bound of zone comparison S: Comparison value
D: Comparison result

E xplanation 1. S1: Lower bound of zone comparison S2: Upper bound of zone
comparison S: Comparison value D: Comparison result
2. S is compared with its S1 S2 and the result is stored in D.
3. When S1 > S2, the instruction performs comparison by using S1 as the
lower/upper bound.
4. The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two
values are signed binary values. When b15 = 1 in 16-bit instruction or
b31 = 1 in 32-bit instruction, the comparison will regard the value as
negative binary values.
1. Designate device M0, and operand D automatically occupies M0, M1 and
Example
M2.
2. When X0 = On, ZCP instruction will be executed and one of M0, M1, and
M2 will be On. When X10 = Off, ZCP instruction will not be executed and
M0, M1, and M2 remain their status before X0 = Off.
3. If the user need to obtain a comparison result with ≥ ≤, and ≠, make a
series parallel connection between Y0 ~ Y2.
„
X0
ZCP K10 K100 C10 M0
M0
If C10 < K10, M0 = On
M1
If K10 <
= C10 <
= K100, M1 = On
M2
If C10 > K100, M2 = On

4. To clear the comparison result, use RST or ZRST instruction.

X0 X0
RST M0 ZRST M0 M2

RST M1

RST M2

14-44
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
MOV S D Moving the data
12 D P

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D MOV MOVP
S * * * * * * * *
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
D * * * * * - - - -
Operand: None Flag signal: None
E xplanation 1. S: Source of data D: Destination of data
2. When this instruction is executed, the content of S will be moved directly
to D. When this instruction is not executed, the content of D remains
unchanged.

Example
1. When X0 = Off, the content in D10 will remain unchanged. If X0 = On, the
value K10 will be moved to D10 data register.
2. When X1 = Off, the content in D10 will remain unchanged. If X1 = On, the
present value T0 will be moved to D10 data register.
X0
MOV K10 D0
X1
MOV T0 D10

14-45

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
BMOV S D n Block Move
15 P

Bit Devices Word Devices


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D 16-bit command (7 STEPS)
BMOV BMOVP
S * * * * * *
D * * * * *
32-bit command
n * * - - - -
Operand:
Flag signal: None
Range of n =1~512

E xplanation 1. S: Start of source devices D: Start of destination devices n: Number of data to be


moved
2. The contents in n registers starting from the device designated by S will be moved to n
registers starting from the device designated by D. If n exceeds the actual number of
available source devices, only the devices that fall within the valid range will be used.

Example When X10 = On, the contents in registers D0 ~ D3 will be moved to the 4 registers D20 ~ D23.
X10
1 D20 K4 D0 D20
D1 D21 n=4
D2 D22
D3 D23
Assume the bit devices KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS are designated for moving, the number of
Example digits of S and D has to be the same, i.e. their n has to be the same.
M1000
2 D0 D20 K4 M0
M1
M2
M3

M4
M5
n=3
M6
M7

M8 Y10
M9 Y11
M10 Y12
M11 Y13

Example To avoid coincidence of the device numbers to be moved designated by the two operands and
cause confusion, please be aware of the arrangement on the designated device numbers.
3
When S > D, the BMOV command is processed in the order as 1→2→3
X10
D20 1 D19
BMOV D20 D19 K3 2
D21 D20
3
D22 D21

When S < D, the BMOV command is processed in the order as 3→2→1


X11
D10 3 D11
BMOV D10 D11 K3 2
D11 D12
1
D12 D13

14-46
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
ADD S1 S2 D BIN Addition
20 D P

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (7 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ADD ADDP
S1 * * * * * * * *
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
S2 * * * * * * * * - - - -
D * * * * *
Operands: None Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag
M1021 Borrow flag
M1022 Carry flag
E xplanation 1. S1: Summand S2: Addend D: Sum
2. This instruction adds S1 and S2 in BIN format and store the result in D.
3. The highest bit is symbolic bit 0 (+) and 1 (-), which is suitable for algebraic
addition, e.g. 3 + (-9) = -6.
4. Flag changes in binary addition
16-bit command:
A. If the operation result = 0, zero flag M1020 = On.

B. If the operation result < -32,768, borrow flag M1021 = On.

C. If the operation result > 32,767, carry flag M1022 = On.

Example 16-bit command:


When X0 = On, the content in D0 will plus the content in D10 and the sum will be
stored in D20.

X0
ADD D0 D10 D20

Remarks Flags and the positive/negative sign of the values:


16 bit: Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag

-2, -1, 0 -32,768 -1, 0 1 32,767 0 1 2

The highest bit The highest bit


Borrow flag of the data of the data Carry flag
= 1 (negative) = 0 (positive)

32 bit: Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag

-2, -1, 0 -2,147,483,648 -1, 0 1 2,147,483,647 0 1 2

The highest bit The highest bit


Borrow flag Carry flag
of the data of the data
= 1 (negative) = 0 (positive)

14-47

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
SUB S1 S2 D Subtraction
21 D P

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (7 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D SUB SUBP
S1 * * * * * * * *
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
S2 * * * * * * * * - - - -
D * * * * *
Operands: None Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag
M1021 Borrow flag
M1022 Carry flag
E xplanation 1. S1: Minuend S2: Subtrahend D: Remainder
2. This instruction subtracts S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D.
3. The highest bit is symbolic bit 0 (+) and 1 (-), which is suitable for algebraic
subtraction.
4. Flag changes in binary subtraction
In 16-bit instruction:
If the operation result = 0, zero flag M1020 = On.
If the operation result < -32,768, borrow flag M1021 = On.
If the operation result > 32,767, carry flag M1022 = On.
Example In 16-bit BIN subtraction:
When X0 = On, the content in D0 will minus the content in D10 and the remainder will
be stored in D20.

X0
SUB D0 D10 D20

14-48
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
MUL S1 S2 D BIN Multiplication
22 D P

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (7 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D MUL MULP
S1 * * * * * * * *
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
S2 * * * * * * * * - - - -
D * * * * *
Operands:
Flag signal: None
In 16-bit instruction, D occupies 2 consecutive devices.
E xplanation 1. S1: Multiplicand S2: Multiplication D: Product
2. This instruction multiplies S1 by S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D.
Be careful with the positive/negative signs of S1, S2 and D when doing 16-bit
and 32-bit operations.
16-bit command:
S1 S2 D +1 D

b15..........b0 b15..........b0 b31..........b16b15..............b0


X =
b15 is a symbol bit b15 is a symbol bit b31 is a symbol bit (b15 of D+1)
Symbol bit = 0 refers to a positive value.
Symbol bit = 1 refers to a negative value.

When D serves as a bit device, it can designate K1 ~ K4 and construct a 16-bit result,
occupying consecutive 2 groups of 16-bit data.

Example The 16-bit D0 is multiplied by the 16-bit D10 and brings forth a 32-bit product. The
higher 16-bit are stored in D21 and the lower 16-bit are stored in D20. On/Off of the
most left bit indicates the positive/negative status of the result value.

X0
MUL D0 D10 D20

MUL D0 D10 K8M0

14-49

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
DIV S1 S2 D BIN Division
23 D P

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (7 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D DIV DIVP
S1 * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
D * * * * * - - - -
Operands: Flag signal: none`
In 16-bit instruction, D occupies 2 consecutive devices.
E xplanation 1. S1: Dividend S2: Divisor D: Quotient and remainder
2. This instruction divides S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D. Be
careful with the positive/negative signs of S1, S2 and D when doing 16-bit and
32-bit operations.

16-bit instruction:
Quotient Remainder
+1

/ =
If D is the bit device, it allocates K1~K14 to 16-bit and occupies 2 continuous sets
of quotient and remainder.

Example When X0 = On, D0 will be divided by D10; the quotient will be stored in D20 and
remainder in D21. On/Off of the highest bit indicates the positive/negative value of the
result.
X0
DIV D0 D10 D20

DIV D0 D10 K4Y0

14-50
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
INC D Increment: BIN plus 1
24 D P

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (3 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D INC INCP
D * * * * *
32-bit command (5 STEPS)
Operands: none
- - - -

Flag signal: none

E xplanation 1. D: Destination device


2. If the instruction is not a pulse execution one, the content in the
designated device D will plus “1” in every scan period whenever the
instruction is executed.
3. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (INCP).
4. In 16-bit operation, 32,767 pluses 1 and obtains -32,768. In 32-bit
operation, 2,147,483,647 pluses 1 and obtains -2,147,483,648.
Example When X0 goes from Off to On, the content in D0 pluses 1 automatically.
X0
INCP D0

14-51

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
DEC D Decrement: BIN minus 1
25 D P

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (3 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D DEC DECP
D * * * * *
32-bit command (5 STEPS)
Operands: none
- - - -
Flag signal: none

E xplanation D: Destination
1. If the command is not a pulse execution type, the content in the designated
device D will minus “1” in every scan period whenever the instruction is
executed.
2. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (DECP).
3. In 16-bit operation, -32,768 minuses 1 and obtains 32,767. In 32-bit operation,
-2,147,483,648 minuses 1 and obtains 2,147,483,647.

Example When X0 goes from Off to On, the content in D0 minuses 1 automatically.
X0
DECP D0

14-52
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
ROR D n Rotate to the Right
30 P

Bit Devices Word Devices 16 bit command (5 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ROR RORP
D * * * * *
32-bit command
n * *
- - - -
Operands:
D: if in KnY and KnM, only K4 (16-bit) is valid Flag signal: M1022 Carry flag
n: n=K1~K16 (16-bit)
E xplanation 1. D: Device to be rotated n: Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation
2. This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the right for
n bits.
3. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (RORP).

Example When X0 goes from Off to On, the 16-bit (4 bits as a group) in D10 will rotate to
the right, as shown in the figure below. The bit marked with ※ will be sent to carry
flag M1022.
X0
RORP D10 K4

Rotate to the right


upper bit lower bit
D10 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 Carry
flag
16 bits
After one rotation
to the right
upper bit lower bit
D10 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 Carry
* flag

14-53

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
ROL D n Rotate to the Left
31 P

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ROL ROLP
D * * * * *
32-bit command
n * * - - - -
Operands:
D: if in KnY and KnM, only K4 (16-bit) is valid
n: n=K1~K16 (16-bit) Flag signal: M1022 Carry flag

E xplanation 1. D: Device to be rotated; n: Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation


2. This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the left for
n bits.
3. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (ROLP).

Example When X0 goes from Off to On, the 16-bit (4 bits as a group) in D10 will rotate to
the left, as shown in the figure below. The bit marked with ※ will be sent to carry
flag M1022.
X0
D10 K4

Rotate to the left


upper bit lower bit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D10
Carry
flag 16 bits
After one rotation
to the left
upper bit lower bit
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 D10
Carry
flag

14-54
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
ZRST D1 D2 Zero Reset
40 P

Bit Devices Word Devices


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D 16-bit command (5 STEPS)
D1 * * * * * ZRST ZRSTP
D2 * * * * *
32-bit command
Operands:
- - - -
No of D1 operand. ≦No. of D2 operand
D1 and D2 must select same device type
Flag signal: none
Please refer to the specification of each model series
for applicable range of the device.
E xplanation D1: Start device of the range to be reset D2: End device of the range to be reset
When D1 > D2, only operands designated by D2 will be reset.

Example 1. When X0 = On, auxiliary relays M300 ~ M399 will be reset to Off.
2. When X1 = On, 16 counters C0 ~ C127 will all be reset (writing in 0; contact
and coil being reset to Off).
3. When X10 = On, timers T0 ~ T127 will all be reset (writing in 0; contact and coil
being reset to Off).
4. When X3 = On, data registers D0 ~ D100 will be reset to 0.

X0
ZRST M300 M399
X1
ZRST C0 C127
X10
ZRST T0 T127
X3
ZRST D0 D100

Remarks 1. Devices, e.g. bit devices Y, M, S and Word Devices T, C, D, can use RST
instruction.
2. API 16 FMOV instruction is also to send K0 to Word Devices T, C, D or bit
registers KnY, KnM, KnS for reset.
X0
RST M0

RST T0

RST Y0

FMOV K0 D10 K5

14-55

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
215~ LD# S1 S2 Contact Logical Operation LD#
D
217

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D LD# ZRSTP
S1 * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DLD# - - -
Operands: #: &, |, ^
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
E xplanation 1. S1: Data source device 1 S2: Data source device 2
2. This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. If the result is not “0”, the
continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the result is “0”, the continuity of the
instruction is disabled.
3. LD# (#: &, |, ^) instruction is used for direct connection with BUS.
16 -bit 32 -bit No-continuity
API No. Continuity condition
instruction instruction condition

215 LD& DLD& S1 & S2 ≠0 S1 & S2 =0


216 LD| DLD| S1 | S2 ≠0 S1 | S2 =0
217 LD^ DLD^ S1 ^ S2 ≠0 S1 ^ S2 =0

4. &: Logical “AND” operation


5. |: Logical “OR” operation
6. ^: Logical “XOR” operation

Example 1. When the result of logical AND operation of C0 and C10 ≠ 0, Y10 = On.
2. When the result of logical OR operation of D200 and D300 ≠ 0 and X1 = On,
Y11 = On will be retained.

LD & C0 C10 Y10


X1
LD I D200 D300 SET Y11

14-56
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
218~ AND# S1 S2 Contact Logical Operation AND#
D
220

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D AND# ZRSTP
S1 * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DAND# - - -
Operands: #: &, |, ^
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
E xplanation 1. S1: Data source device 1 S2: Data source device 2
2. This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. If the result is not “0”, the
continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the result is “0”, the continuity of the
instruction is disabled.
3. AND# (#: &, |, ^) is an operation instruction used on series contacts.

16 -bit 32 -bit No-continuity


API No. Continuity condition
instruction instruction condition

218 AND& DAND& S1 & S2 ≠0 S1 & S2 =0


219 AND| DAND| S1 | S2 ≠0 S1 | S2 =0
220 AND^ DAND^ S1 ^ S2 ≠0 S1 ^ S2 =0

4. &: Logical “AND” operation

5. |: Logical “OR” operation

6. ^: Logical “XOR” operation

Example 1. When X0 = On and the result of logical AND operation of C0 and C10 ≠ 0, Y10 =
On.
2. When X1 = Off and the result of logical OR operation of D10 and D0 ≠ 0 and X1 =
On, Y11 = On will be retained.
3. When X2 = On and the result of logical XOR operation of 32-bit register D200
(D201) and 32-bit register D100 (D101) ≠ 0 or M3 = On, M50 = On.
X0
AND & C0 C10 Y10
X1
AND I D10 D0 SET Y11
X2
DAND ^ D200 D100 M50
M3

14-57

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
221~ OR# S1 S2 Contact Logical operation OR#
D
223

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D OR# ZRSTP
S1 * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DOR# - - -
Operand: #: &, |, ^
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
E xplanation 1. S1: Data source device 1 S2: Data source device 2
2. This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. If the result is not “0”, the
continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the result is “0”, the continuity of the
instruction is disabled.
3. OR# (#: &, |, ^) is an operation instruction used on parallel contacts.

16 -bit 32 -bit No-continuity


API No. Continuity condition
instruction instruction condition

221 OR& DOR& S1 & S2 ≠0 S1 & S2 =0


222 OR| DOR| S1 | S2 ≠0 S1 | S2 =0
223 OR^ DOR^ S1 ^ S2 ≠0 S1 ^ S2 =0

4. &: Logical “AND” operation


5. |: Logical “OR” operation
6. ^: Logical “XOR” operation

Example When X1 = On and the result of logical AND operation of C0 and C10 ≠ 0, Y10 = On.
1. M60 will be On, if X2 and M30 are On with one of the following two conditions: 1.
The OR operation result of 32-bit register D10 (D11) and 32-bit register D20(D21)
does not equal to 0. 2. The XOR operation result of 32-bit counter C235 and
32bits register D200 (D201) does not equal 0.

LD= K200 C10 Y10

X1
LD> D200 K-30 SET Y11

14-58
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
224~ LD※ S1 S2 Load Compare※
D
230

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D LD※ ZRSTP
S1 * * * * * * * *
32 位 bits command (9 STEPS)
S2 * * * * * * * *
DLD※ - - -
Operands: ※: =, >, <, <>,≦,≧
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
E xplanation 1. S1: Data source device 1 S2: Data source device 2
2. This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. Take API224 (LD=) for
example, if the result is “=”, the continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the
result is “≠”, the continuity of the instruction is disabled.
3. LD※ (※: =, >, <, <>, ≤, ≥) instruction is used for direct connection with BUS.

16 -bit 32 -bit Continuity No-continuity


API No.
instruction instruction condition condition

224 LD= DLD= S1 = S2 S1 ≠ S2

225 LD> DLD> S1 > S2 S1 ≦ S2

226 LD< DLD< S1 < S2 S1 ≧ S2

228 LD<> DLD<> S1 ≠ S2 S1 = S2

229 LD<= DLD<= S1 ≦ S2 S1 > S2

230 LD>= DLD>= S1 ≧ S2 S1 < S2

Example 1. When the content in C10 = K200, Y10 = On.


2. When the content in D200 > K-30 and X1 = On, Y11= On will be retained.

X1
Y0

OR & C0 C10

X2 M30
M60

DOR I D10 D20

14-59

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
232~ AND※ S1 S2 AND Compare※
D
238

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D AND※ ZRSTP
S1 * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DAND※ - - -
Operands: ※: =, >, <, <>,≦,≧
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
E xplanation 1. S1: Data source device 1 S2: Data source device 2
2. This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. Take API232 (AND=) for
example, if the result is “=”, the continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the result
is “≠”, the continuity of the instruction is disabled.

3. AND※ (※: =, >, <, <>, ≤, ≥) is a comparison instruction is used on series


contacts

16 –bit 32 –bit Continuity No-continuity


API No.
instruction instruction condition condition

232 AND= DAND= S1 = S2 S1 ≠ S2

233 AND> DAND> S1 > S2 S1 ≦ S2

234 AND< DAND< S1 < S2 S1 ≧ S2

236 AND<> DAND<> S1 ≠ S2 S1 = S2

237 AND<= DAND<= S1 ≦ S2 S1 > S2

238 AND>= DAND>= S1 ≧ S2 S1 < S2

Example 1. When X0 = On and the content in C10 = K200, Y10 = On.


2. When X1 = Off and the content in D0 ≠ K-10, Y11= On will be retained.
3. When X2 = On and the content in 32-bit register D0 (D11) < 678,493 or M3 =
On, M50 = On.
X0
AND= K200 C10 Y10

X1
AND<> K-10 D0 SET Y11

X2
DAND> K678493 D10 M50
M3

14-60
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
240~ OR※ S1 S2 OR Compare※
D
246

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D OR※ ZRSTP
S1 * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DOR※ - - -
Operands: ※: =, >, <, <>,≦,≧
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
E xplanation 1. S1: Data source device 1 S2: Data source device 2
2. This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. Take API240 (OR=) for
example, if the result is “=”, the continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the
result is “≠”, the continuity of the instruction is disabled.
3. OR※ (※: =, >, <, <>, ≤, ≥) is an comparison instruction used on parallel
contacts.
16 -bit 32 -bit Continuity No-continuity
API No.
instruction instruction condition condition

232 AND= DAND= S1 = S2 S1 ≠ S2

233 AND> DAND> S1 > S2 S1 ≦ S2

234 AND< DAND< S1 < S2 S1 ≧ S2

236 AND<> DAND<> S1 ≠ S2 S1 = S2

237 AND<= DAND<= S1 ≦ S2 S1 > S2

238 AND>= DAND>= S1 ≧ S2 S1 < S2

Example 1. When X1 = On and the present value of C10 = K200, Y0 = On.


2. When X1 = Off and the content in D0 ≠ K-10, Y11= On will be retained.
3. M50 will be On when X2=On and the content of 32-bit register D0(D11) <678,493
or M3= On.
X0
AND= K200 C10 Y10

X1
AND<> K-10 D0 SET Y11

X2
DAND> K678493 D10 M50
M3

14-61

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

14.6.5 Description to drive’s special commands

API
RPR S1 S2 Read the AC motor drive’s parameters
139 P

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D RPR RPRP
S1 * * *
32-bit command
S2 *
- - - -
Operands: none
Flag signal: none

E xplanation S1: Data address for reading S2: The register that saves the read data

API
WPR S1 S2 Write the AC motor drive’s parameters
140 P

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D WPR WPRP
S1 * * *
32-bit command
S2 * * *
- - - -
Operands: None
Flag signal: none

E xplanation S1: The data for writing. S2: The parameters address for the write data.
1. It will read the data in parameter H2100 of the C2000 and write into D0; H2101 is
Example
read and write into D1.
2. When M0=On, data in D10 will be written into Pr. H2001 of C2000.
3. When M1=ON, data in H2 will be written into Pr. H2001 of C2000, which is to
activate the AC motor drive.
4. When M2=ON, data in H1 will be written into H2000 of C2000, which is to stop
the AC motor drive.
5. When data writing successfully, M1017 will be on.
M1000
RPR H2100 D0

RPR H2101 D1
M0
WPR D10 H2001
M1
WPRP H2 H2000
M2
WPRP H1 H2000
M1017
Y0

END

14-62
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
FPID S1 S2 S3 S4 PID control for the AC motor drive
141 P

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (9 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FPID FPIDP
S1 * * *
S2 * * * 32-bit command
S3 * * * - - - -
S4 * * *
Operands: None Flag signal: None

E xplanation 1. S1: PID Set Point Selection, S2: Proportional Gain P, S3: Integral Time I, S4:
Derivative control D
2. This command FPID can control the PID parameters of the AC motor drive
directly, including Pr.08.00 PID set point selection, Pr.08.01 Proportional gain
(P), Pr.08.02 Integral time (I) and Pr.08.03 Derivative control (D)

Example 1. Assume that when M0=ON, S1 is set to 0 (PID function is disabled), S2=0, S3 =1
(unit: 0.01 seconds) and S4=1 (unit: 0.01 seconds).
2. Assume that when M1=ON, S1 is set to 0 (PID function is disabled), S2=1 (unit:
0.01), S3 =0 and S4=0.
3. Assume that when M2=ON, S1 is set to 1(frequency is inputted by digital
keypad), S2=1 (unit: 0.01), S3 =0 and S4=0.
4. D1027: frequency command after PID calculation.

M0
FPID H0 H0 H1 H1

M1
FPID H0 H1 H0 H0

M2
FPID H1 H1 H0 H0

M1000
MOV D1027 D1

END

14-63

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
FREQ S1 S2 S3 Operation control of the AC motor drive
142 P

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (7 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FREQ FREQP
S1 * * *
32-bit command
S2 * * * - - - -
S3 * * *
Flag signal: M1028
Operands: None
E xplanation 1. S1: frequency command, S2: acceleration time, S3: deceleration time
2. This command FREQ can control frequency command, acceleration time and
deceleration time of the AC motor drive. Special register control is shown as
following:

M1025: controls RUN (On)/STOP (Off) of the drive. (Run is valid when Servo
On (M1040 On).)
M1026: Operation directions FWD (On)/REV (Off) of the drive.
M1040: controls Servo On (On)/ Servo Off (Off).
M1042: enable quick stop(ON)/ disable quick stop(Off)
M1044: enable Stop (On)/ disable stop(Off)
M1052: frequency locked (On)/ disable frequency locked(Off)

Example 1. M1025: controls RUN (On)/STOP (Off) of the drive. M1026: operation direction
FWD (On)/REV (Off) of the drive. M1015: frequency attained.
2. When M10=ON, setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to
K300(3.00Hz) and acceleration/deceleration time is 0.
3. When M11=ON, setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to
K3000(30.00Hz), acceleration time is 50 and deceleration time is 60.

M1000
M1025
M11
M1026
M1000
M1040
M12
M1042
M13
M1044
M14
M1052
M10 M11
FREQP K300 K0 K0
M11 M10
FREQ K3000 K50 K60

END

14-64
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
CANRX S1 S2 S3 D Read CANopen slave data
261 P

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (7 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FREQ FREQP
S1 * *
32-bit command
S2 * * - - - -
S3 * *
D * * *
Flag signal: M1028
Operand: none
E xplanation 1. S1: Slave station number, S2: main index, S3: sub-index + bit length, D: save
address
2. Command CANRX can read the corresponding slave. Index. When executing this
command, it will send SDO message to the slave. At this time, M1066 and M1067
are 0 but when reading is complete M1066 will set to 1. If the slave replied an
accurate response, the value will be written to the designated register and M1067
is now set to 1. However, if the slave replied an inaccurate response, this error
message will be recorded in D1076~D1079.

Example M1002: touch once to activate PLC and change K4M400=K1. After the change,
different message will be displayed when M1066 is set to 1.

0 M1002
MOV K1 K4M400

6 M1066
TMR T30 K5

T10
ROLP K4M400 K1
17 M400
CANRXP K1 H6041 D120
27 M401
CANRXP K2 H6041 D121
37 M402
CANTXP K1 D120 H6041
47 M403
CANTX K2 D120 H6041
57 M402
CANFLSP D2025
61
M403
65 CANFLSP D2125

9999
END

14-65

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

API
CANTX S1 S2 S3 S4 Write CANopen slave data
264 P

Bit Devices Word Devices


16-bit command (7 STEPS)
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FREQ FREQP
S1 * *
S2 * * * * * 32-bit command
S3 * * - - - -
S4 * * Flag signal: M1028
Operands: None

E xplanation 1. S1: slave station number, S2: the address to write, S3: main index, S4: sub-index+
bit length.
2. Command CANTX can read the corresponding index of the slave. When
executing this command, it will send SDO message to the slave. At this time,
M1066 and M1067 are 0 but when reading is complete M1066 will set to 1. If the
slave replied an accurate response, the value will be written to the designated
register and M1067 is now set to 1. However, if the slave replied an inaccurate
response, this error message will be recorded in D1076~D1079.

API
CANFLS D Update the mapping special D of CANopen
265 P

Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (7 STEPS)


X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FREQ FREQP
D * *
32-bit command
Operands: None
- - - -
Flag signal: M1028

E xplanation 1. D: the special D for update.


2. CANFLS can update the Special D command. When it executes in read only
mode, it sends equivalent message as CANRX to the slave and saves the slave
response to this particular Special D. When it executes in read/write mode, it
sends equivalent message as CANTX to the slave and saves this special D
value to the corresponding slave.

3. M1066 and M1067 are both 0. When reading is complete, M1066 will be 1 and
this value will write to the designated register if the slave replies an accurate
response. When slave replies a fault response then M1067 will be 0 and this
error message will be recorded to D1076~D1079.

14-66
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 14 PLC Function |C200 Series

14.7 Error and Troubleshoot


Fault ID Fault Descript Corrective Action
Check if there is error in the program and
PLod 50 Data write error
download the program again.
Re-apply the power and download the
PLSv 51 Data write error when executing
program again.
Upload again. If error occurs continuously,
PLdA 52 Program upload error
please return to the factory.
Command error when download Check if there is error in the program and
PLFn 53 download the program again.
program
Program capacity exceeds memory Re-apply the power and download the
PLor 54 program again.
capacity
Check if there is error in the program and
PLFF 55 Command error when executing
download the program again.
Check if there is error in the program and
PLSn 56 Check sum error
download the program again.
There is no “END” command in the Check if there is error in the program and
PLEd 57
program download the program again.
The command MC is continuous Check if there is error in the program and
PLCr 58
used more than 9 times download the program again.
Download program error Check if there is error in the program and
PLdF 59
download the program again.
PLC scan time over-time Check if the program code is inaccurately
PLSF 60
written and download the program again.

14-67

Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com


Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 15 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C200 Series

Chapter 15 Suggestions and Error


Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives

15-1 Maintenance and Inspections


15-2 Greasy Dirt Problem
15-3 Fiber Dust Problem
15-4 Erosion Problem
15-5 Industrial Dust Problem
15-6 Wiring and Installation Problem
15-7 Multi-function Input/Output Terminals Problem

The AC motor drive has a comprehensive fault diagnostic system that includes several different alarms
and fault messages. Once a fault is detected, the corresponding protective functions will be activated.
The following faults are displayed as shown on the AC motor drive digital keypad display. The six most
recent faults can be read from the digital keypad or communication.

The AC motor drive is made up by numerous components, such as electronic components, including IC,
resistor, capacity, transistor, and cooling fan, relay, etc. These components can’t be used permanently.
They have limited-life even under normal operation. Preventive maintenance is required to operate this
AC motor drive in its optimal condition, and to ensure a long life.

Check your AC motor drive regularly to ensure there are no abnormalities during operation and follows
the precautions:

; Wait 5 seconds after a fault has been cleared before performing reset via keypad of
input terminal.
; When the power is off after 5 minutes for ≦ 22kW models and 10 minutes for ≧
30kW models, please confirm that the capacitors have fully discharged by
measuring the voltage between + and -. The voltage between + and - should be less
than 25VDC.
; Only qualified personnel can install, wire and maintain drives. Please take off any
metal objects, such as watches and rings, before operation. And only insulated tools
are allowed.
; Never reassemble internal components or wiring.
; Make sure that installation environment comply with regulations without abnormal
noise, vibration and smell.

15-1
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 15 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C200 Series

15-1 Maintenance and Inspections


Before the check-up, always turn off the AC input power and remove the cover. Wait at least 10
minutes after all display lamps have gone out, and then confirm that the capacitors have fully
discharged by measuring the voltage between DC+ and DC-. The voltage between DC+ and
DC-should be less than 25VDC.

Ambient environment
Maintenance
Check Items Methods and Criterion Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
Check the ambient temperature, humidity, Visual inspection and
vibration and see if there are any dust, gas, measurement with equipment ○
oil or water drops with standard specification
If there are any dangerous objects Visual inspection ○

Voltage
Maintenance
Check Items Methods and Criterion Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
Check if the voltage of main circuit and Measure with multimeter with ○
control circuit is correct standard specification

Digital Keypad Display


Maintenance
Check Items Methods and Criterion Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
Is the display clear for reading Visual inspection ○
Any missing characters Visual inspection ○

Mechanical parts
Maintenance
Check Items Methods and Criterion Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there is any abnormal sound or vibration Visual and aural inspection ○
If there are any loose screws Tighten the screws ○
If any part is deformed or damaged Visual inspection ○
If there is any color change by overheating Visual inspection ○
If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection ○

15-2
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 15 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C200 Series

Main circuit
Maintenance
Check Items Methods and Criterion Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there are any loose or missing screws Tighten or replace the screw ○
Visual inspection
If machine or insulator is deformed, cracked,
NOTE: Please ignore the
damaged or with color change due to ○
color change of copper
overheating or ageing
plate
If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection ○

Terminals and wiring of main circuit


Maintenance
Check Items Methods and Criterion Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If the terminal or the plate is color change or ○
Visual inspection
deformation due to overheat
If the insulator of wiring is damaged or color ○
Visual inspection
change
If there is any damage Visual inspection ○

DC capacity of main circuit


Maintenance
Check Items Methods and Criterion Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there is any leak of liquid, color change, ○
Visual inspection
crack or deformation
If the safety valve is not removed? If valve is ○
Visual inspection
inflated?
Measure static capacity when required ○

Resistor of main circuit


Maintenance
Check Items Methods and Criterion Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there is any peculiar smell or insulator ○
Visual inspection, smell
cracks due to overheat
If there is any disconnection Visual inspection ○
Measure with multimeter with ○
If connection is damaged?
standard specification

15-3
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 15 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C200 Series

Transformer and reactor of main circuit


Maintenance
Check Items Methods and Criterion Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there is any abnormal vibration or peculiar Visual, aural inspection and

smell smell

Magnetic contactor and relay of main circuit


Maintenance
Check Items Methods and Criterion Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there are any loose screws Visual and aural inspection ○
If the contact works correctly Visual inspection ○

Printed circuit board and connector of main circuit


Maintenance
Check Items Methods and Criterion Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
Tighten the screws and ○
If there are any loose screws and connectors press the connectors firmly
in place.
If there is any peculiar smell and color change Visual and smell inspection ○
If there is any crack, damage, deformation or ○
Visual inspection
corrosion
If there is any liquid is leaked or deformation in ○
Visual inspection
capacity

Cooling fan of cooling system


Maintenance
Check Items Methods and Criterion Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
Visual, aural inspection and
turn the fan with hand (turn
If there is any abnormal sound or vibration off the power before ○
operation) to see if it rotates
smoothly
If there is any loose screw Tighten the screw ○
If there is any color change due to overheat Change fan ○

15-4
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 15 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C200 Series

Ventilation channel of cooling system


Maintenance
Check Items Methods and Criterion Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there is any obstruction in the heat sink, air ○
Visual inspection
intake or air outlet

NOTE

Please use the neutral cloth for clean and use dust cleaner to remove dust when necessary.

15-5
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 15 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C200 Series

15-2 Greasy Dirt Problem


Serious greasy dirt problems generally occur in processing industries such as machine tools,
punching machines and so on. Please be aware of the possible damages that greasy oil may cause
to your drive:
1. Electronic components that silt up with greasy oil may cause the drive to burn out or even
explode.
2. Most greasy dirt contains corrosive substances that may damage the drive.
Solution:
Install the AC motor drive in a standard cabinet to keep it away from dirt. Clean and remove greasy
dirt regularly to prevent damage of the drive.

15-6
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 15 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C200 Series

15-3 Fiber Dust Problem


Serious fiber dust problems generally occur in the textile industry. Please be aware of the possible
damages that fiber may cause to your drives:
1. Fiber that accumulates or adheres to the fans will lead to poor ventilation and cause
overheating problems.
2. Plant environments in the textile industry have higher degrees of humidity that may cause the
drive to burn out, become damaged or explode due to wet fiber dust adhering to the devices.
Solution:
Install the AC motor drive in a standard cabinet to keep it away from fiber dust. Clean and remove
fiber dust regularly to prevent damage to the drive.

15-7
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 15 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C200 Series

15-4 Erosion Problem


Erosion problems may occur if any fluids flow into the drives. Please be aware of the damages that
erosion may cause to your drive.
1. Erosion of internal components may cause the drive to malfunction and possibility to explode.
Solution:
Install the AC motor drive in a standard cabinet to keep it away from fluids. Clean the drive regularly
to prevent erosion.

15-8
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 15 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C200 Series

15-5 Industrial Dust Problem


Serious industrial dust pollution frequently occurs in stone processing plants, flour mills, cement
plants, and so on. Please be aware of the possible damage that industrial dust may cause to your
drives:
1. Dust accumulating on electronic components may cause overheating problem and shorten the
service life of the drive.
2. Conductive dust may damage the circuit board and may even cause the drive to explode.
Solution:
Install the AC motor drive in a standard cabinet and cover the drive with a dust cover. Clean the
cabinet and ventilation hole regularly for good ventilation.

15-9
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 15 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C200 Series

15-6 Wiring and Installation Problem


When wiring the drive, the most common problem is wrong wire installation or poor wiring. Please be
aware of the possible damages that poor wiring may cause to your drives:
1. Screws are not fully fastened. Occurrence of sparks as impedance increases.
2. If a customer has opened the drive and modified the internal circuit board, the internal
components may have been damaged.
Solution:
Ensure all screws are fastened when installing the AC motor drive. If the AC motor drive functions
abnormally, send it back to the repair station. DO NOT try to reassemble the internal components or
wire.

15-10
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com
Chapter 15 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C200 Series

15-7 Multi-function Input/Output Terminals Problem


Multi-function input/output terminal errors are generally caused by over usage of terminals and not
following specifications. Please be aware of the possible damages that errors on multi-function
input/output terminals may cause to your drives:
1. Input/output circuit may burns out when the terminal usage exceeds its limit.
Solution:
Refer to the user manual for multi-function input output terminals usage and follow the specified
voltage and current. DO NOT exceed the specification limits.

15-11
Call 1(800)985-6929 for Sales deltaacdrives.com sales@deltaacdrives.com

You might also like

pFad - Phonifier reborn

Pfad - The Proxy pFad of © 2024 Garber Painting. All rights reserved.

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.


Alternative Proxies:

Alternative Proxy

pFad Proxy

pFad v3 Proxy

pFad v4 Proxy